all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.37 MiB | February 09 2008 | |||
1 |
|
Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 3.25 MiB | February 09 2008 | |||
1 |
|
Users Manual 3 | Users Manual | 4.12 MiB | February 09 2008 | |||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | February 09 2008 | ||||||
1 | External Photos | February 09 2008 | ||||||
1 | Internal Photos | February 09 2008 | ||||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | February 09 2008 | ||||||
1 | Test Report | February 09 2008 |
1 | Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 3.37 MiB | February 09 2008 |
JMA-9133-SA JMA-9133-SA JMA-9132-SA JMA-9132-SA JMA-9123-7XA/9XA JMA-9123-7XA/9XA JMA-9122-6XA/9XA/6XAH JMA-9122-6XA/9XA/6XAH JMA-9110-6XA/6XAH JMA-9110-6XA/6XAH MARINE RADAR MARINE RADAR EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT INSTRUCTION INSTRUCTION MANUAL MANUAL J M A
9 1 2 3
7 X A
9 X A J M A
9 1 1 0
6 X A
6 X A H J M A
9 1 2 2
6 X A
9 X A
6 X A H J M A
9 1 3 3
S A J M A
9 1 3 2
S A M A R I N E R A D A R E Q U I P M E N T I N S T R U C T I O N M A N U A L Not use the asbestos For further information,contact:
URL http://www.jrc.co.jp Marine Service Department Telephone :
Facsimile :
e-mail :
+81-3-3492-1305
+81-3-3779-1420 tmsc@jrc.co.jp AMSTERDAM Branch Telephone :
Facsimile :
e-mail :
+31-20-658-0750
+31-20-658-0755 service@jrcams.nl SEATTLE Branch Telephone :
Facsimile :
e-mail :
+1-206-654-5644
+1-206-654-7030 service@jrcamerica.com 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified MAR. 2008 Edition 1 JRC MAR. 2008 Edition 1 JRC Printed in Japan CODE No.7ZPRD0685 CODE No.7ZPRD0685 PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION Cautions for high voltage High voltages from hundreds volts to tens of thousands volts are to be applied to the electronic equipment such radio and radar devices. You do not face any danger during normal operation, but sufficient cares are required for maintenance, inspection and adjustment of their internal components. (Maintenance, check-up and adjustment of the inside of the equipment are prohibited except by maintenance specialists.) High voltages of tens of thousands volts are so dangerous as to bring an instantaneous death from electric shock, but even voltages of hundred volts may sometimes lead to a death from electric shock. To prevent such an accident, make it a rule to turn off the power switch, discharge capacitors with a wire surely earthed on an end make sure that internal parts are no longer charged before you touch any parts inside these devices. At the time, wearing dry cotton gloves ensures you further to prevent such danger. It is also a necessary caution to put one of your hands in the pocket and not to use your both hands at the same time. It is also important to select a stable foothold always to prevent additional injuries once you were shocked by electricity. If you were injured from electric shock, disinfect the burn sufficiently and get it taken care of promptly. What to do in case of electric shock When finding a victim of electric shock, turn off the power source and earth the circuit immediately. If it is impossible to turn off the circuit, move the victim away promptly using insulators such as dry wood plate and cloth without touching the victim directly. In case of electric shock, breathing may stop suddenly if current flows to the respiration center in the brain. If the shock is not so strong, artificial respiration may recover breathing. When shocked by electricity, the victim will come to look very bad with weak pulse or without beating, resulting in unconsciousness and rigidity. In this case, it is necessary to perform an emergency measure immediately. i FIRST-AID TREATMENTS First-aid treatments As far as the victim of electric shock is not in dangerous condition, do not move him and practice artificial respiration on him immediately. Once started, it should be continued rhythmically.
(1) Do not touch the victim confusedly as a result of the accident, but the rescuer may also get an electric shock.
(2) Turn off the power source calmly and move the victim away quietly from the electric line.
(3) Call a physician or ambulance immediately or ask someone to call a doctor.
(4) Lay the victim on this back and loosen his necktie, clothes, belt, etc.
(5) a. b. c. d. Examine the victim's pulse. Examine his heartbeat bringing your ear close to his heart. Examine his breathing bringing the back of your hand or your face close to his face. Check the size of the pupils of his eyes.
(6) Open the victim's mouth and take out artificial teeth, cigarette or chewing gum if any. Keep his mouth open, stretch his tongue and insert a towel or the like in his mouth to prevent the tongue from suffocating. (If it is hard to open his mouth due to set teeth, open it with a screwdriver and insert a towel in this mouth.)
(7) Then, wipe his mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside. ii When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped
(Mouth-to-mouth respiration) Fig 1.
(1) Tilt the victim's head back as far as this face looks back. (A pillow may be inserted his neck.)
(2)
(3) Push his jaw upward to open his throat wide (to spread his airway). Pinch the victim's nostrils and take a deep breath, block his mouth completely with yours and blow into his mouth strongly. Take a deep breath again and blow into his mouth. Continue this 10 to 15 times a minutes
(blocking his nostrils).
(4) Carefully watch that he has recovered his natural breathing and atop practicing artificial respiration.
(5) If it is difficult to open the victim's mouth, insert a rubber or vinyl tube into one of his nostrils and blow into it blocking the other nostril and his mouth completely.
(6) When the victim recovers consciousness, he may try to stand up suddenly, but let him lie calmly and serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep him warm and quiet. (Never give him alcoholic drinks.) Method of mouth-to-mouth respiration by raising hea
(1)Raise the victim's head. Support his forehead with one of your hand and his neck with the other hand. 1 When you tilt his head backward, the victim, in most cases, opens his mouth to the air. This makes mouth-
to mouth respiration easy.
(2)Cover his mouth as widely as possible with yours and press your cheek against his nose 2 or, pinch his nostrils with your fingers to prevent air from leaking. 3
(3)Blow into his lungs. Continue blowing into his mouth until his breast swells. Blow into his mouth as quickly as possible for the first 10 times. Fig 1. Mouth-to mouth respiration iii When both pulse and breathing have stopped Perform the (Cardiac massage) Fig 2. and (Mouth-to-mouth respiration) Fig 1. When no pulse has come not to be felt, his pupils are open and no heartbeat is heard, cardiac arrest is supposed to have occurred and artificial respiration must be performed.
(1) Place your both hands, one hand on the other, on the lower one third area of his breastbone and compress his breast with your elbows applying your weight on his breast so that it is dented about 2cm (Repeat compressing his breast 50 times or so a minutes). (Cardiac massage)
(2) In case of one rescuer, Repeat cardiac massages about 15 times and blow into his mouth 2 times quickly, and repeat this combination. In case of two rescuers, One person repeats cardiac massages 15 times while the other person blow into his mouth twice, and they shall repeat this combination. (Perform the cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth respiration)
(3) Examine his pupils and his pulse sometimes. When the both have returned to normal, stop the artificial respiration, serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep him warm and calm while watching him carefully. Commit the victim to a medical specialist depending on his condition. (Never give him alcoholic drinks.) To let him recover from the mental shock, it is necessary for persons concerned to understand his situations and the necessary treatment. Fig 2. Cardiac massage iv PREFACE Thank you very much for purchasing the JRC marine radar equipment, JMA-9100 series. This equipment is a marine radar equipment designed to obtain safe operation of marine ships. This equipment consists of a radar signal transmitter-receiver unit, a LCD display unit and a scanner unit as its main units. Before operating the equipment, be sure to read this instruction manual carefully for correct operation. Maintain this instruction manual so that operators can refer to it at anytime. Refer to this manual when any inconvenience or defect occurs. v Pictorial Indication Before Operation Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are shown on these equipment so that you can operate them safety and correctly and prevent any danger to you and/or to other persons and any damage to your property during operation. Such indications and their meanings are as follows. Please understand them before you read this manual:
This indication is shown where incorrect equipment operation due to negligence may cause death or serious injuries. This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in danger of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly. This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be injured or any property damage is supposed to occur if this indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly. Examples of Pictorial Indication The mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and WARNING).Detailed contents of CAUTION ("Electric Shock" in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark. Electric Shock The mark represents prohibition. Detailed contents of the prohibited action (Disassembling Prohibited in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark. Disassembling Prohibited Prohibited
Disconnect the power plug Instruction Warning Label The mark represents instruction. Detailed contents of the instruction (Disconnect the power plug in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark. There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment. Do not try to remove, break or modify the label. vi PRECAUTIONS Never conduct inspection or repair work of equipment components. Inspection or repair work by uncertified personnel may result in fire hazard or electrocution. For inspection and repair work of equipment components, consult with our branch office, branch shop, sales office, or our distributor in your district. When conducting maintenance, make sure to turn the main power off.Failure to comply may result in electrocution. Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment. Especially when a rectifier is used, make sure to turn it off since voltage is still outputted from the rectifier even after the indicator and the radar are turned off. Failure to comply may result in equipment failure, or death or serious injury due to electric shock. When conducting maintenance work on the scanner, make sure to turn its main power off.Failure to comply may result in electrocution or injuries.
vii
Make sure to turn off the scanner safety switch. Failure to comply may result in injuries caused by physical contact with the rotating scanner. Never directly touch the internal components of the scanner or indicator. Direct contact with these high-
voltage components may cause electrocution. For maintenance, inspection, or adjustment of equipment components, consult with our branch office, branch shop, sales office, or our distributor in your district. To contact our sales department, branch offices, branch shops, and sales offices:
Please refer to the "Office List" at the end of the document. Do not get close to the radiant section of the scanner. It is a rotating part, and it may cause injuries if it suddenly starts rotating and consequently hits the body. It is recommended that the radiant section be installed at a high place such as on the roof of the wheelhouse, on the flying bridge, on the trestle, or on the radar mast so that no one can get close to it. When any work must be done on the scanner, make sure to turn the safety switch off. viii Microwave radiation level:
Keep out from a distance closer than that specified below for each type of scanner when it is transmitting. Being within the specified distance from the center of the front face of the scanner may cause microwave exposure which could result in injuries (especially of the eyes). NKE-2103 (radiation levels: 10 W/m2): 0.6 m NKE-2254 (radiation levels: 10 W/m2): 0.6 m NKE-1125/1129 (radiation levels: 10 W/m2): 0.7m NKE-1130/1139 (radiation levels: 10 W/m2): 1.1 cm Make sure to install the scanner at a place higher than human height. Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects on the human body. Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects on the human body. When it is necessary to get close to the scanner for maintenance or inspection purposes, make sure to turn the indicator power switch to "OFF" or "STBY."
Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects on the human body. When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn off the power so that the power supply to the equipment is completely cut off. Some equipment components can carry electrical current even after the power switch is turned off, and conducting maintenance work without unplugging the power connector may result in electrocution, equipment failure, or accidents.
ix When cleaning the display screen, do not wipe it too strongly with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or thinner to clean the screen. Failure to comply will result in damage to the screen surface. Do not change MBS Level/Area unless absolutely necessary. Incorrect adjustment will result in deletion of nearby target images and thus collisions may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to insulate the batteries by attaching a piece of adhesive tape on the + and - terminals. Failure to comply may cause heat generation, explosion, or fire when the batteries get shorted out. Use the radar only as a navigation aid. The final navigation decision must always be made by the operator him/herself. Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or running aground.
x
Use Target Tracking (TT) function only as a navigation aid. The final navigation decision must always be made by the operator him/herself. Making the final navigation decision based only on tracking target information may cause accidents. Tracking target information such as vector, target numerical data, and alarms may contain some errors. Also, targets that are not detected by the radar cannot be acquired or tracked. Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or running aground. A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is instantaneously interrupted during operation of the radar. In this case, the power should be turned on again. When using the [AUTO SEA] function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the sea surface at close range. Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited. When using the [AUTO SEA] function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level. When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the rain or snow at close range. Detection of not only echoes from the rain or snow but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited. When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level. xi
When setting a guard zone, make sure to properly adjust gain, sea-surface reflection suppression level, and rain/
snow reflection suppression level so that the optimal target images are always on the radar screen. The guard zone alarm will not be activated for targets undetected by the radar, and it may result in accidents such as collisions. The simulation function is used exclusively for deciding whether or not target tracking is properly operating. Therefore, never use this function unless you wish to check target tracking operations. Note especially that, if this function is used during actual navigation, simulated targets are displayed and may become confused with other actual targets. Therefore, never use this function during actual navigation. Optimal values have been set for VD LEVEL and CONSTANT; therefore, never change their values unless absolutely necessary. Failure to comply may result in accidents that would lower target tracking performance. Make sure to shut off the main power before replacing parts. Failure to comply may result in electrocution or equipment failure.
When replacing magnetrons, make sure to shut off the main power and let the equipment stand for more than 5 minutes to discharge the high-voltage circuit. Failure to comply may result in electrocution. xii
Make sure to take off your watch when your hand must get close to the magnetron. Failure to comply may result in damage to the watch since the magnetron is a strong magnet. Make sure that two or more staff member work together when replacing the LCD. If only one person attempts to replace the LCD, he/she may drop it and become injured. Do not directly touch the inverter circuit of the LCD display with a bare hand since high voltage temporarily remains in the circuit even after the main power is shut off. Failure to comply may result in electrocution. Any adjustments must be made by specialized service personnel. Incorrect settings may result in unstable operation. Do not make any adjustments during navigation. Failure to comply may result in adverse effects on the radar function which may lead to accidents or equipment failure. Any adjustments must be made by specialized service personnel. Failure to comply may result in accidents or equipment failure. Do not make any adjustments during navigation. Failure to comply may result in adverse effects on the radar function which may lead to accidents or equipment failure. xiii Do not change the quantization level settings unless absolutely necessary. If set at an inappropriate value, the target acquisition or target tracking function deteriorates, and this may lead to accidents. xiv The Mounting Point of the Warning Label Warning Label NCD-4990 Display Unit Warning Label Front face Back face NWZ-170 Monitor Unit xv Warning Label NDC-1399-9 Radar Process Unit
(Desktop Type) Warning Label NBA-5135 AC/DC Converter
(Desktop Type) xvi Warning Label NQE-3141-4A/8A Interswitch Unit Warning Label NQE-3167 Power Control Unit xvii Warning La Warning NKE-2103-6/6HS Scanner Unit NKE-1129-7/9 Scanner Unit NKE-1125-6/9 Scanner Unit NKE-2254-6HS Scanner Unit xviii Warning Label NKE-1139/1130 Scanner Unit Warning Label NTG-3230/3225 Transmitter Receiver Unit xix EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE Scanner Unit Type NKE-1130 (12 feet) Scanner Unit Type NKE-1139 (12 feet) Transmitter Receiver Unit Type NTG-3230(30kW) xx Scanner Unit Type NKE-1129-7 (7 feet) Scanner Unit Type NKE-1129-9 (9 feet) Transmitter Receiver Unit Type NTG-3225(25kW) xxi Scanner Unit Type NKE-1125-6 (6 feet) Scanner Unit Type NKE-1125-9 (9 feet) Scanner Unit Type NKE-2254-6HS (6 feet) xxii Scanner Unit Type NKE-2103-6 (6 feet) Scanner Unit Type NKE-2103-6HS (6 feet) Power Control Unit Type NQE-3167 xxiii Display Unit Type NCD-4990 (Stand alone type) Interswitch Unit Type NQE-3141-4A xxiv Monitor Unit Type NWZ-170 (Desktop type) Operation Unit Type NCE-5163 (Desktop type) Radar Process Unit Type NDC-1399-9 (Desktop type) DISPLAY UNIT TYPE NCD-4990T (DESKTOP TYPE) xxv GLOSSARY This section describes the main terms used for this equipment and general related maritime terms. A AZ Acquisition/Activation zone A zone set up by the operator in which the system should automatically acquire radar targets and activate reported AIS targets when entering the zone. AIS Activated target A target representing the automatic or manual activation of a sleeping target for the display of additional information. Automatic Identification System A system which enables ships and shore stations to obtain identifying and navigation information about other ships at sea, using an automated transponder. Rain/snow clutter suppression. Sea clutter suppression. Anti-clutter rain Anti-clutter sea Associated target A target simultaneously representing a tracked target and a reported AIS target having similar parameters (position, course, speed) which comply with an association algorithm. AZImuth stabilization mode AZI B BCR/BCT Bow Crossing Range/Bow Crossing Time C C up CCRP Clutter COG CORREL Course up Own ship's course is pointed to the top center of the radar display. Consistent Common Reference Point A location on own ship, to which all horizontal measurements such as target range, bearing, relative course, relative speed, CPA or TCPA are referenced, typically the conning position of the bridge. Unwanted reflections on a radar screen, from sea surface, rain or snow. Course Over Ground The direction of the ship's movement relative to the earth, measured on board the ship, expressed in angular units from true north CORRELation xxvi CPA/TCPA CTW DRIFT EBL ETA The distance to the Closest Point of Approach/Time to the Closest Point of Approach. Limits are set by the operator and are related to own ship. Course Through Water The direction of the ship's movement through the water D The current velocity for manual correction or the current speed on the horizontal axis of the 2-axis log is displayed. E Electronic Bearing Line An electronic bearing line originated from own ship's position. Estimated Time of Arrival G Ground stabilization A display mode in which speed and course information are referred to the ground, using ground track input data. HDG HL HSC H up IMO IR ISW H Heading The horizontal direction that the bow of a ship is pointing at any instant, expressed in angular units from a reference direction. Heading line A graphic line on a radar presentation drawn from the consistent common reference point to the bearing scale to indicate the heading of the ship . High Speed Craft Vessels which comply with the definition in SOLAS for high speed craft Head up Own ship's heading line is always pointed to the top center of the radar display. I International Maritime Organisation RADAR Interference Rejector A device to switch over two or more radar display units and two or more scanners. L xxvii Lost AIS target Lost tracked target LP MMSI MOB MON MP NM N up PI Past positions POSN PRF PROC Radar beacon Radar cross-
section A target symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS target before the reception of its data was lost, or its last dead-reckoned position. One for which target information is no longer available due to poor, lost or obscured signals. Long Pulse M Maritime Mobile Service Identity Man OverBoard Performance monitor Medium Pulse 1nm=1852m North up N P Parallel Index line Equally time-spaced past position marks of a tracked or AIS target and own ship. POSitioN Pulse Repetition Frequency The number of radar pulses transmitted each second. PROCess Radar signal processing function R A navigation aid which responds to the radar transmission by generating a radar signal to identify its position and identity Radar cross-section of a target determines the power density returned to the radar for a particular power density incident on the target A set of concentric circles labeled by distance from CCRP. Range Rings Reference target A symbol indicating that the associated tracked stationary target is Relative speed Relative vector used as a speed reference for the ground stabilisation The speed of a target relative to own ship's speed data A predicted movement of a target relative to own ship's motion xxviii RM RM(R) RM(T) ROT Route RR SART Relative Motion A display on which the position of own ship remains fixed, and all targets move relative to own ship. Relative Motion. Relative Trails. Relative Motion. True Trails. Rate Of Turn Change of heading per time unit. A set of waypoints. Range Rings S Search And Rescue Transponder Radar transponder capable of operating in the 9GHz band Sea stabilization A display mode in which speed and course information are referred Sea state SET Sleeping AIS target SOG SP STAB STW TCPA Test target TM Trails to the sea. Status of the sea condition due to the weather environment, expressed as a sea state 0 for flat conditions with minimal wind, to sea state 8 for very rough sea conditions. The current direction for manual correction or the current speed on the horizontal axis of the 2-axis log is displayed. A target indicating the presence and orientation of a vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location. Speed Over the Ground The speed of the ship relative to the earth, measured on board of the ship. Short Pulse STABilization Speed Through Water The speed of the ship relative to the water surface. T Time to Closest Point of Approach to own ship Radar target of known characteristics used for test requirement True Motion A display across which own ship moves with its own true motion. Tracks displayed by the radar echoes of targets in the form of an afterglow. xxix True course True speed True vector Trial manoeuvre A graphical simulation facility used to assist the operator to perform a proposed maneuver for navigation and collision avoidance purposes. The direction of motion relative to ground or to sea, of a target expressed as an angular displacement from north The speed of a target relative to ground, or to sea A vector representing the predicted true motion of a target, showing course and speed with reference to the ground or sea Target Tracking. A computer process of observing the sequential changes in the position of a radar target in order to establish its motion. Such a target is a Tracked Target. Time To Go. Time to next waypoint. Transmitter Receiver Unit TXRX TTG TT UTC VRM U Universal Time Coordinated. The international standard of time, kept by atomic clocks around the world. V Variable Range Marker An adjustable range ring used to measure the distance to a target. W Waypoint A geographical location on a route indicating a event. xxx Index PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION .............................................. i FIRST-AID TREATMENTS .................................................................. ii PREFACE ................................................................................................................... v The Mounting Point of the Warning Label................................................................. xv EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE ................................................................................... xx GLOSSARY ............................................................................................................ xxvi SECTION 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION 1.1 FUNCTIONS ...........................................................................................1-1 Function of This System .................................................................1-1 FEATURES .............................................................................................1-2 CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................1-4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS .........................................................................1-6 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS ........................................................1-26 1.1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 SECTION 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2.1 2.2 2.3 NAMES OF DISPLAY .............................................................................2-1 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS ..................2-11 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS ...........................................2-16 SECTION 3 BASIC OPERATION 3.1 OPERATION FLOW ...............................................................................3-1 Power ON and Start the System ....................................................3-2 Observe and Adjust Video ..............................................................3-4 Acquire and Measure Data .............................................................3-4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP ............................3-4 End the Operation and Stop the System .......................................3-5 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO ..........................................................3-6 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL] ..................................................3-6 Change Observation Range [RANGE+/-] ......................................3-6 Tune ..................................................................................................3-7 Adjust Gain [GAIN] .........................................................................3-8 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA] ..........................................................3-9 Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [RAIN] ...........................................3-11 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.2.7 3.2.8 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] .............................................3-12 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed ............3-13 OPERATION PROCEDURES ..............................................................3-14 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball ........................................3-14 Operate Software Buttons ...........................................................3-15 Basic Menu Operation ..................................................................3-16 Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu .......3-17 Overview of Menu Structure .........................................................3-22 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION ........................................................3-23 3.4.1 Interference Rejection (IR) ............................................................3-23 3.4.2 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN] ....................................3-24 3.4.3 Target Enhance (ENH) ..................................................................3-25 3.4.4 Use Video Processing (PROC) .....................................................3-26 3.4.5 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI MODE) ................................3-27 3.4.6 Switch True/Relative Motion Display Mode (TM/RM) .................3-28 3.4.7 Move Own Ships Display Position (Off Center) .........................3-29 3.4.8 Display Radar Trails (Trails) .........................................................3-30 3.4.9 Zoom (x2) .......................................................................................3-33 3.4.10 Hide/Display Range Rings [HL OFF] ...........................................3-34 3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display [DATA OFF] .......3-34 3.4.12 Switch Day/Night Mode [DAY/NIGHT] .........................................3-35 3.4.13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL] ................................3-35 3.4.14 Set True Bearing ............................................................................3-36 3.4.15 Set Own Ship Speed .....................................................................3-36 3.4.16 Magnet Compass Correction (MAG Compass Setting) .............3-37 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK ...................................................................3-39 Display Own Ships Track (Display Own Track) .........................3-39 Set Display Color of Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track Color) ..3-40 Save Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ............................3-41 Cancel Saving of Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ........3-41 Clear Own Ship's Track (Clear Own Track) ................................3-42 Use Expanded Own Ship's Track (Own Track Type) .................3-42 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track) ..............................3-44 Use Water Temperature Track (Water TEMP Track) ..................3-45 Use Tidal Current Track (Current Vector Track) .........................3-46 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.8 3.5.9 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.6.5 3.6.6 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 3.7.4 3.7.5 3.7.6 3.7.7 3.7.8 DISPLAY USER MAP ...........................................................................3-47 Create User Map (Mark/Line) ........................................................3-47 Set User Map Display (Mark Display Setting) .............................3-50 Edit User Map (Edit User Map) .....................................................3-52 Correct Position on User Map (Shift User Map) .........................3-60 Save User Map ...............................................................................3-61 Set and Display Geodetic System (Geodetic) .............................3-65 USE ROUTE FUNCTION ......................................................................3-67 Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route) .........................3-67 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence) ................................................3-68 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint Input) .......3-75 Use Route Monitoring Function (Waypoint/Route Alarm) .........3-79 Method of Using Route .................................................................3-81 Detailed Route Settings ................................................................3-82 Clear Waypoint/Route Data (Clear WPT/Route Data) .................3-86 Operate Route Data File ................................................................3-87 APPLIED OPERATIONS ......................................................................3-91 Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting) .........................3-91 Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting) .....................................3-95 Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting) .................................................3-97 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting) ..........................................................3-98 Set Radar Display (Display Setting) ............................................3-99 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume) ....................................3-102 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2] ..........................................3-103 Set Navigation Data Display (Multi Window Setting) ...............3-105 AUTO Backup ..............................................................................3-110 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER] ...........................................................3-111 Operation Procedures .................................................................3-111 Function Setting Menu Items .....................................................3-112 Overview of Function Operations (User Function Setting) .....3-113 Overview of saved Function Setting Data .................................3-117 USE USER SETTING .........................................................................3-118 3.10.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting) ................................3-118 3.10.2 Load Operating State (Load User Setting) ................................3-119 3.10.3 Delete Operating State (Delete User Setting) ...........................3-119 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.8.5 3.8.6 3.8.7 3.8.8 3.8.9 3.9.1 3.9.2 3.9.3 3.9.4 3.9 3.10 3.11 USING CARD .....................................................................................3-120 3.11.1 Operate File on the Card (File Manager) ...................................3-120 SECTION 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS ..............................................................4-1 Using Cursor (Cursor) ....................................................................4-2 Using Range Rings (Range Rings) ................................................4-2 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL1/EBL2) ................................4-3 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI Menu) .............................................4-8 Operating EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver Setting) ....4-14 Operating EBL, VRM, and PI with Cursor ...................................4-16 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING ....................................4-19 Measurement with Cursor Position (Cursor) ..............................4-19 Measurement with Electronic Bearing Line and Variable Range Marker
[EBL] [VRM] .......................................................................................4-20 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points .....................................4-21 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 SECTION 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS 5.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................................5-1 Collision Avoidance ........................................................................5-2 Definitions of Symbols ...................................................................5-5 Radar Display ..................................................................................5-8 Cursor Modes (Cursor) .................................................................5-10 Setting Collision Decision Criteria ..............................................5-12 Setting Vectors (Vector Time) ......................................................5-13 Setting the GPS antenna location ................................................5-13 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION .....................................................5-14 Acquiring Target [ACQ] ................................................................5-14 Canceling Unwanted Tracked Targets [ACQ CANCEL] .............5-16 Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA] ..................................5-17 Displaying Target ID No.(Target Number Display) .....................5-18 Adding Tracked Target ID Name (Name) .....................................5-19 Reference Target (Reference) ......................................................5-20 Operation Test (TT Test Menu) ...................................................5-21 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 5.1.7 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 5.3.9 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 AIS OPERATION ..................................................................................5-26 Restrictions ....................................................................................5-26 Setting AIS Display Function (AIS Function) ..............................5-26 Activate AIS Targets (Activate AIS) .............................................5-27 Deactivate AIS Targets (Deactivate AIS) .....................................5-27 Displaying AIS Information [TGT DATA] .....................................5-28 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display) ....................5-31 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting) ...........................................5-32 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost ..........................5-35 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm (AIS Alarm Setting) ...............5-36 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL (Association) ...................5-37 Setting of Function to Decide Targets as Identical (Association) .....5-37 Setting of Conditions for Deciding AIS and Tracked Targets as Identical
(Association Setting) .............................................................................5-37 Types of Decision Conditions to be Set ......................................5-38 ALARM DISPLAY .................................................................................5-39 CPA / TCPA Alarm .........................................................................5-40 Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone (New Target) ..............................................................................................5-41 Lost Target Alarm (Lost) ...............................................................5-41 Gyro Set Alarm ..............................................................................5-42 TRACK FUNCTION ..............................................................................5-43 Past Position (Past POSN) ...........................................................5-43 Target Ship's Tracks (Target Track) ............................................5-44 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) ..........................5-53 Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode ................................5-54 Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode ..........................5-55 Operation of Trial Maneuvering Function ...................................5-56 SECTION 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON ...................................................6-1 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET ...........................6-3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER ..............................6-5 FALSE ECHOES ....................................................................................6-9 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART) ................................6-12 SECTION 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION .............................................................7-1 How to Open the Serviceman MenuService Man Menu .........7-1 GYRO I/F Setting .............................................................................7-2 Tuning (Tune Adjustment) .............................................................7-5 Bearing Adjustment ........................................................................7-7 Range Adjustment ...........................................................................7-7 Navigator Setting (Device) .............................................................7-8 Setting of True Bearing Value ........................................................7-9 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Height) .....................................7-9 Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting) ..................................................7-10 SETTINGS ............................................................................................7-12 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting) .......................7-12 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank) ............................................7-16 TNI Blank Setting (TNI Blank) ......................................................7-17 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scanner Unit (Output Pulse) ...7-18 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave) ..............................................7-19 Language Setting (Language) ......................................................7-20 Date Time Setting ..........................................................................7-20 Input Installation Information .......................................................7-21 Setting the Alarm System .............................................................7-22 ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................7-26 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level) ........................................7-26 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function (TT) ............................7-27 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment (MBS) .....................7-29 Adjustment of Performance Monitor ...........................................7-31 MAINTENANCE MENU ........................................................................7-33 Antenna Safety Switch (Safety Switch) .......................................7-33 Initialization of Memory Area(Area Initial) ...................................7-34 Save of Internal Memory Data (Card1/2) .....................................7-35 Restoration of Scanner Unit Operation Time (TXRX Time) ......7-36 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update) .............7-38 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.1.6 7.1.7 7.1.8 7.1.9 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.6 7.2.7 7.2.8 7.2.9 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 7.4.5 SECTION 8 COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ....................................................................8-1 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT ...........................................................8-2 8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1125/1129/1130/1139/2103/2254 ....................8-2 8.2.2 Wave Guide Tube (JMA-9123-7XA/9XA) ........................................8-4 8.2.3 Coaxial Cable (JMA-9133-SA) ........................................................8-4 Transmitter Receiver Unit (NTG-3225/3230) ................................8-5 8.2.4 Display Unit (NCD-4990) ................................................................8-5 8.2.5 PERFORMANCE CHECK ......................................................................8-6 Check Performance on Test Menu ...............................................8-6 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS ..................................................8-12 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement ..................................8-13 Replacement of magnetron ..........................................................8-13 Replacement of Motor ...................................................................8-28 Replacement of LCD Monitor .......................................................8-33 Replacement of Backup Battery ..................................................8-36 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.3.1 SECTION 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE 9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 FAULT FINDING .....................................................................................9-1 List of Alarms and other Indications .............................................9-1 Operation Checking ........................................................................9-5 Fuse Checking .................................................................................9-5 TROUBLE SHOOTING ...........................................................................9-6 Special Parts ....................................................................................9-7 Circuit Block to be Repaired ..........................................................9-8 AFTER-SALES SERVICE ....................................................................9-14 9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts .........................................9-14 9.3.2 When you Request for Repair ......................................................9-14 9.3.3 Recommended Maintenance ........................................................9-14 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2 9.3 SECTION 10 DISPOSAL 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT ....................................................................10-1 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES .....................................................10-1 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON ..................................................10-2 DISPOSAL OF TR-TUBE .....................................................................10-2 10.5 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS .................................................................10-3 SECTION 11 SPECIFICATION JMA-9133-SA TYPE RADAR ...............................................................11-1 11.1 JMA-9132-SA TYPE RADAR............................................................... 11-2 11.2 JMA-9123-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ....................................................11-3 11.3 JMA-9122-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ....................................................11-4 11.4 JMA-9122-6XAH TYPE RADAR .........................................................11-5 11.5 JMA-9110-6XA TYPE RADAR ............................................................11-6 11.6 JMA-9110-6XAH TYPE RADAR .........................................................11-7 11.7 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1139) ...............................................................11-8 11.8 11.9 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1130) ...............................................................11-9 11.10 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1129-7/9) ......................................................11-10 11.11 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1125-6/9) .......................................................11-11 11.12 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2254-6HS) .....................................................11-12 11.13 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2103-6) ..........................................................11-13 11.14 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2103-6HS) .....................................................11-14 11.15 TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3230) .................................11-15 11.16 TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3225) .................................11-16 11.17 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990) ...............................................................11-17 11.18 Target Tracking Function .................................................................11-20 11.19 AIS FUNCTION ...................................................................................11-21 11.20 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-84) ..............................................11-22 11.21 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-85) ..............................................11-22 11.22 AC-DC CONVERTER (NBA-5135) .....................................................11-22 Appendix A NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit A.1 A.2 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................A-1 Overview .........................................................................................A-1 Interswitch Setup ...........................................................................A-1 INTERSWITCH OPERATION ................................................................A-3 Operation Flow ...............................................................................A-3 Inter Switch Menu ...........................................................................A-4 Change of Connection Pattern (with 2 Display Units) ................A-6 A.1.1 A.1.2 A.2.1 A.2.2 A.2.3 A.3 A.2.4 A.2.5 A.2.6 A.3.1 A.3.2 A.3.3 A.3.4 Change of Connection Pattern (with 3 or More Display Units) ..A-7 Operating Connection Pattern Files (File Operations) ...............A-8 Names of Display Units and Scanner Units .................................A-9 REFERENCE .......................................................................................A-10 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern ...................A-10 Notes on Changing Connection Pattern ....................................A-10 Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit ...................................A-10 Setting at Installation ...................................................................A-11 Appendix B DRAWINGS B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit ...........................................B-1 NCD-4990 ........................................................................................B-2 NCD-4990 w/NBA-5135 ...................................................................B-3 NCD-4990T ......................................................................................B-4 NCD-4990T w/NBA-5135 ................................................................B-5 NWZ-170-R ......................................................................................B-6 NWZ-170-RT ....................................................................................B-7 NCE-5163-R .....................................................................................B-8 NCE-5163-RT ...................................................................................B-9 NBA-5135 ......................................................................................B-10 Power System Daigram of Display Unit ...........................................B-11 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit ................................................B-12 Primary Power System Diagram .......................................................B-13 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit ........................................................B-14 NKE-2103 ......................................................................................B-15 NKE-2254 ......................................................................................B-16 NKE-1125/NKE-1130 .....................................................................B-17 NKE-1129, NTG-3225 / NKE-1139, NTG-3230 .............................B-18 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit .......................................B-19 NKE-2103 ......................................................................................B-20 NKE-2254 ......................................................................................B-21 NKE-1125 (AC110V) ......................................................................B-22 NKE-1125 (AC220V) ......................................................................B-23 NKE-1129 (AC110V) ......................................................................B-24 NKE-1129 (AC220V) ......................................................................B-25 B.1.1 B.1.2 B.1.3 B.1.4 B.1.5 B.1.6 B.1.7 B.1.8 B.1.9 B.5.1 B.5.2 B.5.3 B.5.4 B.6.1 B.6.2 B.6.3 B.6.4 B.6.5 B.6.6 B.2 B.3 B.4 B.5 B.6 B.6.7 NTG-3225 ......................................................................................B-26 B.6.8 NKE-1130 (AC110V) ......................................................................B-27 B.6.9 NKE-1130 (AC220V) ......................................................................B-28 B.6.10 NKE-1139 (AC110V) ......................................................................B-29 B.6.11 NKE-1139 (AC220V) ......................................................................B-30 B.6.12 NTG-3230 ......................................................................................B-31 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ...............................................B-32 JMA-9110-6XA/JMA-9110-6XAH ..................................................B-33 JMA-9110-6XA/JMA-9110-6XAH (desktop) .................................B-34 JMA-9122-6XAH ............................................................................B-35 JMA-9122-6XAH (desktop) ...........................................................B-36 JMA-9122-6XA/9XA ......................................................................B-37 JMA-9123-7XA/9XA ......................................................................B-38 JMA-9132-SA ................................................................................B-39 JMA-9133-SA ................................................................................B-40 NCD-4990T ....................................................................................B-41 GYRO I/F .............................................................................................B-42 Inter Switch Unit .................................................................................B-44 Terminal Board Connection Diagram .........................................B-44 Interconnection Diagram .............................................................B-46 B.7.1 B.7.2 B.7.3 B.7.4 B.7.5 B.7.6 B.7.7 B.7.8 B.7.9 B.9.1 B.9.2 B.7 B.8 B.9 Appendix C Menu Index C.1 C.2 C.3 C.4 C.5 C.6 C.7 C.8 C.9 Main .......................................................................................................C-1 PI ............................................................................................................C-5 TT ...........................................................................................................C-7 AIS .........................................................................................................C-8 AZ ..........................................................................................................C-9 Track ....................................................................................................C-10 Route ...................................................................................................C-11 U.Map ..................................................................................................C-12 Serviceman Menu ...............................................................................C-14 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS BASIC OPERATION MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE DISPOSAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Appendix 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 A SECTION 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION 1.1.1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 FUNCTIONS ...........................................................................................1-1 Function of This System .................................................................1-1 FEATURES .............................................................................................1-2 CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................1-4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS .........................................................................1-6 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS ........................................................1-26 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 FUNCTIONS 1 This equipment is a high-performance radar equipment consisting of a scanner unit, a transmitter-receiver unit and a high resolution color LCD display unit. This equipment complies with the performance standard of IMO. 1.1.1 Function of This System The JMA-9100 series is a color radar system designed to comply with the international standards of the IMO.The main functions include:
sensitivity adjustment sea clutter and rain/snow clutter suppression interference rejection bearing and range measurement using a cursor, fixed/variable range markers, and electronic bearing line colored own track display(7 colors) NAV line and marker displays TM (True Motion) presentation Target Tracking functions (manual/automatic, target acquisition and tracking, self-diagnostic facilities radar performance monitoring (Performance Monitor) vector and trail displays, Trial maneuver and alarm displays) 8-unit switchover (Interswitch) function (option) 11 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.2 FEATURES 1.2 FEATURES Realization of Large, Easy-to-see Screen with High Resolution The 23.1-inch color LCD with high resolution of 1600x1200 pixels can display radar images of 320 mm or more in diameter. Even short-range targets can also be displayed as high-resolution images. Target Detection by Latest Signal Processing Technology The system employs the latest digital signal processing technology to eliminate undesired clutter from the radar video signals that are obtained from the receiver with a wide dynamic range, thus improving the target detection. Target Tracking (TT) Function based on Advanced Technology The target acquisition and tracking performance is enhanced by the use of the fastest DSP and tracking algorithm. So stable operation in target tracking under clutter is ensured. Acquisition and tracking of 100 targets. Hazardous conditions are represented by shapes and colors of symbols as well as sounds. Trial maneuvering functions provided. Tracks of up to 20 target ships can be stored with a maximum of 1,500 points for each of them, and displayed distinguished by using seven different colors. Overlay of Radar Images, Coastlines, and Own Ship's Track As well as operator-created NAV lines and own ship's tracks/ARPA tracks, which is stored on the memory card can be superimpose-displayed with radar images and radar trails in all display modes including the head-up mode. Easy Operation with GUI All the radar functions can be easily controlled by simply using the trackball and two switches to operate the buttons shown on the radar display. 12 1 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.2 FEATURES Improved Day/Night Mode Five types of background colors are available in Day/Dusk/Night mode (total 5 background colors). Each background color can be reproduced to be suited for the user's operating environment by simple key operation. The radar echoes and a variety of graphics can also be represented in different colors, ensuring easy-to-
see displays. Compact Design and Low Power Consumption Since an LCD has been implemented as the display device, the weight of the display is greatly reduced and the power consumption is lowered in comparison with the conventional radar equipment. Self-diagnostic Program Incorporated The Self-diagnostic program always monitors all the functions of the system. If any function deteriorates, an alarm message will appear on the radar display and an alarm sounds at the same time. Even when the system is operating, the functionality test can be carried out. (except on some functions) Performance Monitor The radar performance (transmitted output power and receiving sensitivity) can appear on the radar display. Easy Interswitch Operation (Option) If an interswitch unit (option) is connected, up to eight JMA-9100 radars can be switched over by performing simple operation. Up to 2 radars:
NQA-3141-2A is needed in Display Unit. Up to 4 radars:
NQA-3141-4A is needed separately. Up to 8 radars:
NQA-3141-8A is needed separately. Various Functions RADAR Trails (Other ship's track display) TM (True Motion) display Head-up/North-up/Course-up display Own ship's track display Auto-acquisition Zone function 13 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.3 CONFIGURATION 1.3 CONFIGURATION Table1-1:Specified of scanner, and categories of ship/craft for SOLAS V Radar model Antenna type JMA-9133-SA 12ft Slotted Antenna JMA-9132-SA 12ft Slotted Antenna JMA-9123-7XA 7ft Slotted Antenna JMA-9123-9XA 9ft Slotted Antenna JMA-9122-6XA 6ft Slotted Antenna JMA-9122-9XA 9ft Slotted Antenna JMA-9122-6XAH 6ft Slotted Antenna JMA-9110-6XA 6ft Slotted Antenna JMA-9110-6XAH 6ft Slotted Antenna Transmitted Output Power 30kW 30kW 25kW 25kW 25kW 25kW 25kW 10kW 10kW Band S S X X X X X X X Rate of rotation 24rpm 24rpm 24rpm 24rpm 24rpm 24rpm 48rpm 27rpm 48rpm Category CAT 1 CAT 1 CAT 1 CAT 1 CAT 1 CAT 1 CAT 1H CAT 1 CAT 1H The class of emission: P0N (All scanner types) Table1-2:Radar Configuration and Ship's Mains Radar model Scanner Unit Performance Monitor JMA-9133-SA JMA-9132-SA NKE-1139 NKE-1130 JMA-9123-7XA NKE-1129-7 JMA-9123-9XA NKE-1129-9 JMA-9122-6XA NKE-1125-6 JMA-9122-9XA NKE-1125-9 NJU-84 NJU-84 NJU-85 NJU-85 NJU-85 NJU-85 JMA-9122-6XAH NKE-2254-6HS NJU-85 JMA-9110-6XA NKE-2103-6 NJU-85 JMA-9110-6XAH NKE-2103-6HS NJU-85 Transmitter Receiver Unit NTG-3230 NTG-3225 D i s p l a y Unit NCD-4990 NCD-4990 NCD-4990 NTG-3225 NCD-4990 NCD-4990 NCD-4990 NCD-4990 NCD-4990 NCD-4990 Ships Main AC100 to 115V, or AC220 to 240V 50/60Hz 1 to 115V, or AC100 AC220 to 240V 50/60Hz 1 14 1 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.3 CONFIGURATION Notes:
1) The drive motor for the scanner unit is available in AC100-115V or AC220-240V type for NKE-1139/1130/1125/1129 series. Please specify the motor type when ordering. 2) The motor of NKE-2254/2103 can operate under both AC100-115V and AC220-240V, then need not to specify the motor type. 3) When using NKE-2254/2103, they need AC/DC Converter Unit NBA-5135 (Option) in display unit. 4) The scanner unit except NKE-2103 series can be equipped with a deicing heater as an option, and '-D' shall be suffixed to the type name. (e.g. NKE-1139-D, NKE-1125-6D). 5) When using the ship's mains of AC440V as the radar power source, a step-down transformer shall be used. 6) The desktop option is available for display NCD-4990. It has a separate structure consisting of the following:
Monitor Unit NWZ-170 Radar Processor Unit NDC-1399-9 Operation unit NCE-5163 7) In JMA-9123, the following type name of JRC is used for the waveguide between the scanner unit and the transmitter receiver unit. Type of Radar Waveguide Length(m) Type name of JRC JMA-9123-7XA/9XA JMA-9123-7XA/9XA FR-9 FR-9 20MT 30MT H-7AWRD0003 H-7AWRD0004 8) In JMA-9133, the following type name of JRC is used for the RF coaxial cable between the scanner unit and the transmitter receiver unit. Type of Radar RF COAX cable Length(m) Type name of JRC JMA-9133-SA HF-20D 30MT HF-20D (30MT) 15 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS Fig 1-1: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1139 Fig 1-2: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1130 Fig 1-3: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1129-7 Fig 1-4: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1129-9 Fig 1-5: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1125-6 Fig 1-6: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1125-9 Fig 1-7: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2254-6HS Fig 1-8: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2103-6 Fig 1-9: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2103-6HS Fig 1-10: Outline Drawing of Transmitter Receiver Unit, Type NTG-3230 Fig 1-11: Outline Drawing of Transmitter Receiver Unit, Type NTG-3225 Fig 1-12: Outline Drawing of Display Unit, Type NCD-4990 Fig 1-13: Outline Drawing of Monitor Unit, Type NWZ-170 (Desktop type option) Fig 1-14: NDOutline Drawing of Radar Process Unit, Type NDC-1399-9 (Desktop type option) Fig 1-15: Outline Drawing of Operation Unit, Type NCE-5163 (Desktop type option) Fig 1-16: Outline Drawing of AC/DC Converter Unit, Type NBA-5135 (Desktop type option) Fig 1-17: Outline Drawing of Interswitch Unit, Type NQE-3141-4A (Option) Fig 1-18: Outline Drawing of Interswitch Unit, Type NQE-3141-8A (Option) Fig 1-19: Outline Drawing of Power Control Unit, Type NQE-3167 (Option) 16 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 1 Fig 1-1: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1139 17 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS Fig 1-2: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1130 18 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 1 Fig 1-3: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1129-7 19 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS Fig 1-4: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1129-9 110 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 1 Fig 1-5: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1125-6 111 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS Fig 1-6: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1125-9 112 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 1 Fig 1-7: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2254-6HS 113 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS Fig 1-8: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2103-6 114 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 1 Fig 1-9: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2103-6HS 115 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS Fig 1-10: Outline Drawing of Transmitter Receiver Unit, Type NTG-3230 116 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 1 Fig 1-11: Outline Drawing of Transmitter Receiver Unit, Type NTG-3225 117 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS Fig 1-12: Outline Drawing of Display Unit, Type NCD-4990 118 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 1 Fig 1-13: Outline Drawing of Monitor Unit, Type NWZ-170 (Desktop type option) 119 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS Fig 1-14: NDOutline Drawing of Radar Process Unit, Type NDC-1399-9 (Desktop type option) 120 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 1 Fig 1-15: Outline Drawing of Operation Unit, Type NCE-5163 (Desktop type option) 121 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS Fig 1-16: Outline Drawing of AC/DC Converter Unit, Type NBA-5135 (Desktop type option) 122 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 1 Fig 1-17: Outline Drawing of Interswitch Unit, Type NQE-3141-4A (Option) 123 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS Fig 1-18: Outline Drawing of Interswitch Unit, Type NQE-3141-8A (Option) 124 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS 1 Fig 1-19: Outline Drawing of Power Control Unit, Type NQE-3167 (Option) 125 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS Fig 1-21: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9132-SA Fig 1-22: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9123-7XA Fig 1-23: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9123-9XA Fig 1-24: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9122-6XA Fig 1-25: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9122-9XA Fig 1-26: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9122-6XAH Fig 1-27: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9110-6XA Fig 1-28: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9110-6XAH 126 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 1 NKE-1139 SCANNER UNIT NJU-84 PERFORMANCE UNIT
( W I T H P M U N I T) C O A X I A L C A B L E H F -2 0D ( J R C S U P P L Y) NTG-3230 TRANSCEIVER UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
(5A) AC100V,60Hz 1,200 W 0 .6 /1 kV - D P Y C Y S- 1 .5 NBL-175 STEPDOWN TRANSFORMER SHIPS MAIN for HEATER AC220V,60Hz,1 1 4 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H - 2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6 M A X 2 3 (J R C S U P P L Y) 1 4 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H - 2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6 M A X 2 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y) NCD-4990 DISPLAY UNIT 0 .6/1 kV-DPYCY -6 0 .6/1 kV-DPYCYS -1 .5 SHIPS MAIN AC220V,60Hz,1,800VA SHIPS MAIN for POWER FAIL ALARM DC24V(BATTERY ),1W GYRO LOG(NMEA 0183) DGPS VDR RADAR(INTER SWITCH) ECDIS(JAN-901M) 250 V -MPYCYS -7 250 V -TTYCS-1 250 V -TTYCS-1 3 C-2V x 5 (MAX 30 m) 1 8 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H -2 6 9 5 1 1 1 1 5 3 M A X 1 8. 0 (J R C S U P P L Y) 250 V -TTYCS-4 H-2695110006 (JRC SUPPLY ) H -2 6 6 8 5 1 0 0 1 9 ( J R C S U P P L Y) S P A R E ALERM MONITORING SYSTEM
(NEAREST APPROACH)
(POWER FAIL) CONNING DISPLAY(JAN-701-CON) AIS 250 V -MPYC -4 250 V -TTYCS-4 250 V -TTYCS-4 Fig 1-20: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9133-SA Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation due to operation of the radar. All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder, etc. ) Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar should not be run parallel with the cables of radio equipment. 127 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS CIRCUIT BREAKER
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
(5A) AC100V,60Hz 1,200 W NKE-1130 SCANNER UNIT
( W I T H P M U N I T) NJU-84 PERFORMANCE UNIT 0. 6 /1 kV - D P Y C Y S- 1 .5 NBL-175 STEPDOWN TRANSFORMER SHIPS MAIN for HEATER AC220V,60Hz,1 1 4 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H -2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6 M A X 2 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y) GYRO LOG(NMEA 0183) DGPS VDR RADAR(INTER SWITCH) ECDIS(JAN-901M) 250 V -MPYCYS -7 250 V -TTYCS-1 250 V -TTYCS-1 3 C-2V x 5 (MAX 30 m) 1 8 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H -2 6 9 5 1 1 1 1 5 3 M A X 1 8. 0 (J R C S U P P L Y) 250 V -TTYCS-4 H-2695110006 (JRC SUPPLY ) H -2 6 6 8 5 1 0 0 1 9 ( J R C S U P P L Y) S P A R E ALERM MONITORING SYSTEM
(NEAREST APPROACH)
(POWER FAIL) CONNING DISPLAY(JAN-701-CON) AIS 250 V -MPYC -4 250 V -TTYCS-4 250 V -TTYCS-4 NCD-4990 DISPLAY UNIT 0 .6/1 kV-DPYCY -6 0 .6/1 kV-DPYCYS -1 .5 SHIPS MAIN AC220V,60Hz,1,800VA SHIPS MAIN for POWER FAIL ALARM DC24V(BATTERY),1W Fig 1-21: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9132-SA Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation due to operation of the radar. All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder, etc. ) Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar should not be run parallel with the cables of radio equipment. 128 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 1 NKE-1129-7 SCANNER UNIT NJU-85 PERFORMANCE UNIT
( W I T H P M U N I T) F L E X I B L E W A V E G U I D E F R -9 (J R C S U P P L Y) NTG-3225 TRANSCEIVER UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
(5A) AC100V,60Hz 1,200 W 0 .6 /1 kV - D P Y C Y S- 1 .5 NBL-175 STEPDOWN TRANSFORMER SHIPS MAIN for HEATER AC220V,60Hz,1 1 4 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H - 2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6 M A X 2 3 (J R C S U P P L Y) 1 4 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H - 2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6 M A X 2 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y) NCD-4990 DISPLAY UNIT 0 .6/1 kV-DPYCY -6 0 .6/1 kV-DPYCYS -1 .5 SHIPS MAIN AC220V,60Hz,1,800VA SHIPS MAIN for POWER FAIL ALARM DC24V(BATTERY ),1W GYRO LOG(NMEA 0183) DGPS VDR RADAR(INTER SWITCH) ECDIS(JAN-901M) 250 V -MPYCYS -7 250 V -TTYCS-1 250 V -TTYCS-1 3 C-2V x 5 (MAX 30 m) 1 8 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H -2 6 9 5 1 1 1 1 5 3 M A X 1 8. 0 (J R C S U P P L Y) 250 V -TTYCS-4 H-2695110006 (JRC SUPPLY ) H -2 6 6 8 5 1 0 0 1 9 ( J R C S U P P L Y) S P A R E ALERM MONITORING SYSTEM
(NEAREST APPROACH)
(POWER FAIL) CONNING DISPLAY(JAN-701-CON) AIS 250 V -MPYC -4 250 V -TTYCS-4 250 V -TTYCS-4 Fig 1-22: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9123-7XA Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation due to operation of the radar. All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder, etc. ) Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar should not be run parallel with the cables of radio equipment. 129 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS NKE-1129-9 SCANNER UNIT NJU-85 PERFORMANCE UNIT
( W I T H P M U N I T) F L E X I B L E W A V E G U I D E F R -9 (J R C S U P P L Y) NTG-3225 TRANSCEIVER UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
(5A) AC100V,60Hz 1,200 W 0. 6 /1 kV - D P Y C Y S- 1 .5 NBL-175 STEPDOWN TRANSFORMER SHIPS MAIN for HEATER AC220V,60Hz,1 1 4 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H - 2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6 M A X 2 3 (J R C S U P P L Y) 1 4 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H - 2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6 M A X 2 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y) NCD-4990 DISPLAY UNIT 0 .6/1 k V-DPYCY -6 0 .6/1 k V-DPYCYS -1 .5 GYRO LOG(NMEA 0183) DGPS VDR RADAR(INTER SWITCH) ECDIS(JAN-901M) 250 V -MPYCYS -7 250 V -TTYCS-1 250 V -TTYCS-1 3 C-2V x 5 (MAX 30 m) 1 8 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H -2 6 9 5 1 1 1 1 5 3 M A X 1 8. 0 (J R C S U P P L Y) 250 V -TTYCS-4 H-2695110006 (J RC SUPPLY ) H -2 6 6 8 5 1 0 0 1 9 ( J R C S U P P L Y) S P A R E ALERM MONITORING SYSTEM
(NEAREST APPROACH)
(POWER FAIL) CONNING DISPLAY(JAN-701-CON) AIS 250 V -MPYC -4 250 V -TTYCS-4 250 V -TTYCS-4 Fig 1-23: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9123-9XA Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation due to operation of the radar. All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder, etc. ) Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar should not be run parallel with the cables of radio equipment. 130 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 1 NKE-1125-6 SCANNER UNIT
( W I T H P M U N I T) NJU-85 PERFORMANCE UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
(5A) AC100V,60Hz 1,200 W 0 .6 /1 kV - D P Y C Y S- 1 .5 NBL-175 STEPDOWN TRANSFORMER SHIPS MAIN for HEATER AC220V,60Hz,1 1 4 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H -2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6 M A X 2 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y) GYRO LOG(NMEA 0183) DGPS VDR RADAR(INTER SWITCH) ECDIS(JAN-901M) 250 V -MPYCYS -7 250 V -TTYCS-1 250 V -TTYCS-1 3 C-2V x 5 (MAX 30 m) 1 8 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H -2 6 9 5 1 1 1 1 5 3 M A X 1 8. 0 (J R C S U P P L Y) 250 V -TTYCS-4 H-2695110006 (J RC SUPPLY ) H -2 6 6 8 5 1 0 0 1 9 ( J R C S U P P L Y) S P A R E ALERM MONITORING SYSTEM
(NEAREST APPROACH)
(POWER FAIL) CONNING DISPLAY(JAN-701-CON) AIS 250 V -MPYC -4 250 V -TTYCS-4 250 V -TTYCS-4 NCD-4990 DISPLAY UNIT 0 .6/1 k V-DPYCY -6 0 .6/1 k V-DPYCYS -1 .5 SHIPS MAIN AC220 V,60Hz,1,800VA SHIPS MAIN for POWER FAIL ALARM DC24V(BATTERY),1W Fig 1-24: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9122-6XA Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation due to operation of the radar. All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder, etc. ) Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar should not be run parallel with the cables of radio equipment. 131 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS CIRCUIT BREAKER
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
(5A) AC100V,60Hz 1,200 W NKE-1125-9 SCANNER UNIT
( W I T H P M U N I T) NJU-85 PERFORMANCE UNIT 0. 6 /1 kV - D P Y C Y S- 1 .5 NBL-175 STEPDOWN TRANSFORMER SHIPS MAIN for HEATER AC220V,60Hz,1 1 4 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H -2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6 M A X 2 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y) GYRO LOG(NMEA 0183) DGPS VDR RADAR(INTER SWITCH) ECDIS(JAN-901M) 250 V -MPYCYS -7 250 V -TTYCS-1 250 V -TTYCS-1 3 C-2V x 5 (MAX 30 m) 1 8 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H -2 6 9 5 1 1 1 1 5 3 M A X 1 8. 0 (J R C S U P P L Y) 250 V -TTYCS-4 H-2695110006 (JRC SUPPLY ) H -2 6 6 8 5 1 0 0 1 9 ( J R C S U P P L Y) S P A R E ALERM MONITORING SYSTEM
(NEAREST APPROACH)
(POWER FAIL) CONNING DISPLAY(JAN-701-CON) AIS 250 V -MPYC -4 250 V -TTYCS-4 250 V -TTYCS-4 NCD-4990 DISPLAY UNIT 0 .6/1 k V-DPYCY -6 0 .6/1 k V-DPYCYS -1 .5 SHIPS MAIN AC220V,60Hz,1,800VA SHIPS MAIN for POWER FAIL ALARM DC24V(BATTERY),1W Fig 1-25: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9122-9XA Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation due to operation of the radar. All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder, etc. ) Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar should not be run parallel with the cables of radio equipment. 132 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 1 NKE-2254-6HS SCANNER UNIT
( W I T H P M U N I T) NJU-85 PERFORMANCE UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
(5A) AC100V,60Hz 1,200 W 0 .6 /1 kV - D P Y C Y S- 1 .5 NBL-175 STEPDOWN TRANSFORMER SHIPS MAIN for HEATER AC220V,60Hz,1 1 4 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H -2 6 9 5 1 1 0 0 5 6 M A X 2 3 ( J R C S U P P L Y) GYRO LOG(NMEA 0183) DGPS VDR RADAR(INTER SWITCH) ECDIS(JAN-901M) 250 V -MPYCYS -7 250 V -TTYCS-1 250 V -TTYCS-1 3 C-2V x 5 (MAX 30 m) 1 8 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H -2 6 9 5 1 1 1 1 5 3 M A X 1 8. 0 (J R C S U P P L Y) 250 V -TTYCS-4 H-2695110006 (J RC SUPPLY ) H -2 6 6 8 5 1 0 0 1 9 ( J R C S U P P L Y) S P A R E ALERM MONITORING SYSTEM
(NEAREST APPROACH)
(POWER FAIL) CONNING DISPLAY(JAN-701-CON) AIS 250 V -MPYC -4 250 V -TTYCS-4 250 V -TTYCS-4 NCD-4990 DISPLAY UNIT 0 .6/1 k V-DPYCY -6 0 .6/1 k V-DPYCYS -1 .5 SHIPS MAIN AC220 V,60Hz,1,800VA SHIPS MAIN for POWER FAIL ALARM DC24V(BATTERY),1W Fig 1-26: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9122-6XAH Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation due to operation of the radar. All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder, etc. ) Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar should not be run parallel with the cables of radio equipment. 133 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS NKE-2103-6 SCANNER UNIT NJU-85 PERFORMANCE UNIT 1 9 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E C F Q- 6 9 1 2-* *
M A X 1 4. 5 (J R C S U P P L Y) GYRO LOG(NMEA 0183) DGPS VDR RADAR(INTER SWITCH) ECDIS(JAN-901M) 250 V-MPYCYS -7 250 V-TTYCS -1 250 V-TTYCS -1 3C-2 V x 5 (MAX 30m ) 1 8 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H - 2 6 9 5 1 1 1 1 5 3 M A X 1 8. 0 ( J R C S U P P L Y) 250 V-TTYCS -4 H-2695110006 (JRC SUPPLY ) H - 2 6 6 8 5 1 0 0 1 9 (J R C S U P P L Y) S P A R E ALERM MONITORING SYSTEM
(NEAREST APPROACH)
(POWER FAIL) CONNING DISPLAY(JAN-701-CON) AIS 250 V-MPYC -4 250 V-TTYCS -4 250 V-TTYCS -4 NCD-4990 DISPLAY UNIT 0. 6/1k V-DPYCY -6 0. 6/1k V-DPYCYS -1. 5 SHIPS MAIN AC220 V,60Hz,1,800VA SHIPS MAIN for POWER FAIL ALARM DC24V(BATTERY),1W Fig 1-27: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9110-6XA Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation due to operation of the radar. All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder, etc. ) Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar should not be run parallel with the cables of radio equipment. 134 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS NKE-2103-6HS SCANNER UNIT NJU-85 PERFORMANCE UNIT 1 1 9 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E C F Q- 6 9 1 2-* *
M A X 1 4. 5 (J R C S U P P L Y) GYRO LOG(NMEA 0183) DGPS VDR RADAR(INTER SWITCH) ECDIS(JAN-901M) 250 V-MPYCYS -7 250 V-TTYCS -1 250 V-TTYCS -1 3C-2V x 5 (MAX 30m ) 1 8 C O R E S C O M P O S I T E C A B L E H - 2 6 9 5 1 1 1 1 5 3 M A X 1 8. 0 ( J R C S U P P L Y) 250 V-TTYCS -4 H-2695110006 (JRC SUPPLY ) H - 2 6 6 8 5 1 0 0 1 9 (J R C S U P P L Y) S P A R E ALERM MONITORING SYSTEM
(NEAREST APPROACH)
(POWER FAIL) AIS 250 V-MPYC -4 250 V-TTYCS -4 250 V-TTYCS -4 NCD-4990 DISPLAY UNIT 0. 6/1k V-DPYCY -6 0. 6/1k V-DPYCYS -1. 5 SHIPS MAIN AC220V,60Hz,1,800 VA SHIPS MAIN for POWER FAIL ALARM DC24V(BATTERY),1W Fig 1-28: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9110-6XAH Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation due to operation of the radar. All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder, etc. ) Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar should not be run parallel with the cables of radio equipment. 135 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS 136 SECTION 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2.1 2.2 2.3 NAMES OF DISPLAY .............................................................................2-1 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS ..................2-11 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS ...........................................2-16 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Example of screen display In this example, the screen is divided into a number of areas and the names in each area are indicated. Upper left of the display PPI Upper right of the display 2 Own ship's information Target tracking (TT) /
AIS information Digital information Menu Brilliance /
Display information Alarm Lower left of the display Lower right of the display 21 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY PPI Ship's heading marker Ship's heading line Cursor mark Tracked target vector Tracked target number Tracked target symbol VRM2 EBL2 Automatic acquisition /
activation zone Association target Own ship's symbol Past position AIS target number AIS target symbol AIS target vector Radar trails Parallel index lines Other ship's track VRM1 EBL1 CPA ring 22 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Upper left of the display Range scale Tuning indication Range rings display On / Off Range rings interval Motion mode true / relative Radar trail true / relative Off center On / Off Transmission / standby X / S band Transmission pulse length Stability mode Azimuth display mode 2 Interswitch connection status About ground and sea stabilization Speed sensor source is MAN
, LOG
, 2AXW If Set/Drift Setting menu is on GND (Ground stabilization) If Set/Drift Setting menu is off Sea (Sea stabilization) Speed sensor source is GPS
, 2AXG GND (Ground stabilization) Interference rejection (IR) mode Target enhance (ENH) mode Sea clutter suppression (Sea) mode Rain / snow clutter suppression
(Rain) mode Tune mode Lower left of the display Double zoom On / Off Radar video processing (PROC) mode Function (FUNC) mode Gain dial position Sea clutter uppression (Sea) dial position Rain / snow clutter suppression (Rain) dial position Tune dial position 23 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Upper right of the display Cursor bearing numeric value indication true / relative Cursor bearing Cursor mode Cursor range EBL1 numeric value indication true / relative EBL1 bearing VRM1 range EBL2 numeric value indication true / relative EBL2 bearing VRM2 range Lower right of the display Own ship's track interval Mark color Own ship's track color Map display On / Off Graphic display On / Off Own ship's information Heading device Speed sensor Time display mode Positioning system
(example: GPS, DGPS ) Geodetic positioning system Ship's heading line On / Off Operation status Own ship's latitude Own ship's longitude 24 Cursor latitude Cursor longitude EBL1 starting point mode EBL2 starting point mode Parallel index line starting point mode Consistent Common Reference Point (CCRP) Own ship's track interval unit Map position correction indication CPA ring display On / Off Ship's heading bearing Own ship's speed Own ship's course over ground Own ship's speed over ground Date and time JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Target tracking (TT) / AIS information Target vector true / relative Target vector length TCPA limit CPA limit Past position true / relative AIS On / Off Tracked target symbol display On / Off AIS target symbol display On / Off 2 Target tracking (TT) /
EPA / AIS Past position display interval Past position display interval unit Association On / Off AIS filter mode Radar trails remaining time Radar trails true / relative Radar trails display time Numeric information: AIS target information AIS target number Simple display item Ship's name Call sign Course Speed Bearing Range Latitude / longitude error Navigation status Unread message MMSI CPA TCPA Ship's heading bearing Rate of turn Latitude Longitude Destination 25 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Numeric information: Tracked target information Tracked target number Bearing Range CPA TCPA True course True speed BCR BCT No information is displayed if digital information value is not displayed Numeric information: Enhancement of cursor position numeric value indication Cursor bearing Cursor range Cursor bearing numeric value indication true / relative Cursor latitude Cursor longitude 26 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Numeric information: Enhancement of EBL / VRM numeric value display EBL bearing VRM range EBL bearing numeric value indication true / relative 2 Numeric information: Navigation information Current direction Current speed Wind direction / speed numeric value indication true / relative Destination bearing Remaining time before arriving destination Graph information: Depth indication Depth Depth graph Depth Water temperature Wind direction Wind speed Destination distance Depth range Time range 27 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Graph information: Water temperature indication Water temperature range Time range Graph information: Wind direction / speed Wind direction Graph information: Course bar Water temperature Water temperature graph Wind direction / speed true / relative Wind speed Auto pilot course Ship's heading bearing Rudder Rate of turn 28 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Numeric information: Marker Marker bearing Marker range Arrival time Marker latitude Marker longitude 2 Menu Digital information Target Tracking (TT) menu Own Track menu Brilliance Digital information Target Tracking (TT) menu Own Track menu Display information Main menu AIS menu Route menu Main menu AIS menu Route menu Parallel index line menu Automatic acquisition /
activation zone (AZ) menu User map menu Parallel index line menu Automatic acquisition /
activation zone (AZ) menu User map menu Panel lighting brilliance Day / night mode Radar video brilliance Tracked target / AIS target symbol brilliance 29 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY Alarm Alarm indication
(The system alarm indicated in red. Other information indicated in blue or yellow.) 210 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS 2 0 3 9 2 E G N A R 4 1 3 1 I N A G A E S 9 1 8 1 2 M R V 1 M R V Q C A L E C N A C Q C A L A U N A M I N A R 7 1 T G T A T A D A T A D F F O L H F F O R A
S A I A P E N U T 6 1 R
T T C E V Y A D T H G N I I N O T P O 2 I N O T P O 1 R E S U L E N A P 8 2 9 8 7 6 5 2 R W P K C A I L A F R W P 1 R E W O P 4 M R A L A K C A 3 X T Y B T S 1 1 0 1 2 L B E 1 L B E 5 1 3 2 7 2 2 2 6 2 5 2 1 2 4 2 0 2 2 1 The name of each button is described from the following page. See below. 211 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
[POWER] (Power supply) switch The lamp is lit and the equipment is activated. If this switch is pressed while the equipment is running, the power of the equipment is shut down. 3.1.1 on page 3-2
[PWR ACK] (Power alarm acknowledgement) key Use this function to acknowledge the alarm when power supply abnormality occurs. To enable this key, an external battery (separate power from normal AC) is required.
[TXSTBY] (Transmission/Standby) key When the [POWER] switch is pressed, the "STANDBY" message is displayed in the top-left corner of the screen in about 3 minutes. If this key is pressed, transmission starts. If this key is pressed during transmission, the equipment is set to a standby state. 3.1.1 on page 3-2
[ALARM ACK] (Alarm acknowledgement) key Use this function to acknowledge alarms such as failure alarm, approaching target alarm, and collision alarm. By pressing this key at the occurrence of an alarm, the alarm sound can be stopped. If multiple alarms occur, press this key same time as the alarms. 3.2.7 on page 3-12
[TUNE] (Tuning) dial Use his function to tune a transmitter. The mode is switched to manual/automatic whenever this dial is pressed. 3.2.3 on page 3-7
[RAIN] (Rain / snow clutter suppression) dial This function suppresses rain / snow clutters. To increase the effect of suppression, turn the dial clockwise. The mode can be switched to manual or automatic by pressing the dial. 3.2.6 on page 3-11
[SEA] (Sea clutter suppression) dial This function suppresses sea clutter. To increase the effect of suppression, turn the dial clockwise. The mode can be switched to manual or automatic by pressing the dial. 3.2.5 on page 3-9 212 2 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
[GAIN] (Gain/pulse length) dial This function adjusts the reception sensitivity of the radar. To increase the sensitivity, turn the dial clockwise. The transmission pulse width can be switched by pressing the dial. gain3.2.4 on page 3-8 pulse width 3.4.2 on page 3-24
[RANGE ] (Range switching) key This function switches the range. Press [+] to increase the observation range. Press [-] to reduce the observation range. 3.2.2 on page 3-6
[EBL1] (Electronic Bearing Line 1) key Use this function to display and select EBL1. If the key is pressed for 2 seconds or more, the menu for setting EBL1 is displayed. 4.1.3 on page 4-3
[EBL2] (Electronic Bearing Line 2) key Use this function to display and select EBL2. If the key is pressed for 2 seconds or more, the menu for setting EBL2 is displayed. 4.1.3 on page 4-3
[EBL] (Electronic Bearing Line) dial This function rotates the azimuth of the EBL that is selected in EBL1/2. By pressing the dial, the selected EBL can be switched to Center fixing Floating Center fixing. 4.1.3 on page 4-3
[VRM1] (Variable Range Marker 1) key This function selects VRM1. The On/Off and dial use right are switched. on page 4-6
[VRM2] (Variable Range Marker 2) key This function selects VRM2. The On/Off and dial use right are switched. on page 4-6 213 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
[VRM] (Variable Range Marker) dial This function changes the range of the VRM that is selected by VRM1/2. By pressing the dial, the parallel line cursor function can be switched to Operation Fixed Off Operation. on page 4-6
[TR VECT] (True vector display / Relative vector display) key This function switches the display mode (true/relative) of the tracked target and AIS target vector. 5.1.6 on page 5-13
[TGT DATA] (Target data display) key This function displays the digital data of the tracked target or AIS target at the cursor position. the tracked target 5.2.3 on page 5-17 the AIS target 5.3.5 on page 5-28
[ACQ MANUAL] (Manual acquisition) key This function enables manual acquisition of the target at the cursor position. 5.2.1 on page 5-14
[ACQ CANCEL] (Tracked target cancellation) key This function cancels the symbol and vector of the target that is being tracked and stops the tracking of the target. If this key is pressed for 2 seconds or more, all the targets that are being tracked are cancelled. 5.2.2 on page 5-16
[DAY NIGHT] (Day/night mode) key This function switches the color and brightness of the screen that was preset. 3.4.12 on page 3-35
[AIS/TT] (AIS On/Off) key This function switches the AIS function to ON/OFF when the AIS function is enabled. 5.3.2 on page 5-26
[HL OFF] (Ship's heading line Off) key HL (ship's heading highlight line) can be set to Off only while this key is pressed. 3.4.10 on page 3-34 214 2 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
[DATA OFF] (DATA Off) key This function sets the graphics other than HL, range ring, EBL, and VRM to OFF temporarily while this key is pressed. 3.4.11 on page 3-34
[PANEL] (Operator panel brilliance) key This function adjusts the lighting brilliance of various switches and dial positions on the operator panel. The brightness changes cyclically whenever this key is pressed. 3.4.13 on page 3-35
[USER] key By pressing this key, the signal processing setting that is preset can be called. The setting changes to FUNC OFF ==> FUNC1 ==> FUNC2 ==> FUNC3 ==>
FUNC4 whenever this key is pressed. If this key pressed for 2 seconds or more, the function setting menu is displayed. 3.9 on page 3-111
[OPTION1] key By pressing this key, the pre-registered menu position can be directly displayed. At factory shipment, the calling of [Main Menu] is assigned. 3.8.7 on page 3-103
[OPTION2] key By pressing this key, the pre-registered menu position can be directly displayed. At factory shipment, the calling of [Sub Menu] is assigned. 3.8.7 on page 3-103 Track ball This function moves the cursor mark to any position. Use this function for setting in each mode. Use this function to specify a center position of floating EBL and an off-center position. 3.3.1 on page 3-14
[Track ball left button]
Use this function to confirm menu selection and numeric value input.
[Track ball right button]
Use this function to reset menu selection and numeric value input.
[BRILL] (Brilliance dial) This dial is provided at the right of the monitor. Use this function to adjust the brilliance of the monitor. 3.2.1 on page 3-6 215 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS In this radar, the frequently used functions can be directly set from the screen without opening the menu by using the software buttons on the screen for quick handling. The screen is divided into a number of areas and each area is named. Upper left of the display PPI Upper right of the display Own ship's information Target tracking (TT) /
AIS information Digital information Menu Brilliance /
Display information Alarm Lower left of the display Lower right of the display The name of each button is described from the next page. The function can be used by left-clicking while setting the arrow cursor on the button position. 216 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Upper left of the display Range scale switching Range rings display On /Off Motion mode true / relative switching Off center switching Transmission / Standby switching Interswitch connection change Transmission pulse length switching 2 Azimuth display mode switching 1 2 Range scale switching To increase the observation range scale (maximum 96NM), click the range (minimum 0.125NM), click
. and to reduce Range rings display On / Off The display of range rings are set to On / Off whenever this button is clicked. When the display is set to On, the interval of the fixed range marker is displayed. Motion mode true / relative switching 3
(true motion) The screen motion mode is switched whenever the button is clicked. indicates that the radar trails is a relative trail. indicates that the radar trails is a true trail.
(relative motion) TM RM(R) RM(T) RM TM 4 5 Off center switching If this button is clicked, the cursor is moved, and left-clicked, the ship's position can be moved to the cursor position. The moving range is within 66% of the radius. If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the off-center is set to Off and the ship's position is returned to the center of the screen. Transmission / standby switching At expiration of the pre-heat time after the power is turned on, Standby
. Preheat changes to Standby Transmit
:Indicates a standby state. If this button is clicked in this state, the equipment is set to a transmission state.
:Indicates a transmission state. If this button is clicked in this state, the equipment is set to a standby state. 217 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 6 7 Interswitch connection change This button is displayed when the interswitch is connected. This button indicates the connection status of the scanner unit that is connected to the indicator. If the button is clicked in the transmission standby state, the menu for changing the connection state between the scanner unit and the indicator is displayed. The connection state of the scanner unit and indicator cannot be changed unless the master indicator is in a standby state. Refer to the Appendix A NQE-3141 Interswitch Unit Interswitch (Optional) Instruction Manual that is attached for the setting method. This button is not displayed if the interswitch is not connected. Transmission pulse length switching The transmission pulse length is switched whenever this button is clicked. Three types of pulses are available, short pulse (SP), middle pulse (MP), and long pulse (LP). The pulse length and repetition frequency vary even for the same short pulse, according to the range that is used and it is displayed as SP1 SP2
. 8 Azimuth display mode switching The azimuth display is switched whenever this button is clicked. H Up
(Head Up)
(Course Up) If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the GYTO Setting menu is displayed.
(North Up) N Up C Up H Up Lower left of the display Radar video processing (PROC) mode switching Function (FUNC) mode switching Gain adjustment Sea clutter suppression (Sea) adjustment Rain / snow clutter suppression (Rain) adjustment Double zoom switching Interference rejection (IR) mode switching Target enhance (ENH) mode switching Sea clutter suppression (Sea) mode switching Rain and snow clutter suppression (Rain) mode switching Tune adjustment Tune mode switching 1 Double zoom switching Use this function to enlarge to double the size the display screen of the position specified by the cursor. If this button is clicked, the zoom mode is set. When the cursor is moved to the radar screen and left-clicked, the screen is enlarged to double the size so that the middle of the cursor and the own ship's position is set to the center of the screen. This function cannot be used when the range is 0.125NM. 218 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 2 3 4 5 Interference rejection (IR) mode switching The interference rejection mode is switched whenever this button is clicked. IR Off IR Meddle IR High IR Low IR Off Target enhance (ENH) mode switching The target enhance mode is switched whenever this button is clicked. 2 ENH Off ENH Level1 ENH Level2 ENH Level3 ENH Off Radar video processing (PROC) mode switching The radar video processing mode is switched whenever this button is clicked. PROC Off 3Scan CORREL 4Scan CORREL 5Scan CORREL Remain Peak Hold PROC Off Function (FUNC) mode switching The function mode is switched whenever this button is clicked. FUNC Off Deep Sea Coast Fishnet Storm FUNC Off If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the function registration menu (User Function Setting) is opened. 6
, 7
, 8 and 9 Gain, Sea clutter suppression(Sea)Rain / snow clutter suppression (Rain), Tune adjustment (Tune) Adjust the gain, sea clutter suppression, rain / snow clutter suppression and tune using the track ball. If the button is clicked on, the adjustment value is shown at the upper-right of the cursor. Make adjustments by moving the track ball to the left and right. Determine the adjustment by left-clicking. 10
, 11 and 12 Sea clutter suppression (Sea) mode, Rain and snow clutter suppression (Rain) mode, and Tune mode switching Use these functions to switch to the manual or automatic mode of sea clutter suppression, rain and snow clutter suppression, and tune. The bar on the left side indicates the position of the dial. MAN The mode is switched to button is clicked. If rain and snow clutter suppression is switched to an automatic mode, sea clutter suppression is switched to an automatic mode also.
(automatic) whenever the
(manual) /
AUTO 219 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Upper Right of the display EBL1 numeric value indication true / relative switching Mark font / line pattern switching Cursor mode switching Cursor bearing numeric value display true / relative switching EBL1 adjustment VRM1 adjustment EBL2 adjustment VRM2 adjustment Mark color / line color switching EBL1 starting point mode switching EBL2 starting point mode switching Parallel index line setting EBL2 numeric value indication true / relative switching Parallel index line starting point mode switching 1 Cursor mode switching The mode of the function that uses the cursor is switched whenever this button is pressed. AUTO DEACT AIS ACQ TT CNCL Data ACT AIS TGT Data CNCL TT
Property AUTO Mark font / line pattern switching 2 This function switches a mark font / line pattern. If this button is clicked while the cursor mode is changed.
(line), the mark font / line pattern is
(mark) or
Mark color / line color switching 3 This function switches a mark color / line color. If this button is clicked while the cursor mode is changed.
(line), the mark color / line color is
(mark) or
4 Cursor bearing numeric value display true / relative switching The bearing numeric value display cursor is switched whenever this button is clicked.
(true bearing) /
R T
(relative bearing) of the 220 2 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 5
, 6
, 7 and 8 EBL1 / 2 and VRM1 / 2 adjustment These functions set the EBL1 , VRM1 , EBL2 , and VRM2 displays to On / Off and acquire the operation right. If the button is clicked on, the operation right is acquired. Make adjustments by moving the track ball to the left and right Determine the adjustment by left-clicking. 9 11 13 14 10 EBL1, EBL2 numeric value true / relative switching and The EBL1 / 2 bearing numeric value display bearing) is switched whenever the button is clicked. If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the EBL / Cursor Setting menu is displayed.
(true bearing) /
(relative R T 12 EBL1 / EBL2 starting point mode switching and The EBL starting point is set to CCRP or any position on the radar screen whenever this button is clicked. _ D C _ _ C Center Screen Fix D L/L Fixi The starting point is fixed to the CCRP position. The starting point is set to the cursor position. If left-
clicked subsequently, the starting position is fixed to the cursor position. The starting point is set to the cursor position. If left-clicked subsequently, the starting position is fixed to the latitude / longitude of the cursor.
(Connection of a navigator is necessary.) If the starting point is moved outside of the screen, the operation is reset automatically and the starting point returns to the CCRP position. i. D is enabled only when a navigator is connected. Parallel index line setting This function sets the parallel index line display to On / Off and acquires the operation right. If this button is clicked, the operation right is acquired and the menu is opened. After setting, determine the setting by left-clicking. Parallel index line starting point mode switching The parallel index line starting point is set to CCRP or any position on the radar screen whenever this button is clicked. In the same way as for the EBL starting point, three options are available, C
: Screen Fix, and
: L/L Fix.
: Center, D _ 221 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Lower right of the display Mark color switching Own ships track color switching Map display On / Off Graphic display Off Own ship's track interval switching Own ship's track interval unit switching CPA ring display On / Off Ship's heading line Off Mark color switching 1 The color of the mark is switched whenever this button is clicked. If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the Mark Setting menu is opened. Own ship's track color switching The own ship's track color is switched whenever this button is clicked. Own ship's track interval switching The own ship's track interval is switched whenever this button is clicked. Own ship's track interval unit switching The unit of the own ship's track interval is switched whenever this button is clicked. min sec sec NM 2 3 4 Map display On / Off 5 The map display is set to On / Off whenever this button is clicked. Map information must be inserted in the card slot of the radar process unit in advance. If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the Map Setting menu is opened. 6 7 Graphic display Off While the button is clicked, the graphic display other than VRM, EBL, HL, a cursor, and range rings on the radar screen is cleared temporarily. Ship's heading line Off The ship's heading line (HL) display is set to Off while this button is clicked. Since the ship's heading line is cleared while the button is clicked, the target in the ship's heading bearing can be clearly seen. 222 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 8 CPA ring display On / Off The CPA ring display is switched to On / Off whenever the button is clicked. When the target vector display mode is On. T
(true vector), the CPA ring cannot be set to Own ship's information Heading device switching Speed sensor switching Time display mode switching 2 Manual own ship's speed setting 1 2 3 Heading device switching The heading device is switched whenever this button is clicked. When the selected heading device is not connected to the equipment, an alarm is issued.
(Electronic compass) GYRO GYRO CMPS Speed sensor switching The speed sensor is switched whenever the button is clicked. MAN log) When the selected speed device is not connected to the equipment, an alarm is issued.
(Manual) 2AXG
(Dual-axis ground log)
(Single-axis water log)
(Dual-axis water 2AXW MAN LOG GPS Time display mode switching The time display mode switched whenever this button is clicked. UTC
(universal time clock) /
LMT
(local mean time) is Manual own ship's speed setting 4 When selection of the speed sensor is set to manually. If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting a value, determine the entry by clicking
, enter the own ship's speed MAN
. ENT 223 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Target tracking (TT) / AIS information Target vector display true / relative switching CPA limit setting Past position display true / relative switching AIS On / Off Tracked target symbol display On / Off AIS target symbol display On / Off Target vector length setting TCPA limit setting Past position display interval switching Past position display interval unit switching Association On / Off AIS filter mode switching Radar trails display true / relative switching Radar trails display time switching 1 2 3 4 5 Target vector display true / relative switching The tracked target / AIS target vector display is switched to
(relative vector) whenever this button is clicked. This setting is switched together with the past position display true / relative switching.
(true vector) /
R T Target vector length setting Set a vector length of the tracked target / AIS target. If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting the length, determine the setting by clicking ENT
. CPA limit setting Set a CPA limit. If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting the limit, determine the setting by clicking ENT
. TCPA limit setting Set a TCPA limit. If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting the limit, determine the setting by clicking
. ENT Past position display true / relative switching The tracked target / AIS target past position display is switched to position) /
This setting is switched together with the target vector display true / relative switching. T
(relative past position) whenever the button is clicked.
(true past R 224 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Past position display interval switching The past position display interval is switched whenever the button is clicked. Past position display interval unit switching The past position display interval unit is switched whenever the button is clicked. min NM min 2 AIS On / Off The AIS display is switched to On / Off whenever the button is clicked. Tracked target symbol display On / Off The tracked target symbol display is switched to On / Off whenever the button is clicked. Use this function to avoid confusion with the AIS symbol. AIS target symbol display On / Off The AIS target symbol display is switched to On / Off whenever the button is clicked. Use this function to avoid confusion with the tracked target symbol. Association On / Off The tracked target / AIS target association is switched to On / Off whenever the button is clicked. AIS filter mode switching The AIS filter is switched whenever the button is clicked. Range Range Sector Zone Radar trails display true / relative switching
(true motion trail) /
Radar trails are switched to T whenever this button is clicked. This setting is restricted by the radar display motion mode. In relative motion display mode (RM), switching to
In true motion display mode (TM), only T can be set. R T
(relative motion trail) R is possible. Radar trails display time switching The radar trails display time is switched whenever the button is clicked. If the time does not reach the radar trails time that was set, the remaining time is displayed on the right-hand side. If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the RADAR Trails Setting menu is opened. 225 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Numeric information: AIS target information simple display Detail / simple display switching Unread message display 1 2 Detail / simple display switching This function switches the display mode to detail / simple display when AIS target information is displayed. Unread message display When there is an unread message from the AIS target that is displayed, the message is displayed. If this button is clicked, the message is displayed. 226 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Numeric information: Tracked target information Tracked target numeric value indication scroll 2 1 Tracked target numeric value indication scroll This function scrolls the target numbers that are indicated in the tracked target information. Numeric information: Navigation information Wind direction / speed numeric value indication true / relative switching Wind direction / speed numeric value indication true / relative 1 switching The wind direction / speed numeric value indication is switched to
(relative) whenever this button is clicked. T
(true) /
R 227 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Graph information: Wind direction / speed Wind direction / speed numeric value indication true / relative switching Wind direction / speed numeric value indication true / relative 1 switching The wind direction / speed numeric value indication is switched to
(relative) whenever this button is clicked. T
(true) /
R Menu Digital information display Target Tracking (TT) menu Own ships track menu Main menu Parallel index line menu Automatic acquisition /
activation zone (AZ) menu User map menu 1 2 3 AIS menu Route menu Digital information display If this button is clicked while the menu screen is open, the menu is closed and control returns to the digital information display. This function switches between the tracked target / AIS target display and navigation information or the course bar, and so on. Target Tracking (TT) menu If this button is clicked, the TT Menu is opened. Own track menu If this button is clicked, the Own Track Menu is opened. Main menu 4 If this button is clicked, the Main Menu is opened. 228 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 5 6 7 8 9 AIS menu If the button is clicked, the AIS Menu is opened. Route menu If this button is clicked, the Route Menu is opened. Parallel index line menu If this button is clicked, the PI Menu is opened. Automatic acquisition / activation zone menu If this button is clicked, the AZ Menu is opened. User map menu If the button is clicked, the User Map Menu is opened. 2 Brilliance Panel lighting brilliance switching Display item switching Day / night mode switching Radar video brilliance switching Tracked target / AIS target symbol brilliance switching Display information Display item switching User map load User setting load 229 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 1 Display item switching The brilliance adjustment screen and display information setting screen interchange whenever this button is clicked. 2 3 4 5 6 7 Panel lighting brilliance switching This function enables the setting of the brilliance of the lighting of the control panel. The brilliance changes whenever this button is clicked. Five levels of settings are available. Radar video brilliance switching Adjust the brightness of the radar video (echo). The brilliance changes whenever this button is clicked. Four levels of settings are available. Tracked target / AIS target symbol brilliance switching Use this function to adjust the brilliance of the tracked target / AIS target symbol. The brilliance changes whenever this button is clicked. Five levels of settings are available. Day / night mode switching The day / night mode is switched whenever this button is clicked. Day3 Day1 Day2 Dusk Day2 Day3 Dusk Night User map load If this button is clicked, the user created map read menu is opened. User setting load If this button is clicked, the user setting read menu is opened. 230 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS Alarm Alarm acknowridgement Error log display 1 Alarm acknowledgment If this button is clicked, the buzzer sound of the alarm that is currently issued is stopped and the alarm lamp stops blinking. If multiple alarms are issued, the next alarm to be acknowledged is displayed. If the button is clicked, the alarm displayed on the top is acknowledged. The alarms that are currently issued are displayed at the bottom one by one. 2 Error log display If this button is clicked, the error log is display. 2 231 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS 232 SECTION 3 BASIC OPERATION BASIC OPERATION 3.1 3.2 OPERATION FLOW ...............................................................................3-1 Power ON and Start the System ....................................................3-2 Observe and Adjust Video ..............................................................3-4 Acquire and Measure Data .............................................................3-4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP ............................3-4 End the Operation and Stop the System .......................................3-5 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO ..........................................................3-6 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL] ..................................................3-6 Change Observation Range [RANGE+/-] ......................................3-6 Tune ..................................................................................................3-7 Adjust Gain [GAIN] .........................................................................3-8 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA] ..........................................................3-9 Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [RAIN] ...........................................3-11 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] .............................................3-12 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed ...3-13 OPERATION PROCEDURES ..............................................................3-14 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball ........................................3-14 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8 3.3.1 3.3 3.3.5 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 Operate Software Buttons ...........................................................3-15 Basic Menu Operation ..................................................................3-16 Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu .....................................................................................3-17 Overview of Menu Structure .........................................................3-22 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION ........................................................3-23 Interference Rejection (IR) ............................................................3-23 3.4.1 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN] ....................................3-24 3.4.2 Target Enhance (ENH) ..................................................................3-25 3.4.3 Use Video Processing (PROC) .....................................................3-26 3.4.4 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI MODE) ................................3-27 3.4.5 Switch True/Relative Motion Display Mode (TM/RM) .................3-28 3.4.6 Move Own Ships Display Position (Off Center) .........................3-29 3.4.7 Display Radar Trails (Trails) .........................................................3-30 3.4.8 3.4.9 Zoom (x2) .......................................................................................3-33 3.4.10 Hide/Display Range Rings [HL OFF] ...........................................3-34 3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display [DATA OFF] .......3-34 3.4.12 Switch Day/Night Mode [DAY/NIGHT] .........................................3-35 3.4.13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL] ................................3-35 3.4.14 Set True Bearing ............................................................................3-36 3.4.15 Set Own Ship Speed .....................................................................3-36 3.4.16 Magnet Compass Correction (MAG Compass Setting) .............3-37 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK ...................................................................3-39 Display Own Ships Track (Display Own Track) ......................3-39 Set Display Color of Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track Color) ..3-40 Save Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ............................3-41 Cancel Saving of Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ........3-41 Clear Own Ship's Track (Clear Own Track) ................................3-42 Use Expanded Own Ship's Track (Own Track Type) .................3-42 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track) ..............................3-44 Use Water Temperature Track (Water TEMP Track) ..................3-45 Use Tidal Current Track (Current Vector Track) .........................3-46 DISPLAY USER MAP ...........................................................................3-47 Create User Map (Mark/Line) ........................................................3-47 Set User Map Display (Mark Display Setting) .............................3-50 Edit User Map (Edit User Map) .....................................................3-52 Correct Position on User Map (Shift User Map) .........................3-60 Save User Map ...............................................................................3-61 Set and Display Geodetic System (Geodetic) .............................3-65 USE ROUTE FUNCTION ......................................................................3-67 Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route) .........................3-67 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence) ................................................3-68 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint Input) .......3-75 Use Route Monitoring Function (Waypoint/Route Alarm) .........3-79 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.8 3.5.9 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.6.5 3.6.6 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 3.7.4 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.7.5 3.7.6 3.7.7 3.7.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.8.5 3.8.6 3.8.7 3.8.8 3.8.9 Method of Using Route .................................................................3-81 Detailed Route Settings ................................................................3-82 Clear Waypoint/Route Data (Clear WPT/Route Data) .................3-86 Operate Route Data File ................................................................3-87 APPLIED OPERATIONS ......................................................................3-91 Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting) .........................3-91 Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting) .....................................3-95 Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting) .................................................3-97 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting) ..........................................................3-98 Set Radar Display (Display Setting) ............................................3-99 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume) ....................................3-102 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2] ..........................................3-103 Set Navigation Data Display (Multi Window Setting) ...............3-105 AUTO Backup ..............................................................................3-110 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER] ...........................................................3-111 Operation Procedures .................................................................3-111 Function Setting Menu Items .....................................................3-112 Overview of Function Operations (User Function Setting) .....3-113 Overview of saved Function Setting Data .................................3-117 USE USER SETTING .........................................................................3-118 3.10.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting) ................................3-118 3.10.2 Load Operating State (Load User Setting) ................................3-119 3.10.3 Delete Operating State (Delete User Setting) ...........................3-119 USING CARD .....................................................................................3-120 3.11.1 Operate File on the Card (File Manager) ...................................3-120 3.9.1 3.9.2 3.9.3 3.9.4 3.9 3.10 3.11 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW 3.1 OPERATION FLOW Attention Do not put anything on the operation panel. If you put anything hot on it, it may be deformed. Do not give any impact to the operation panel, trackball, or controls. Otherwise, any failure or damage may result. 3 POWER ON AND START THE SYSTEM OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO ACQUIRE AND MEASURE DATA END THE OPERATION AND STOP THE SYSTEM Each operation is described in detail below. 31 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW 3.1.1 Power ON and Start the System
A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is instantaneously interrupted during operation of the radar. In this case, the power should be turned on again. Attention Wait for about 2 seconds before turning on the power again. Immediately after the radar is installed, at start of the system after it has not been used for a long time, or after the magnetron is replaced, preheat the equipment in the standby state for 20 to 30 minutes before setting it into the transmit state. If the preheating time is short, the magnetron causes sparks, resulting in its unstable oscillation. Start transmission on a short-pulse range and change the range to the longer pulse ranges in turn. If the transmission is unstable in the meantime, immediately place the system back into the standby state and maintain it in the standby state for 5 to 10 minutes before restarting the operation. Repeat these steps until the operation is stabilized. 32 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW Procedures 1) Check that the ships mains are turned on. 2) Press [POWER] key. The system is turned on, and the preheating time is displayed. Preheat is indicated at the upper left of the radar display. 3) Wait until the preheating time is over. When the preheating time is over, the preheating time screen disappears, and at the upper left of the radar display changes to Standby
. Preheat 3 4) Press [TX/STBY] key. The radar will start transmission and the antenna will start rotating. Standby at the upper left of the radar display changes to Transmit
. NOTE:
The radar does not start transmission if you press [TX/STBY]
key while Preheat is indicated. 33 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW 3.1.2 Observe and Adjust Video Procedures 1) Press [RANGE+] key or [RANGE-] key to set the range to the scale required for target observation. 2)
[GAIN] [SEA] and [RAIN] to obtain the clearest targets. Refer to
[GAIN] dialSection 3.2.4 "Adjust Gain [GAIN]"
[SEA] dialSection 3.2.5 "Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA]"
[RAIN] dial Section 3.2.6 "Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter
[RAIN]"
for how to use each dial. For how to adjust video, see Section 3.2 "OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO"
3.1.3 Acquire and Measure Data For details on how to acquire data and measure, see the SECTION 4"MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING". 3.1.4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP The radar video, range, bearing, Target Tracking and AIS data display etc... are displayed with reference to CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point). If scanner is switched, these data are measured from CCRP. If some kind of functions set scanner position to outside of the PPI range, these data except Target Tracking and AIS data are displayed with reference to scanner position. For how to setting CCRP, see the Section 7.1.9 "Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting)". 34 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW 3.1.5 End the Operation and Stop the System Exit 1) Press [TX/STBY] key. The radar will stop transmission and the antenna will stop rotating. Transmit at the upper left of the radar display changes to Standby
. Maintain the standby state if radar observation is restarted in a relatively short time.Only pressing the [TX/STBY] key starts observation. i 3 2) Press [POWER] key. The system will be turned off.
When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn off the power and make the main breaker OFF so that the power supply to the equipment is completely cut off. Some equipment components can carry electrical current even after the power switch is turned off, and conducting maintenance work without unplugging the power connector may result in electrocution, equipment failure, or accidents. 35 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3.2.1 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL]
Procedures 1) Obtain the best-to-see display with optimum brilliance by turning the [BRILL] dial at the lower right of the monitor unit. Turning the [BRILL] dial clockwise increases the brilliance of the entire display. Conversely, turning the [BRILL] dial counterclockwise decreases the brilliance of the entire display. In consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust display brilliance that is high enough to easily observe the radar display but does not glare. 3.2.2 Change Observation Range [RANGE+/-]
Procedures 1) Pressing the [RANGE+] key will increase the observation range, enabling the wider area to be observed. Increasing the observation range will enable a wider range to be observed. However, a video image is small and the ability to detect targets near own ship decreases. Therefore, when observing the vicinity of own ship, use the smaller observation range. 2) Pressing the [RANGE-] key will decrease the observation range, reducing the area that can be observed. Decreasing the observation range will enable the vicinity of own ship to be enlarged. However, caution must be taken because video images of the area beyond the observation range cannot be displayed. 36 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3.2.3 Tune Normally, use the automatic tune mode. Use the manual tune mode only when best tuning is not possible in the automatic tune mode due to deterioration of magnetron. 3 This radar system provides the automatic tune mode and the manual tune mode. The automatic tune mode automatically adjusts the tuning of the transmitting frequency and the receiving frequency, and the manual tune mode enables tuning to be adjusted by using the dial located on the operation panel. Normally use the automatic tune mode. Only when the best tuning is not possible by the automatic tune mode due to the deterioration of magnetron, use the manual tune mode. The currently used tune mode is displayed in the area at the lower left of the display. 3.2.3.1 When using the automatic tune mode Procedures 1) Press the [TUNE] dial to set the automatic tune mode. Tune adjustment is automatically conducted in the automatic tune mode. Tune is adjusted at the start of transmission, at the change of the range or pulse width. Tune adjustment is completed within several seconds. 3.2.3.2 When using the manual tune mode Procedures 1) Press the [TUNE] dial to set the manual tune mode. 2) Turn the [TUNE] dial to make adjustments so that the tuning bar is maximized. The tuning bar is displayed in the area at the upper left of the display. 37 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3.2.4 Adjust Gain [GAIN]
If the gain is too high, unnecessary signals including receiver noise and false images increase resulting in reduction of visibility of targets. On the contrary, if the gain is too low, targets including ships and dangerous objects may not be clearly indicated. Be sure to always adjust for the best gain. See also the Section 3.2.8 "To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed". Procedures 1) Adjust noise on the radar display by turning the [GAIN] dial until targets can be easily observed. Turning [GAIN] dial clockwise increases gain. Turning [GAIN] dial counterclockwise decreases gain. Turning the [GAIN] dial clockwise will increase the receiving gain, and the range to observe radar video is widened. However, if the gain is too high, unnecessary signals including receiver noise and false images increase resulting in reduction of targets' visibility. To observe densely crowded targets or short-range targets, turning the
[GAIN] dial counterclockwise will decrease the receiving gain, which enables targets to be easily observed. However, caution must be taken so as not to overlook a small and important target. i It is recommended to restore the setting to the factory default, if you lost the appropriate settings.The factory default level is shown on the bar chart as a green line. Current Level The factory defafult level is assigned by every function mode. See the Section 3.9
"USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]"
Factory Default 38 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3.2.5 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA]
When using the [AUTO SEA] function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the sea surface at close range. Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited. When using the [AUTO SEA] function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level. 3 See also the Section 3.2.8 "To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed". 3.2.5.1 Using the manual sea clutter suppression mode Procedures 1) Adjust the sea clutter returns on the radar display by turning the
[SEA] dial until targets can be easily observed. Turning [SEA] dial clockwise suppresses sea clutter returns. Turning [SEA] dial counterclockwise intensifies sea clutter returns. The sea clutter suppression function suppresses sea clutter returns by decreasing the receiving gain on a short range. Turning the [SEA] dial clockwise heightens the effect of sea clutter suppression. However, be careful that excessive suppression causes low signal-strength targets such as buoys and boats to disappear from the radar display. 39 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO i It is recommended to restore the setting to the factory default, if you lost the appropriate settings.The factory default level is shown on the bar chart as a green line. Current Level The factory defafult level is assigned by every function mode. See the Section 3.9
"USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]"
Factory Default 3.2.5.2 Using the automatic sea clutter suppression mode The sea clutter suppression in accordance with the intensity of sea clutter is possible. Use this mode when the sea clutter's intensity differs according to directional orientation. Procedures 1) Press the [SEA] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Sea MAN button located at the lower left of the display. The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, and Sea AUTO is displayed in the lower left of the radar display. 2) Make adjustments by turning the [SEA] dial. Even when the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, turning the [SEA] dial can make fine adjustments manually. NOTE:
When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, the automatic rain/snow suppression mode is switched to the manual mode. To select both the sea clutter suppression function and the rain/
snow suppression function in the automatic mode, use the automatic rain/snow suppression mode. Cancel 1) ress the [SEA] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Sea AUTO button located at the lower left of the display. The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is cancelled, and Sea MAN is displayed in the lower left of the radar display. 310 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3.2.6 Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [RAIN]
When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the rain or snow at the close range. Detection of not only echoes from the rain or snow but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited. When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level. 3 See also the Section 3.2.8 "To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed". 3.2.6.1 Using the manual rain / snow clutter suppression mode Procedures 1) Adjust the rain / snow clutter returns of the display by turning the
[AUTO-RAIN] dial until targets can be easily observed. Turning [RAIN] dial clockwise suppresses rain / snow clutter returns. Turning [RAIN] dial counterclockwise intensifies rain / snow clutter returns. When the [RAIN] dial is turned clockwise, the rain / snow clutter suppression function suppresses rain / snow clutter returns and gets targets hidden by rain / snow clutter returns to appear of the display. However, be careful that excessive suppression may cause small targets to be overlooked. Since the rain / snow clutter suppression function also has the effect of suppressing sea clutter, the suppression efficiency improves when the [RAIN] dial is used with the [SEA] dial. In general, turn the [RAIN] dial fully to the left. i It is recommended to restore the setting to the factory default, if you lost the appropriate settings.The factory default level is shown on the bar chart as a green line. Current Level The factory defafult level is assigned by every function mode. See the Section 3.9
"USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]"
Factory Default 311 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3.2.6.2 Using the automatic rain / snow clutter suppression mode The rain / snow clutter suppression in accordance with the intensity of rain / snow clutter is possible. Use this mode when the rain / snow clutter's intensity differs according to directional orientation. Procedures 1) Press the [RAIN] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Rain MAN button located at the lower left of the display. The automatic rain / snow clutter suppression mode is selected, and Sea AUTO, Rain AUTO is displayed in the lower left of the radar display. 2) Make adjustments by turning the [RAIN] dial and the [SEA] dial. Even when the automatic rain / snow clutter suppression mode is selected, turning the
[RAIN] dial and the [SEA] dial can make fine adjustments manually. NOTE:
When the automatic rain / snow clutter suppression mode is selected, the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is also activated. It is not possible to set only the rain / snow clutter suppression function to the automatic mode. Cancel 1) Press the [RAIN] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Rain AUTO button located at the lower left of the display. The automatic rain / snow clutter suppression mode is cancelled, and Sea AUTO, Rain AUTO is changed to Sea MAN ,Rain MAN in the lower left of the radar display. 3.2.7 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK]
When an audible alarm is issued, use ALARM ACK to acknowledge the alarm information, stop the alarm buzzing, and stop the alarm lamp flashing. (If more than one alarm has occurred, press the switch for each alarm indication.) The alarm stops buzzing, but the alarm indication does not disappear. Procedures 1) Press [ALARM ACK] key. Alternatively, Left-click the Alarm Acknowridge button located at the lower right of the display. The alarm will stop buzzing. 312 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO 3.2.8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed which requires an understanding for RADAR signal processing features and an adjustment for the sea state. All of the parameter can be set indivisually and manually, but it may by difficult for even expert person. The sets of signal processing parameters for the general using condition are stored in FUNC as factory default settings. In most cases, to select the FUNC mode which fit in the current sea state is lead to get the appropriate image easily and quickly. So It is recommended to enable the FUNC mode. 3 Procedures 1) Press [USER] key / Press FUNC mode switch button and select the mode which fit in the current sea state. The four preset modes is assigned on the FUNC mode. For details, refer to the Section 3.9 "USE FUNCTION KEY
[USER]". Function
(FUNC) mode Coast Deep Sea Storm Rain
: Use this mode to monitor a relatively short range, for example, bays and coasts where many boats and ships are running.(Importance is attached to resolution.)
: Use this mode to monitor a relatively long range, for example, the open sea. (Importance is attached to long-range gain.)
: Use this mode when many rain / snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns are detected in stormy weather. (Importance is attached to rain / snow clutter and sea clutter suppression, and gain slightly lowers.)
: Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but rain / snow clutter is strong. (Importance is attached to rain / snow clutter suppression, and gain slightly lowers.) 2) Make adjustments by turning the [GAIN] dial, the [SEA] dial and the [RAIN] dial when it is necessary. In most cases, it may be get the appropriate image. i It is recommended to restore the setting to the factory default, if you lost the appropriate settings.The factory default level is shown on the bar chart as a green line. Current Level The factory defafult level is assigned for every function mode. See the Section 3.9
"USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]"
Factory Default 313 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball The cross cursor mark + is used for position designation and other purposes in various operating procedures. The cross cursor mark + moves in coupling with the trackball. If the trackball is rotated up and down or right and left, the cross cursor mark follows the move of the trackball. Operators must be familiar with trackball operation before running the system. 3.3.1.1 Operation inside Radar Video PPI The cross cursor mark as shown at right is displayed inside the radar video PPI. The distance, bearing, and latitude/longitude are digitally indicated in the cursor bearing, distance, latitude, and longitude fields (located at the upper right of the radar display.) When moving the current center position, use the cross cursor mark to designate a new center position. Use the cross cursor mark to create marks and lines. Use the cross cursor mark to manually acquire a target in the target tracking /
AIS display functions. 3.3.1.2 Operation outside Radar Video PPI As shown at right, the cursor mark changes into the cursor outside the radar video PPI. Use the cursor to operate software buttons. Use the cursor to select menu items. i The EBL / VRM dial is available for operating the cursor mark. Pressing the EBL dial for 2 seconds can perform switching to the trackball operation. For details, refer to Section 3.8.4 "Set Cursor (Cursor Setting)". 314 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3.3.2 Operate Software Buttons Software buttons are provided on the radar display so as to easily switch functions without operating menu items. For software buttons that can be operated and their locations, see Section 2.3
"FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS". Procedures 1) Put the pointer on the software button on the radar display. The software button indicated by the cursor will be shown in reverse video, which indicates that the button is specified. 3 2) Press the left button of the trackball. The operating state changes according to the function of the software button. In this instruction manual, this manual operation is described as "left-clicking."
On/Off settings Each time the left button is pressed, the operating state switches as follows:
On Off On Off Multiple settings For example, each time the left button is pressed, the operating state switches as follows:
IR Off IR Low IR Meddle IR High IR Off 315 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3.3.3 Basic Menu Operation 3.3.3.1 To open the menu By left-clicking the display, the main menu will open Main button located at the lower right of the radar By left-clicking the buttons, TT
, AIS
, and AZ
, adjacent to Main
, each function's exclusive menu will open. For the arrangement of software buttons, see Section 2.3 "FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS". 3.3.3.2 To close the menu By left-clicking the Target display screen will appear. button, the menu will close and the target data Alternatively, left-click menu will close. 0.Exit located at the bottom of the menu until the 3.3.3.3 To move to a lower level of the menu The menu is in hierarchical structure. By left-clicking the software button for a desired menu item, it is possible to move to the lower level of the menu. Alternatively, Click items corresponding to the desired menu item number, and the
mark will appear at the right end of a menu item having a lower level. 3.3.3.4 3.3.3.5 3.3.3.6 To move to a higher level of the menu By left-clicking possible to return to the upper level of the menu. 0.Exit at the bottom of the menu while the menu is open, it is To determine an item By left-clicking the software button for a menu item for which settings are to be changed, the selected item will be displayed. To determine the selected item Left-click the software button for an item you want to set, and then the selected item will be determined. If you do not change the setting, right-click the button. The selected item will close without changing the setting. 316 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3.3.3.7 Menu Operation with the Trackball Item Press numeric keys corresponding to the desired item number to display the selected item. Press numeric keys corresponding to the desired item number to select a set value. Software button Press the [0] key to move to the higher level. Selected item Present state Cursor 3 When the [ > ] mark appears at the right end of a menu item, press numeric keys corresponding to the selected item number to move to a lower level. 3.3.4 Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu When a numeric value must be entered while operating this radar system, the numeric value input screen will appear. In that case, enter a numeric value according to the following operation method. 317 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3.3.4.1 Numeric value input screen Numeric button
- button Clear button 3.3.4.2 Directly entering a numeric value Entered value
+ button Enter button Procedures 1) On the numeric value input screen, sequentially left-click the software number keys located on the radar screen, and enter a desired numeric value. For example, when entering click the software number keys as shown below. 2 3 1 4 for a bearing value, sequentially left-
2) Make sure that the entered value is correct, and left-click the ENT button. The set value is reflected to the operating state. 3) To stop entering a value, right-click the [ENT] button. Alternatively, left-click the CLR button. The numeric value input screen will close without reflecting the set value to the operating state. 318 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3.3.4.3 Increasing or decreasing a numeric value Procedures 1) On the numeric value input screen, sequentially left-click the or software button enter a desired numeric value. For example, when adjusting 123.0 to 123.4 for a bearing value, sequentially left-click the software number keys as shown below. located on the radar screen, and 2) Make sure that the entered value is correct, and left-click the ENT button. The set value is reflected to the operating state. 3 3) To stop entering a value, right-click the button. Alternatively, left-click the CLR ENT button. The numeric value input screen will close without reflecting the set value to the operating state. 3.3.4.4 Latitude/longitude input screen Numeric button
- button (south latitude /
west longitude) Entered latitude /
longitude
+ button (north latitude /
east longitude) CLR button ENT button 319 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3.3.4.5 Entering latitude/longitude Procedures 1) On the latitude/longitude input screen, sequentially click numeric buttons to enter latitude (XXXXXXX'). For example, to enter 1234.567', sequentially click numeric buttons as follows. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2) To make change between north latitude and south latitude, use and
. North latitude:Left-click the South latitude:Left-click the button. button. 3) Left-click the ENT button. The manually entered latitude value is determined. Then, enter the longitude value. 4) Sequentially click numeric buttons to enter longitude (XXXXX XXX'). 5) To make change between east longitude and west longitude, use and
. East longitude: Left-click the button. West longitude: Left-click the button. 6) Left-click the ENT button. The manually entered longitude value is determined. 7) To cancel input, put the cursor on CLR and then left-click the button. The latitude/longitude input screen will close without reflecting the set value to the operating state. 320 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3.3.4.6 Character input screen Character/Number button Entered character Delete button Back Space button Enter button Exit button 3.3.4.7 Entering a character 3 Procedures 1) On the character input screen, use trackball to select alphabet from A to Z, numbers from 0 to 9, or symbols (only comments for mark/line), and then left-click the ENT button to enter one character of the name to be inputted. For example, JRC for a name, click button as follows:
J R C 2) Make sure that the entered character is correct, left-click the ENT button. The character has been entered. 3) To cancel input, left-click the Exit button. The character input screen will be closed without entering the character. 321 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES 3.3.5 Overview of Menu Structure The menu structure of this radar system consists of eight frequently used function menus, one main menu, and one service man menu used for the installation settings. Software buttons for opening those menus are displayed in the menu area located at the bottom ten of the display. For each menu item and structure, see the menu list in the appendix. To prevent incorrect use, enter the special code to open the service man menu. For operating the service man menu, see Section 7.1.1 "How to Open the Serviceman MenuService Man Menu"
Frequently used functions TT Track AIS Route PI AZ U.MAP Used for operating and setting the target tracking function. Used for operating and setting the other ship trails function. Used for operating and setting the AIS display function. Used for operating and setting the route function. Used for operating and setting the parallel-index-line function. Used for operating and setting the automatic acquisition /
activate function. Used for operating and setting the user map function. Main menu Main Used for operating and setting the functions. Serviceman menu This menu is used for operation and settings when a system is installed. It is not used during normal operation.The special code must be entered to open the service man menu. 322 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.1 Interference Rejection (IR) Interference by other radars is rejected. Attention When viewing a radar beacon or SART signal, select
(Interference Rejector OFF) because IR IR Off processing suppresses the video. 3 Procedures 1) Left-click the IR button located at the lower left of the radar display. The interference rejection modes are switched. IR Off IR Low IR Meddle IR High IR Off Rejection levels of the interference rejector IR Off
: Interference rejector off IR Low : Interference rejection level - low IR Middle : Interference rejection level - moderate IR High : Interference rejection level - high When a high interference rejection level is selected, the radars ability of detecting small targets such as buoys and small boats lowers. In general, IR Low should be selected. 323 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.2 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN]
Procedures 1) Press [GAIN] dial Values of the transmitter pulse width are switched. MP1 MP2 LP1 LP2 Effects of transmitter pulse width With SP selected: The transmitter pulse becomes shorter, and the range improves. The effect of suppressing sea clutter returns and rain/snow clutter returns heightens. resolution Recommended condition for selection:
In bays/harbors where targets are densely crowded. Rough sea state due to torrential rain or stormy weather. With MP selected: The normal transmitter pulse length is set. Both range resolution and gain are appropriately set. Recommended condition for selection: General navigation With LP selected: The transmitter pulse becomes longer, and gain improves. Small targets are zoomed and are easy to observe. When the sea state is bad, detection performance decreases. Recommended condition for selection: Detection of small conditions. targets in good weather Usable transmitter pulse width differs according to the type of antenna being used and the observation range being used. For usable pulse width, see Section 11.8
"SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1139)" Section 11.14 "SCANNER UNIT (NKE-
2103-6HS)". 324 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.3 Target Enhance (ENH) The dimension of video display is enlarged to enhance a target. Procedures 1) Left-click the ENH button located at the lower left of the radar display. The target enlargement levels are switched. 3 ENH Off ENH Level1 ENH Level2 ENH Level3 ENH Off Effect of target enlargement ENH Off
:Expansion off ENH Level1
:Expansion small Select resolution is required. this mode particularly when Select this mode in general. Radar echoes are expanded by 1 scale in all directions. ENH Level2
:Expansion medium Select this mode to easily view the radar video. Radar echoes are expanded by 2 scales in all directions on the display. ENH Level3 Expansion large Select this mode to detect small targets such as buoys. The expansion near a screen center is added to ENH Level2. NOTE:
When ENH Level3 is selected, sea clutter returns and rain/
snow clutter returns are apt to be expanded. When using this expansion mode, operate [SEA] dial and [RAIN] dial to suppress sea clutter returns and rain/snow clutter returns. In general, ENH Level1 or ENH Level2 should be selected. 325 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.4 Use Video Processing (PROC) This function reduces unnecessary noise to highlight targets. Attention When viewing a radar beacon, SART signal, or fast moving target on the radar display, select PROC Off
(video process off). If video processing mode is set to CORREL , it may be difficult to detect high speed target. Procedures 1) Left-click the PROC button located at the lower left of the display. The video processing modes are switched. PROC Off 3Scan CORREL 4Scan CORREL Peak Hold Remain 5Scan CORREL Video process modes PROC Off
: Select this mode in general. 3Scan CORREL
: Select this mode when many rain/snow clutter returns are detected. 4Scan CORREL 5Scan CORREL Remain Peak Hold
: Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter returns.
: Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns.
: Select this mode when own ship yaws wildly.
: Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection probability is low. 326 3 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.5 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI MODE) Select the bearing for the radar video to be displayed on the radar display. Procedures 1) Left-click the AZI Mode button located at the lower left of the display. The bearing display modes are switched. H Up N Up C Up True Bearing Mode [North Up]
The video is displayed so that the zenith of the PPI (0 on range rings) points to the due north. Fixed targets do not flicker and are easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing of a target can easily be read out. Relative Bearing Mode [Head Up]
The video is displayed so that the ships heading line points to the zenith of the PPI (0 on range rings). Since targets are displayed in their directions relative to the ships heading line, the operator can view the video in the same field of view as in operating the ship at sea. This mode is suitable for watching over other ships. Course-up Bearing Mode [Course Up]
By setting the course-up mode, own ship's course is fixed so that it is located on the zenith of the radar display (0 on range rings). In the same way as in the North-up mode, fixed targets do not flicker, and are stabilized even if the ship is yawing. The bearing of the heading line varies by the same shift of own ships course. To change the course, press the [AZI MODE] key several times again to select the course-up mode so as to set a new course. North HL HL HL North North-up mode Head-up mode Course-up mode 327 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.6 Switch True/Relative Motion Display Mode (TM/RM) 3.4.6.1 Switching Relative Motion (RM) Mode to True Motion (TM) Mode Procedures radar display. 1) Left-click the motion mode button located at the upper left of the RM(T) TM The true motion mode will be selected. In the true motion mode, the own ships position on the radar display moves depending upon its speed and course and the influence of the current. Land and other fixed targets are fixed on the radar display and only actually moving targets move on the radar display. When the true motion mode is selected, the own ships position is set to about 60% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the influence of the current. Own ship starts moving depending upon its speed and course and the influence of the current. Subsequently, when own ship arrives at the position of about 66% of the display radius, it is automatically reset to its initial position at about 60% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the influence of the current. Fixed on the radar display HL Moving depending on own ships speed True Motion Display 3.4.6.2 Resetting Own Ship to its Initial Position in True Motion (TM) Mode Procedures 1) Left-click the motion mode button for 2 seconds. Own ship will be reset to its initial position as established when the relative motion mode is changed to the true motion mode. The ship starts moving from that position. 3.4.6.3 Switching True Motion (TM) Mode to Relative Motion (RM) Mode Procedures 1) Left-click the motion mode button. RM(T) TM The relative motion mode will be selected. Own ship returns to the center of the radar display. 328 3 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.7 Move Own Ships Display Position (Off Center) The own ships position can be moved from the display center to any position within 66% of the display radius. This function is convenient for observing a wide coverage in any direction. If Off Center functions set to scanner position is outside of the PPI range, when function switching display with reference to scanner position. This function is not available on the 96 NM range. i Procedures display. 1) Left-click the Off Center button located at the upper left of the The cross cursor mark will appear at the own ships position on the radar display. 2) Move the cross cursor mark (own ships display position) to a desired position by using the trackball. While the cross cursor mark is moving, the own ships display position moves following the cross cursor mark. When it moves to a position outside 66% of the display radius, the center position is limited to a position within 66% of the display radius. 3) Press the trackball button on the left key. The own ships display position will be fixed to the cross cursor mark. HL HL Move the cursor mark to a desired position Press the [ENT] key The own ships display position will be fixed. 3.4.7.1 Returning Own Ship's Position to the Center Procedures 1) Left-click the Off Center button for 2 seconds. The own ship position is returned to the center of the display. 329 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.8 Display Radar Trails (Trails) Other ship's movements and speeds can be monitored from the lengths and directions of their trails, serving for collision avoidance. The trail length varies according to setting. 3.4.8.1 Changing the length of the trail Procedures display. 1) Left-click the Trails button located at the upper left of the RADAR trails display time Values of the length of the radar trails are switched. Trails length setting: Short mode Off 15sec 30sec 1min 15min 10min 6min 3min Short 15 30 1 3 6 1015 Middle 30 1 3 6 10 1530 Long 1 3 6 10 15 3060 Saved trails cannot be erased even when the trail lengths are changed by using Trails button. Even after the trails display is turned off, the past trails can be displayed traced back by setting a desired time. The radar system is start transmission, trails is start plot. The system is plotting trails even while the trails display is off. If the transmit time is short, the indicated trails duration may not have achieved the specified time. The radar trails remaining time is indicated at the right of the trails length setting. 3.4.8.2 Erasing Trails Data Procedures 1) Hold down the Trails button for five seconds located at the upper right of the display. All the saved trails data will be erased. The system starts plotting trails in initial state.When Trails button is clicked for 2 seconds, a RADAR Trails Setting menu will be displayed. Furthermore, data will be erased if it continues pushing. 330 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.8.3 Trails Motion Mode There are two types of trails: relative motion trails and true motion trails. Relative motion trails:
The system plots the trails of a target at a position relative to the own ship. The operator can easily judge whether the target is approaching the own ship. While the own ship is moving, the system also plots the trails of land and other fixed targets. True motion trails:
The system plots the absolute motion trails of a target, irrespective of the own ships position. The operator can easily judge the course and speed of the target. The system does not plot the trails of land and other fixed targets. 3 HL Trails HL Land Trails True Motion Trails Ship Relative Motion Trails Trails modes provided with this system vary depending on the motion mode. With true motion (TM) mode:
Only the true motion trails mode is available. With relative motion
(RM) mode:
The relative motion trails mode or true motion trails mode isselectable. RM(R) is indicated while the relative motion trails mode is active. RM(T) is indicated while the true motion trails mode is active. While the true motion trails mode is active, this system enables the continuous use of true motion trails even if any of the following operations is performed:
Motion display mode change (TM/RM) TM reset Bearing display mode change Center move (Off Center) MAP display on/off (Map) Accurate true bearing signals and speed signals are necessary for using the true motion trails mode. i 331 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.8.4 Changing Motion Mode of Trails (Trails Mode) Procedures display. 1) Click the Trails Mode located at the upper right of the radar RADAR trails true/relative The trails motion modes are switched. T R 332 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.9 Zoom (x2) This function doubles the size of radar video near a specified position. NOTE: If the range is 0.125 NM , this function is not available. Procedures 1) Left-click the x2 button located at the lower left of the display. The zoom mode is selected. 3 2) Subsequently, put the cross cursor mark on a location you want to zoom into, and press the left key of the trackball. The zoom is set. Using the cross cursor mark as reference, the zoom function doubles the size of a radar video with the midpoint between the cursor mark and own ships position being set to the center of radar display. HL HL Cursor mark Own ships position Center of radar display Own Ships Position before Zooming position Own Ships Position after Zooming position Cancel 1) Left-click the x2 display. The zoom mode is cancelled. button located at the lower left of the 333 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.10 Hide/Display Range Rings [HL OFF]
Procedures 1) Press the [HL OFF] key. Alternatively, Left-click the button located at the lower right of the display. The ship's heading line (HL) is hidden while the [HL OFF] key is held down. HL Off The ship's heading line that indicates the course of own ship is always shown on the radar display. The heading line is hidden while the [HL OFF] key is held down, so the targets on the heading line can be easily observed. 3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display [DATA OFF]
Various graphics information such as target tracking TT/AIS symbols, NAV lines, and MAP information is shown on the radar display of this radar system, and may make it difficult to view the radar video. In that case, use this function to temporarily hide unnecessary graphics information. Procedures 1) Press the [DATA OFF] key. Alternatively, Left-click the button located at the lower right of the display. While the key is pressed, graphics data other than VRM, EBL, HL, cross cursor mark, and range rings on the radar display is temporarily hidden. Data Off 334 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.12 Switch Day/Night Mode [DAY/NIGHT]
Several combinations of the display color and brilliance according to the ambient lighting conditions are provided. The display color setting is easily changed. Procedures 1) Press the [DAY/NIGHT] key. Alternatively, left-click the Day/Night button located at the lower right of the radar display. The DAY/NIGHT modes are switched. Day2 Day3 Dusk Day1 3 Day2 Day3 Dusk Night The current mode is displayed at the lower right of the radar display. For how to set the display color and brilliance for each mode, see Section 3.8.5 "Set Radar Display (Display Setting)"
3.4.13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL]
Adjust brilliance of the operation panel according to the ambient lighting conditions. Procedures 1) Press the [PANEL] key. Alternatively, left-click the button located at the lower right of the radar display. In consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust panel brilliance that is high enough to read the characters on the operation panel but does not glare. Panel The [PANEL] key lamp lights up irrespective of panel brilliance adjustment. 335 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 3.4.14 Set True Bearing When the GYRO I/F is used to enter a gyro signal, there is a rare case in which a true bearing value indicated by the master gyro does not match the true bearing value indicated by this radar system. In that case, adjust the true bearing value of this system so that it matches the value indicated by the master gyro. Procedures 1) Open the numeric value input screen to enter a true bearing value by performing the menu operation below. Main 6.NAV Equipment Setting 1. Gyro Setting 2) Enter a value indicated by the master gyro on the numeric value input screen. For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". 3.4.15 Set Own Ship Speed 3.4.15.1 Switch the own ship speed device Procedures 1) Left-click the own ship speed device button in the Own Ship Information area located at the upper right of the display. The speed sensor is switched whenever the button is clicked. MAN
(Manual) LOG
(Single-axis water log) 2AXW
(Dual-axis water log) GPS
(GPS) 2AXG
(Dual-axis ground log) 336 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION NOTE: If the single axis water log display can present the speed of the ship in other than the forward direction, the direction of movement should be indicated unambiguously. Therefore single axis water logs cannot detect the effect of leeway. If ships in shallow water, when the accuracy of the dual-axis log may be decreased. If ships in deep sea area, when the accuracy of the dual-axis log error may be occurred. The accuracy of GPS's COG is 3 when own ships speed no fewer than 1kn, no more than 17kn. The accuracy of GPS's COG is 1 when own ships speed over 17kn. 3.4.15.2 Input the own ship speed (Manual Speed) If the ship-speed system, such as LOG, etc., connected to this radar system malfunctions, it is possible to manually enter own ship speed by the method described below to use the target tracking (TT) and true motion display functions. 3 Procedures 1) Left-click the own ship speed device button in the Own Ship Information area located at the upper right of the display, and select the manual mode MAN
. 2) Left-click the value of the speed. The numeric value input screen will open to enter the own ship speed. 3) Enter the value for the own ship speed on the numeric value input screen. For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". 3.4.16 Magnet Compass Correction (MAG Compass Setting) Set the correction value, when the radar receive HDM sentence from magnet compass or the variation of HDG is NULL. Procedures 1) Open the MAG Compass Setting menu by performing the following menu operation. Main 6.NAV Equipment Setting 2. MAG Compass Setting 337 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION 2) Set whether to make corrections or not. 1. Heading Correction Off On 3) Input the correction value. Press the for longitude. or button to select south and north for latitude or the east and west For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". 3.4.16.1 Set Drift Correction The direction and speed of the drift are set. This function can be used only when data. MAN or LOG is selected for ship-speed Procedures 1) Open the Set/Drift Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Main 6.NAV Equipment Setting 3. Set/Drift Setting 2) Set whether to make corrections or not. 1. Correction Off On For menu operation, see Section 3.3.3 "Basic Menu Operation". 3) Enter the correction value for tidal current. 2.Set
: Direction of tidal current (true bearing) 3.Drift
: Speed of tidal current For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". 338 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK The own ship's track function saves and displays own ship's track. If navigation equipment is connected, this radar system records latitude/longitude data sent from the navigation equipment and displays own ship's track. NOTE: Even when own ship's track storage interval is turned
, own ship's track can be displayed. However, in this case, if rewrite operation such as changing of the display range is performed for the radar display, own ship's track display is erased and the track will not be plotted again. Off If the own ship track display is turned off when own ship track is in storage, own ship's tracks are not shown on the radar display, but own ship's track is still saved. 3 3.5.1 Display Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track) Procedures 1) Left-click the Own Track Color Track button located at the lower right of the display. Own Track Interval Own Track Interval Unit Own Track Color Map On/Off The color of the own ship's track are switched. Off White Gray Red Pink Yellow Blue Green 2) Left-click the Map button located at the lower right of the display. The map display function is turned on Map or off Map
. When Color is selected, the own ship's track is displayed. 339 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK 3.5.2 Set Display Color of Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track Color) Own ship's track can be saved in seven different colors. Own ship's track can be displayed or not displayed individually by color. Procedures 1) Open the Display Own Track Setting menu by performing the menu operation Track 1. DISP Own Track Color The Display Own Track Setting menu will open. Operations differ according to the following set modes. When 1. All is set to When 1. All is set to On Off All of own ship's tracks are displayed. All of own ship's tracks are not displayed. When 1. All is set to Individual Settings are made by color by performing the operation below. 2) Left-click the color button for the desired display setting which is to be changed. Display of each item is switched between On and Off On : Own ship's track plotted by the color is displayed. Off
: Own ship's track plotted by the color is not displayed. 340 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK 3.5.3 Save Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) To save own ship's track, storage at a specified time interval and at a specified range interval can be selected. The track storage interval can be selected from 10 preset time intervals and 8 preset range intervals. Storage intervals that can be selected Time : 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min, and 60 min Range : 0.1 NM, 0.2 NM, 0.3 NM, 0.5 NM, 1 NM, 3 NM, 5 NM, and 10 NM 3 Procedures 1) Left-click the Own Track Interval unit button located at the lower right of the display. Every time the button is clicked, the units of measure for the storage are switched. Own Track Interval Own Track Interval Unit Own Track Color Map On/Off 2) Left-click the Own Track Interval button located at the lower right of the display. Every time the button is clicked, storage intervals are switched. When Off is selected, the storage function is turned off. 3.5.4 Cancel Saving of Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) Storage of own ship's track can be turned off. Cancel 1) Left-click the Own Track Interval button located at the lower right of the display. Every time the button is clicked, interval for track storage are switched. When Off is selected, the storage function is turned off. 341 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK 3.5.5 Clear Own Ship's Track (Clear Own Track) This function cancels the storing of own ship's track. Procedures 1) Open the Clear Own Track Color menu by performing the menu operation below. Track 2. Clear Own Track Color The Clear Own Track Color menu will appear. 2) Left-click the button for the color to be deleted. All
: All tracks are deleted White Red Only track of specified color is deleted. Gray Blue
Pink
Yellow
Green
After the item has been selected, Clear Own Track Confirmation Window will appear. 3) Left-click the Yes button. Own ship's track indicated by the specified color will be deleted. 3.5.6 Use Expanded Own Ship's Track (Own Track Type) The following expanded track functions can be used for this radar system. Water temperature track : The water temperature value at the latitude/longitude is recorded. Water depth track : The water depth value at the latitude/longitude is recorded. Tidal current track : The tidal current vector at the latitude/longitude is recorded. Only one type of expanded own ship's track can be used at a time. Multiple types of expanded tracks cannot be used at the same time. Specify the type of the expanded own ship's tracks to be used by performing the operation below. 342 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK Procedures display. 1) Left-click the Track button located at the lower right of the 3 Track menu The Own Track Menu will appear. 2) Left-click the item button of 3. Track Type
. The numeric value of the navigation data can be shown by the color of own ship's track. Normal Depth
: The expanded own ship's track function is not used.
: The color of the tracks is changed according to the water depth value Temperature
:The color of the tracks is changed according to the water temperature value. 3) Select the function to be used. 4) Left-click the item button of 4. Num Vector Display Numeric value or vector of navigation data can be added to own ship's track. Off
: Numeric value and vector are not added. Depth Temperature Current
: Water depth value is added.
: Water temperature value is added.
:current vector is added. 5) Select the function to be used. NOTE: To use the expanded own ship's track function, the track must be entered from the special navigation equipment into this radar system. 343 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK 3.5.7 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track) Set the corresponding conditions for the water depth value and the color of own ship's track by performing the operation below. Procedures 1) Open the Water Depth Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Track 6. Water Depth Setting The Water Depth Setting menu will appear. Enter a value of the boundary water depth for each item according to the table below to set up the corresponding conditions for the water depth value and the color of own ship's track. Water depth value Color of track 1. xxxx m Min 2. xxxx m 3. xxxx m 4. xxxx m 5. xxxx m 6. xxxx m Max White Gray Blue Green Yellow Pink Red For example, if 10m is entered for 1. , 30m is entered for 2. , and 50m is entered for 3. , the area with a water depth of less than 10 meters is indicated by white tracks, the area with a water depth of 10 to 30 meters is indicated by light blue tracks, and the area with a water depth of 30 to 50 meters is indicated by blue tracks. 344 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK 3.5.8 Use Water Temperature Track (Water TEMP Track) Set the corresponding conditions for the water temperature value and the color of own ship's track by performing the operation below. Procedures 1) Open the Water TEMP. Setting menu by performing the menu operation below 3 Track 7. Water TEMP. Setting The Water TEMP. Setting menu will appear. Enter a value of the boundary water temperature for each item according to the table below to set up the corresponding conditions for the water temperature value and the color of own ship's track. Water temperature value Color of track 1. xx.x Min 2. xx.x 3. xx.x 4. xx.x 5. xx.x 6. xx.x Max White Gray Blue Green Yellow Pink Red For example, if 10.0 ~ is entered for 1. , 13.0 ~ is entered for 2. , and 15.0 ~ is entered for 3. , the area with a water temperature of less than 10.0 ? ? is indicated by white tracks, the area with a water depth of 10.0 ~ to 13.0~ is indicated by light blue tracks, and the area with a water depth of 13.0 ~ to 15.0 ~ is indicated by blue tracks. 345 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK 3.5.9 Use Tidal Current Track (Current Vector Track) Set the conditions for adding tidal current vectors to own ship's track by performing the operation below. Procedures 1) Open the Current Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Track 8. Current Setting The Current Setting menu will appear. Set the tidal current vector display conditions.
[1]Length of the tidal current vector (Current Size) Set the length of the tidal current vector. The unit of measure is kn/cm. If 1.0kn/cm is set, a tidal current of 1.0kn is shown as a one-centimeter line on the radar display.
[2]Color of the vector for tidal current layer A (Layer A) Set the vector's display color for tidal current layer A. Choose one of the following colors WhiteGrayBlueGreenYellowPinkRed
[3]Color of the vector for tidal current layer B (Layer B) Set the vector's display color for tidal current layer B. Choose one of the following colors WhiteGrayBlueGreenYellowPinkRed
[4]Color of the vector for tidal current layer C (Layer C) Set the vector's display color for tidal current layer C. Choose one of the following colors WhiteGrayBlueGreenYellowPinkRed 346 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP Up to 20,000 items of NAV lines, coastlines, depth contours, and NAV marks can be created, displayed, loaded, and saved. (This function is available only when navigation equipment is connected to this radar system.) Marks that can be used : 29 types Lines that can be used : 3 types (solid, broken, and dashed-dotted line) Color of mark and lines that can be used
: 7 colors 3 i If radar video is poor visibility caused by user map function, press the [DATA OFF] key to map displays temporarily off. 3.6.1 Create User Map (Mark/Line) In this system, when the radar is in the transmission state, the user map is displayed all the time. However, valid latitude/longitude data and true bearing data must be entered into the system. The user map can be created and edited by performing the following operation. 3.6.1.1 Plotting a mark Procedures 1) Left-click the Cursor button located at the upper right of the display to set the Mark mode. Cursor mode switching switching switching Mark font / line pattern Mark color / line color The mark font to be used is displayed to the right of the Cursor button. 347 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 2) Left-click the mark font mark. The mark fonts are switched. button to select a font for the 3) Left-click the C button located to the right of the mark font to select a color for the mark. The color for the mark font located to the right of the change. Cursor button will 4) Left-click at a desired location on the radar display. The specified mark will be displayed in the specified color. To create another mark, repeat the above procedures. 3.6.1.2 Plotting a line Procedures 1) Left-click the Cursor button located at the upper right of the display to select the line mode. The line pattern to be used is displayed to the right of the Cursor button. 2) Left-click the
button located at the upper right of the display to select the line pattern. The line pattern to be used is displayed to the right of the Cursor button. 3) Left-click the C button located to the right of the line pattern to select a color for the line. The color for the line pattern located to the right of the change. Cursor button will 4) Left-click at a desired location on the radar display. Line colors are switched. 348 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 5) Move the cursor to a desired location on the radar display and left-click. A line is plotted between the previous point and the end point. Repeat this procedure so that sequential lines can be plotted. 6) When you want to finish plotting the line, left-click at the previous point. Line plotting will be terminated. To plot another line, repeat procedures 3. 3 3.6.1.3 Plotting a mark / line make with latitude and longitude Procedures operation. 1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu U.Map 2. Edit User Map 2. Make with L/L 2) Left-click the 9. New Mark Input button. The Mark Input menu and the Line Input menu are switched. 3) Left-click the item button of 1. Type to select the type of mark font or line pattern to be created. The desired mark font or line pattern is selected. To add a line, select midpoint --O-- . 4) Left-click the item button of 2. Color to select the color of mark or line to be created. The desired mark or line color is selected. 349 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 5) Left-click the 3. L/L button to input the latitude /
longitude. For the input method on the latitude / longitude input screen, see Section 3.3.4.5 "Entering latitude/longitude"
6) Left-click the 4. Comment button to input the comment. For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character"
The window will not be open when the system is in the transmission state. 7) Left-click the 5. Enter button. Mark / Line plotting will be terminated. To create another mark or line, repeat procedures 4 to 7. 3.6.2 Set User Map Display (Mark Display Setting) The user map can be individually displayed (On) or hidden (Off). Setting by type : Setting can be made by mark font and line pattern. Setting by color : Setting can be made by color of mark or line. The mark font display size can be selected. Normal: The mark is displayed in normal size. Small: The mark is displayed in a size smaller than usual. 3.6.2.1 Setting display by type Procedures 1) Open the Display Mark Type menu by performing the menu operation below. U.Map 5. Mark Display Setting 1. Display Mark Type The Display Mark Type menu will open. 350 3 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 2) Specify whether to turn on or off the display for each type of mark and line. When 1. All is selected, the setting will reflect to all types of marks and lines. Off
: All types are not displayed. Individual
: All types are displayed. On : Setting by type is activated. 3.6.2.2 Setting display by color Procedures 1) Open the Display Mark Color Type menu by performing the menu operation below. U.Map 5. Mark Display Setting 2. Display Mark Color The Display Mark Color Type menu will open. 2) Specify whether to turn on or off the display for each color type of mark and line. When lines. 1. All is selected, the setting will reflect to all color types of marks and Off
: All color types are not displayed. Individual
: Setting by color type is activated. On : All color types are displayed. 3.6.2.3 Setting the mark font size Procedures below. 1) Open the Mark Size menu by performing the menu operation U.Map 5. Mark Display Setting 3. Mark Size The Mark Size menu will appear. 351 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 2) Specify the mark font size. Normal
: The mark is displayed in normal size. Small
: The mark is displayed in a size smaller than usual. 3.6.2.4 Setting the character size for comments Procedures 1) Open the Comment Font Size menu by performing the menu operation below. U.Map 5. Mark Display Setting 4. Comment Font Size The Comment Font Size menu will appear. 2) Specify the comment font size. Normal
: The characters for comments are displayed in normal size. Small
: The characters for comments are displayed in a size smaller than usual. 3.6.3 Edit User Map (Edit User Map) 3.6.3.1 Manually entering the own ship position (Own Ship Position) Use this function when editing navigation data for a location different from the own ship position. Procedures 1) Open the Own Ship Position menu by performing the menu operation below. U.Map 1. Own Ship Position The number key screen for entering the latitude/longitude of the Own Ship Position will appear. 352 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 2) Use the number buttons 0 to 9 to enter a value of latitude
(xxxxx.xxx'). 3) To make changes between north latitude and south latitude, use the and buttons. North latitude :
Left-click the South latitude :
Left-click the button. button. 4) Left-click the ENT button. The manually entered latitude will be determined. Then, enter the value of longitude. 5) Use the number buttons 0 to 9 to enter a value of longitude
(xxxxx.xxx'). 6) To make changes between east longitude and west longitude, use the and buttons. East longitude:
Left-click the West longitude:
Left-click the button. button. 7) Left-click the ENT button. The manually entered longitude will be determined. 3 NOTE: The own ship's position manually entered by using the function above is valid only in the navigation data setting menu. After exiting from the menu, the manually entered position data is invalidated. 3.6.3.2 Moving a mark or line (Move) With regard to the created user map, a mark or line is moved individually. Procedures operation. 1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu U.Map 2. Edit User Map The Edit User Map menu will appear. 2) Left-click the 3. Move button. 353 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP The user map move mode is selected. Move Map is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display. 3) Put the cursor on a mark or line, and left-click. When a mark or line to be moved is selected, the cursor mark will appear. 4) Move the cursor mark to the destination, and left-click. The selected mark or line is moved to the destination. To move another mark or line, repeat procedures 3 and 4. 5) When finished with the correction of all items, left-click the 0.Exit button. The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map move mode.
(Example) 354 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 3.6.3.3 Deleting a mark or line (Delete) With regard to the created user map, a mark or line is deleted individually. Procedures operation. 1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu 3 U.Map 2. Edit User Map The Edit User Map menu will appear. 2) Left-click the 4. Delete button. The user map delete mode is selected. Delete is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display. 3) Put the cursor on a mark or line, and left-click. The entire selected mark or line is deleted. To delete another mark or line, repeat procedures 3 and 4. 4) When finished with the correction of all items, left-click the 0.Exit button. The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map delete mode. 355 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 3.6.3.4 Inserting a vertex into a line (Insert/Move Vertex) With regard to the created user map, a vertex is inserted into a line. Procedures operation. 1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu U.Map 2. Edit User Map The Edit User Map menu will appear. 2) Left-click the 5. Insert/Move Vertex button. The user map insert/correction mode is selected. Insert/Move is displayed in the cursor mode lacated the upper right of the display. 3) Put the cursor to a side line into which a vertex will be inserted, and left-click. A vertex is inserted into the selected line, and the cursor mark will be displayed. 4) Move the cursor mark to the newly inserted vertex, and left-
click. To insert another vertex, repeat procedures 3 and 4. 5) When finished with the correction of all items, left-click the 0.Exit button. The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map insertion/
correction mode. 356 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
(Example) The side line into which a vertex is inserted Inserted vertex 3.6.3.5 Correcting the mark or vertex of a line (Insert/Move Vertex) With regard to the created user map, a mark or line is corrected. 3 Procedures operation. 1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu U.Map 2. Edit User Map The Edit User Map menu will appear. 2) Left-click the 5. Insert/Move Vertex button. The user map insertion/correction mode is selected. Insert/Move is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display. 3) Put the cursor on the mark or vertex of a line, and left-click. When the mark or vertex of a line to be corrected is selected, the appear. cursor mark will 4) Move the cursor mark to the destination, and left-click. The selected mark or vertex of the line is moved to the destination. To correct another mark or vertex of a line, repeat procedures 3 and 4. 5) When finished with the correction of all items, left-click the 0.Exit button. 357 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map insertion/correction mode.
(Example) Original vertex New vertex 3.6.3.6 Deleting a mark or vertex from a line (Delete Vertex) With regard to the created user map, a vertex is deleted individually from a mark or line. Procedures operation. 1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu U.Map 2. Edit User Map The Edit User Map menu will appear. 2) Left-click the 6. Delete Vertex button. The user map delete mode is selected. Delete is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the radar display. 3) Put the cursor on the vertex of a mark or line, and left-click. The selected mark or vertex of the line is deleted. All of the lines drawn by joining two points are deleted. To delete another mark or vertex of a line, repeat procedure 3. 4) When finished with the correction of all items, left-click the 0.Exit button. 358 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map delete mode.
(Example) The vertex to be deleted 3.6.3.7 Batch clearing marks or lines (Clear) With regard to the created user map, marks or lines are batch cleared by type or by color. 3 Procedures operation. 1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu U.Map 2. Edit User Map The Edit User Map menu will appear. 2)-1 Left-click the item button of 7. Delete by Type Select the type of marks or lines to be deleted. To select all types, select All
. For example, to delete "red " marks, select
. 2)-2 Left-click the item button of 7. Delete Select the color of marks or lines to be deleted. To select all colors, select All
. For example, to clear "red " marks, select Red
. After the items have been selected, Confirmation Window will appear. 359 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 3) Left-click the 1. Yes button. The selected mark will be deleted. NOTE: If data is not copied on the flash memory card (option), the data is not be reloaded. 3.6.4 Correct Position on User Map (Shift User Map) 3.6.4.1 Correcting the display position on the user map (Shift) If the display position on the user map is different from an actual position, it can be changed to the correct position in manual mode. Procedures 1) Open the [Shift] menu by performing the menu operation below. U.Map 3. Shift Shift selected. is displayed for the Cursor mode, indicating that the user map shift mode is 2) Put the pointer on a mark or end of a line, coastline, or depth contour line, and left-click. 3) Move the cross cursor mark to the location to be corrected, and left-click. Positions of all marks and lines currently displayed will be corrected. At this time, Map Shift is displayed in the map position correction (lower right of the display), indicating that the position is being corrected. Map Shift Map Shift
: Heading correction is conducted
: Heading correction is not conducted 360 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 3.6.4.2 Restoring the corrected user map to its original state (Shift Clear) Procedures 1) Open the Mark Operations menu by performing the following menu operation. U.Map 4. Shift Clear Only the most recently corrected data (for a single input) will be cleared, and the data will be displayed at its original position. At this time, Map Shift is not displayed in the map position correction (lower right of the display). Map Shift Map Shift
: Heading correction is conducted
: Heading correction is not conducted 3 3.6.5 Save User Map 3.6.5.1 Loading navigation data (Load User Map) Procedures 1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot. Flash memory card (option) is necessary. 2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation. U.Map 7. File Operation 3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot and select the card slot. Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched. 4) Left-click the item button of
. Overwrite Add
2. Load Mode and select Add and Overwrite of the Load Mode items are switched. When [Add] is selected, new data is added to the savedd data. When [Overwrite] is selected, the saved data is overwritten. 361 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 5) Left-click the 3. Load button. The list of navigation data saved in the system will be displayed. 6) Left-click the button for the file to be loaded. Confirmation Window will appear. 7) Left-click the 1. Yes button. The selected navigation data will be loaded and displayed on the radar display. 3.6.5.2 Discarding navigation data (Unload User Map) Procedures 1) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation. U.Map 7. File Operation 2) Left-click the 4. Unload button. Unload Confirmation Window will appear. 3) Left-click the 1. Yes button. The saved navigation data will be discarded. 3.6.5.3 Storing navigation data (Save User Map) Navigation data can be saved when navigation equipment is connected, or the own ship position on the user map is entered in the manual mode. Procedures 1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot. Flash memory card (option) is necessary. 362 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation. U.Map 7. File Operation 3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot and select the card slot. Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched. 4) Left-click the 5. Save button. The Input File Name screen will appear. 5) Enter the file name to be saved. Up to 10 characters can be entered.For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character". After the data has been entered, Confirmation Window will appear. 6) Left-click the 1. Yes button. Navigation data currently being displayed is saved. 3 3.6.5.4 Clearing the saved navigation data (Erase User Map) Procedures 1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot. Flash memory card (option) is necessary. 2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation. U.Map 7. File Operation 3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot and select the card slot. Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched. 363 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 4) Left-click the 6. Erase button. The Erace screen will appear. The list of navigation data saved in the card will be displayed. 5) Click numeric buttons corresponding to the number for the file to be deleted. Confirmation Window will appear. 6) Left-click the 1. Yes button. The selected navigation data is deleted and the name of the file is deleted from the list. 3.6.5.5 Displaying saved navigation data (Card Mark Display) Procedures 1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot. Flash memory card (option) is necessary. 2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation. U.Map 7. File Operation 3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot and select the card slot. Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched. 4) Left-click the 7. Card Mark Display button. The Card Mark Display screen will appear. The list of navigation data saved in the card will be displayed. 5) Left-click the button corresponding to the number for the file to be displayed. Confirmation Window will appear. 6) Left-click the 1. Yes button. The selected navigation data will be displayed. 364 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP 3.6.6 Set and Display Geodetic System (Geodetic) To create navigation information, set the geodetic system that is used with the connected navigation equipment. When navigation information is loaded, the geodetic system used when the navigation information was saved, is displayed. Make sure that the displayed geodetic system is identical to the one used with the navigation equipment. If the two geodetic systems are different, the positions of navigation information on the radar display will be shifted. Therefore, it is important to set the geodetic system of the navigation equipment.
[1] Setting the geodetic system for navigation data to be saved (Geodetic) 3 Procedures operation. 1) Open the Geodetic menu by performing the following menu U.Map 6. Geodetic The numeric value input screen for Geodetic will appear. 2) Enter the desired geodetic system number. The geodetic system is determined. For how to input numeric datas on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".
[2] Displaying the geodetic system of the navigation data being displayed (Geodetic) Procedures 1) Load navigation data by referring to Section 3.6.5.1 "Loading navigation data (Load User Map)". 2) Open the Mark Operations menu by performing the following menu operation. U.Map The geodetic system will be displayed in the 6. Geodetic field. 365 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP Table3-1 Geodetic System List
# NAME 0 WGS-84 1 WGS-72 2 Japan 3 North American 1927(U.S) 4 North American 1927(Canada & Alaska) 5 European 1950 (Europe) 6 Australian geodetic 1966 (Australia) 7 Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (England) 8 NAD-83 9 - (No Use) 10 - (No Use) 11 ADINDAN (Ethiopia & Sudan) 12 ARC 1950 (Botswana) 13 AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 (Australia) 14 BERMUDA 1957 (Bermuda islands) 15 BOGOTA OBSERVATORY (Colombia) 16 CAMPO INCHAUSPE (Argentine) 17 CHATHAM 1971 (Chatham Islands) 18 CHUA ASTRO (Paraguay) 19 CORREGO ALEGRE (Brazil) 20 DJAKARTA (VATAVIA) (Sumatra) 21 EUROPEAN 1979 (Europe) 22 GEODETIC DATUM 1949 (New Zealand) 23 GUAM 1963 (Guam) 24 HAYFORD 1910 (Finland) 25 HJORSEY 1955 (Iceland) 26 INDIAN (India & Nepal) 27 IRELAND1965 (Ireland) 28 KERTAU 1948 (West Malaysia) 29 L.C.5 ASTRO (Cayman Brac Island) 30 LIBERIA 1964 (Liberia) 31 LUZON (Philippines) 32 MERCHICH (Morocco) 33 MINNA (Nigeria) 34 NAHRWAN (Oman) 35 NAPARIMA, BWI (Trinidad & Tobago) 36 OLD EGYPTIAN (Egypt) 37 OLD HAWAIIAN (Hawaii) 38 PICO DE LAS NIEVES (Canary Islands) 39 PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 (South America) 40 PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 (South Chile) 41 PUERTO RICO (Puerto Rico & Virgin Islands) 42 QORNOQ (South Greenland) 43 RT90 (Sweden) 44 SANTA BRAZ (San Miguel island & Santa Maria islands) 45 SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 (South America) 46 SOUTHWEST BASE (Faial & Sao Jorge & Pico & Graciosa & Terceira island) 47 TIMBALAI 1948 (Brunei & East Malaysia) 48 - (No Use) 49 - (No Use) 366 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION In this radar system, a destination mark set by navigation equipment can be displayed, and a simple route can be created, displayed, loaded and saved. (To use this function, navigation equipment must be connected to this system) i If radar video is poor visibility caused by route function, click the Map button to turn off the Map function. Otherwise, press the
[DATA OFF] key to map displays temporarily off. 3 3.7.1 Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route) In this radar system, the following route and destination marks can be displayed. Route : Route created in the radar system are displayed. Destination mark : Destination marks sent from outside navigation equipment are displayed. Procedures 1) Left-click the radar display. The Route Menu will appear. Route button located at the lower right of the 2) Set the 1. Select Route item. The following route/destination mark display modes can be selected. Off
: Route and destination marks are not displayed. Internal
: Route saved in the system are displayed. NMEA
: Destination marks are displayed by using WPT data sent from outside navigation equipment. To display the NMEA . WP i mark on the radar display, select The destination mark is displayed only when the Waypoint data is received the NMEA sentence
(RMB,BWC,BWR). from outside by using 367 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3.7.1.1 Displaying route created by the radar system (Internal) In this radar system, route created by the radar system are displayed as shown below. Planned Course 070T 2.50kn 000 ABCDE Planned Speed 001 Route alarm line Waypoint Waypoint bearing vector 135T 5.00kn 062T 10.0kn Route 074T 004 12.5kn 003 OPQRS Comments Waypoint number Route alarm line 002 FGJK Waypoint alarm circle To Waypoint The following rout data is displayed. Waypoint
: Up to 512 points (number: 000 to 511), comments can be entered. To Waypoint
: Next Waypoint is displayed in a light blue circle. Route : A route line that connects Waypoints. Planned Courese : Scheduled route between Waypoints (automatically calculated). Planned Speed : Scheduled sailing speed between Waypoints (entered by user). Waypoint alarm circle : The circle that shows the distance to judge arrival in Waypoint. Route alarm line : The line that shows the distance width to judge route alarm. Waypoint bearing vector : A vector line that shows next destination from own ship's CCRP. 3.7.2 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence) In this radar system, it is possible to easily create and correct route by performing operation on the radar display. 3.7.2.1 Initializing route data (New Monitor Route) Route data saved in the radar system is initialized. NOTE:
Once route data is initialized, route data saved in the radar system's storage section is deleted. If there is necessary route data, save the route data on the flash memory card before initializing it. 368 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION Procedures 1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 3. Set Route Sequence 2) Left-click the 7. New Monitor Route button. Confirmation Window will appear. 3) Left-click the 1. Yes button. The saved route data will be deleted. 3.7.2.2 Adding a Waypoint (Add Waypoint) New Waypoint data is added to the route data saved in the radar system. 3 Procedures 1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 3. Set Route Sequence 2) Left-click the 2. Add button. The Waypoint adding mode is selected. The rubber band from the last Waypoint to the cursor position will be displayed on the radar display. 3) Left-click the location at which you want to add a Waypoint. A Waypoint will be added. When a Waypoint is added, the value of the Planned Speed in the section up to the menu is used for the Planned Speed value up to the added Waypoint. 369 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 4) To add another Waypoint, repeat procedure 3. 5) To finish adding a Waypoint, left-click twice at the last Waypoint. The Waypoint adding mode is cancelled.
(Example) 023 062T 12.0kn Rubber band 024 Last Waypoint 3.7.2.3 Correcting coordinates of a Waypoint (Correct Position) The coordinates of a Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system are corrected. Procedures 1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 3. Set Route Sequence 2) Left-click the 3. Correct Position button. The Waypoint correcting mode is selected. 3) On the radar display, put the cursor on the Waypoint that is to have its coordinates corrected, and left-click. The Waypoint to be corrected is specified. The cursor display becomes a cursor mark, and a rubber band is displayed. 370 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 4) Move the cursor to new coordinates, and left-click. The coordinates of the Waypoint are corrected, and then the Waypoint correcting mode is cancelled.
(Example) 025 108T 8.00kn 026 064T 12.0kn 024 064T 12.0kn 025 108T 8.00kn 024 Rubber band 026 Waypoint that is to have its position corrected Cross cursor mark 3 025 108T 8.00kn 026 064T 12.0kn 024 Planned Course 026 024 106T 12.0kn 060T 8.00kn 025 Click at this position 3.7.2.4 Correcting Planned Speed (Correct Planned Speed) Planned Speed of the route data saved in the radar system is corrected. Procedures 1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 3. Set Route Sequence 2) Left-click the 4. Correct Planned Speed button. The Planned Speed correcting mode is selected. 3) Left-click the 1. Planned Speed button. The Planned Speed input screen will appear. Enter a numeric value of new Planned Speed. 371 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 4) On the radar display, put the cursor on the line extending between Waypoints that is to have its Planned Speed corrected. The section that is to have its Planned Speed corrected is specified, and the new Planned Speed is applied to the section. 5) To correct the Planned Speed of another section, repeat procedures 3 and 4. 6) To finish correcting Planned Speed, left-click the 4. Correct Planned Speed button. The Planned Speed correcting mode will be cancelled.
(Example) Planned speed:
10.00kn 000 113T 8.00kn 064T 001 002 004 9.00kn 10.0kn 113T 064T 11.0kn 12.0kn 113T 003 005 Section that is to have its Planned Speed corrected 3.7.2.5 Deleting a Waypoint (Delete Waypoint) The specified Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system is deleted. Procedures 1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 3. Set Route Sequence 2) Left-click the 5. Delete button. The Waypoint deleting mode is selected. 372 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3) On the radar display, put the cursor on a Waypoint to be deleted, and left-click. The specified Waypoint is deleted, and the previous and following Waypoints are then connected by a line. 4) To delete another Waypoint, repeat procedure 3. 5) To finish deleting a Waypoint, left-click the 5. Delete button. The Waypoint deleting mode will be cancelled. 3
(Example) Waypoint to be deleted 000 113T 8.00kn 002 113T 064T 9.00kn 10.0kn 11.0kn 003 064T 001 004 113T 12.0kn Left-click Planned speed 000 113T 8.00kn 001 090T 10.0kn 064T 002 11.0kn 003 113T 12.0kn Calculated again Waypoints are re-numbered. 005 004 3.7.2.6 Inserting a Waypoint (Insert Waypoint) A Waypoint is inserted at a specific location of the route data saved in the radar system. Procedures 1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 3. Set Route Sequence 373 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 2) Left-click the 6. Insert button. The Waypoint inserting mode is selected. 3) On the radar display, put the cursor on the section line into which a Waypoint is to be inserted, and left-click. The section is specified, the cursor becomes a cross cursor mark, and the cross cursor mark is connected to the previous and following Waypoints by a rubber band. 4) On the radar display, put the cursor on the location at which a Waypoint is to be inserted, and left-click. The coordinates of the new Waypoint are specified, and the new Waypoint is connected to the previous and following Waypoints by a line. 5) To insert another Waypoint, repeat procedures 3 and 4. 6) To finish inserting a Waypoint, left-click the 6. Insert button. The Waypoint inserting mode will be cancelled.
(Example) Rubber band 001 090T 10.0kn 001 090T 10.0kn Waypoint is inserted into this section. Waypoint is inserted into this section. 374 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3.7.3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint Input) In this radar system, it is possible to create and correct route by performing operation on the Waipoint Input menu. Waypoint Number Waypoint Scroll Latitude/Longitude Planned Speed Waypoint Comment Waypoint 3 Waypoint Scroll Exit Waypoint Insert Waypoint Addition Waypoint Input Character Delete 3.7.3.1 Open the Waipoint Input Menu Procedures 1) Open the Waypoint Input menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 6. Waypoint Input When transmitting, it can not be open. 375 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3.7.3.2 Adding a Waypoint (Add) New Waypoint data is added to the route data saved in the radar system. Procedures 1) Open the Waipoint Input menu. 2) Left-click the ADD button. The new latitude of waypoint is reversed. 3) Enter a latitude / longitude and a planned speed. A Waypoint will be added. For the input method on the latitude / longitude and numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4.5 "Entering latitude/longitude" and Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character". 3.7.3.3 Adding a Comment (Comment) New Waypoint data is added to the route data saved in the radar system. Procedures 1) Open the Waipoint Input menu. 2) Left-click the Waypoint Scroll button. Left-click to show the desired comment. 3) Left-click the Comment button to be added. The comment of waypoint is reversed. 4) Enter a comment. A comment will be added. For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character". 376 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3.7.3.4 Correcting latitude / longitude of a Waypoint (LAT/LON) The latitude / longitude of a Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system are corrected. Procedures 1) Open the Waipoint Input menu. 3 2) Left-click the Waypoint Scroll button. Left-click to show the desired latitude / longitude. 3) Left-click the Latitude / Longitude button to be corrected. The latitude of waypoint is reversed. 4) Enter a latitude / longitude. A Waypoint will be corrected. For the input method on the latitude / longitude input screen, see Section 3.3.4.5 "Entering latitude/longitude". 3.7.3.5 Correcting Planned Speed (Planned Speed) Planned Speed of the route data saved in the radar system is corrected. Procedures 1) Open the Waipoint Input menu. 2) Left-click the Waypoint Scroll button. Left-click to show the desired planned speed. 3) Left-click the Planned Speed button to be corrected. The planned speed of waypoint is reversed. 4) Enter a planned speed. A Planned Speed will be corrected. For the input method on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". 377 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3.7.3.6 Deleting a Waypoint (DEL) The specified Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system is deleted. Procedures 1) Open the Waipoint Input menu. 2) Left-click the Waypoint Scroll button. Left-click to show the desired waypoint. 3) Left-click the DEL button to be corrected. Confirmation Window will appear. 4) Left-click the 1. Yes button. The specified Waypoint is deleted, and the previous and following Waypoints are then connected by a line. 3.7.3.7 Inserting a Waypoint (INS) A Waypoint is inserted at a specific location of the route data saved in the radar system. Procedures 1) Open the Waipoint Input menu. 2) Left-click the Waypoint Scroll button. Left-click to show the desired waypoint. 3) Left-click the INS button to be corrected. The new latitude of waypoint is reversed. 4) Enter a latitude / longitude and a planned speed. A Waypoint will be inserted. For the input method on the latitude / longitude and numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". 378 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3.7.4 Use Route Monitoring Function (Waypoint/Route Alarm) This radar system can monitor the movement of own ship with regard to its route and activate a variety of alarms. Destination alarm
(Waypoint Alarm):
When own ship arrives at next Waypoint, an alarm will be activated. Route alarm: When own ship deviates from the specified route, an alarm will be activated. 3 3.7.4.1 Destination alarm (Waypoint Alarm) The destination alarm is activated when own ship has reached next Waypoint or own ship has deviated from the scheduled route. A Waypoint alarm circle with a specified radius distance is displayed. Own ship position Waypoint alarm circle To Waypoint Waypoint Alarm has the following two types of alarms:
Arrival: An alarm is activated when own ship has entered the circle from outside. Break Off: An alarm is activated when own ship has left the circle to the outside. Procedures 1) Open the WPT/Route Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 2) Left-click the set value of the 1. Waypoint Alarm an operation mode. item, and select 379 1. Waypoint Alarm Arrival 0.00nm Operation mode Radius of the Waypoint alarm circle JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION Arrival
Break Off
: Set the operation mode. 0.00nm
: Set the radius of the Waypoint alarm circle. If 0.00nm is set, alarm operation will be turned off. 3.7.4.2 Route Alarm The route alarm is activated when own ship deviates from the specified width of the route. The route alarm lines are displayed with a specified width provided. Route alarm line Break Off alarm is activated when own ship is outside the specified range. To Waypoint Own ship position Route alarm line Route Alarm has the following two types of operations:
Approach An alarm is activated when own ship enters the route range from outside. XTE(Cross Track Error) An alarm is activated when own ship leaves the route range. Procedures 1) Open the WPT/Route Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 2) Left-click the set value of the 2. Route Alarm operation mode. item, and select an 2. Route Alarm Approach 0.00nm Operation mode Width of the route
(one side) Approach
XTE
: Set the operation mode. 0.00nm
: Set the width of the route (one side). If 0.00nm is set, an alarm operation will be turned off. 380 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3.7.5 Method of Using Route The method of using the route will be described. Displaying the route
(Route Alarm Color):
The internal route is displayed according to the procedures in Section 3.7.1 "Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route)". Selecting the forward or backward of the route
(Route Sequence):
Whether to use Waypoints forward or backward is selected. Skipping of route
(Waypoint Skip):
The Waypoint which is after next Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint. Skipping back of the route
(Waypoint Back Skip):
The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint. 3 3.7.5.1 Selecting the forward or backward of the route (Route Sequence) Select whether Waypoints in route data are used in the forward direction or backward direction. 000
: Forward
: Backward 001 007 003 006 005 002 004 Procedures 1) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 3. WPT/Route Operations Left-click the set value of the operation mode. 1. Route Sequence item, and select an Forward
:Waypoints are used in the forward direction (ascending order). Reverse
:Waypoints are used in the reverse direction (descending order). 381 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3.7.5.2 Skipping/Back-skipping of the route (Waypoint Skip/ Waypoint Back Skip) Next Waypoint of the route can be changed by user manually. 007 000
: Forward Backward 001 006 005 S k i p k c B a o i n t p y W a Waypoint Skip 003 002 k ip o i n t S p y W a Waypoint Back Skip 004 Skipping of route
(Waypoint Skip):
The Waypoint which is after the next Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint. Skipping back the route
(Waypoint Back Skip):
The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint. Procedures 1) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 3. WPT/Route Operations 2) To execute Waypoint Skip, left-click the 3. Waypoint Skip button. The Waypoint which is after the next Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint. 3) To execute Waypoint Back Skip, left-click the 4. Waypoint Back Skip Skip button. The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint. 3.7.6 Detailed Route Settings Make detailed settings of the route. Color for the route alarm line
(SEL NUM/Comment Size) Set the display color for the route alarm line. 382 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION Display character size
(SEL NUM/Comment Size) Waypoint bearing vector
(Waypoint Vector)
:Specify the size of the numeric value and character displayed on the radar display.
:Set the method to display line between next Waypoint and own ship. Display of bearing distance to the destination(Status of Origin/DEST)
:Select the start point to be used for the bearing/distance display in the Waypoint data display area. ON/OFF of Waypoint number display
(WPT Number Display)
:Set whether or not to display Waypoint number next to the Waypoint mark. Waypoint update
(Waypoint Switch Mode)
:Set how to update Waypoint number when one Waypoint has been reached. 3.7.6.1 Color for the route alarm line (Off-Track Limit Line) Route alarm lines are displayed on both sides of the center line of the route. For this item, set which color is used to display each line. Route alarm line Route alarm line 3 Traveling direction Traveling direction Route Alarm Color: Area A Route Alarm Color: Area B Area A (IALA-A) The port-side is red and the bow-side is green along the traveling direction. Area B (IALA-B) The port-side is green and the bow-side is red along the traveling direction. Procedures 1) Open the WPT/Route Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 2) Left-click the set value of the 8. Off-Track Limit Line item, and select an operation mode. IALA-A IALA-B
: Area A
: Area B 3.7.6.2 Display character size (SEL NUM/Comment Size) Specify the size of the numeric value and character displayed on the radar display. 383 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION Procedures 1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 9. Next 2) Left-click the set value of the select an operation mode. 1. SEL NUM/Comment Size item, and Normal Small
:Numbers and characters are displayed in normal size.
:Numbers and characters are displayed in a size smaller than usual. 3.7.6.3 Waypoint bearing vector (Waypoint Vector) Set how to display a line between next Waypoint and own ship. Procedures 1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 9. Next 2) Left-click the set value of the 2. Waypoint Vector item, and select an operation mode. Off
: The Waypoint bearing vector is not displayed. From Origin
: A line is displayed from the previous Waypoint to next Waypoint. Waypoint bearing vector From CURR
: A line is displayed from own ship to next Waypoint. Waypoint bearing vector To Waypoint To Waypoint 384 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3.7.6.4 Displaying bearing distance to the Waypoint (Status of Origin/DEST) Select a start point used to display bearing/distance in the Waypoint data display area. Procedures 1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 9. Next 3 2) Left-click the set value of the select an operation mode. 3. Status of Origin/DEST item, and From CURR POSN
:The bearing distance from the own ship position to next Waypoint is displayed. Fix
:The bearing distance from the previous Waypoint to next Waypoint is displayed. 3.7.6.5 ON/OFF of Waypoint number display (WPT Number Display) Set whether to display a Waypoint number next to the Waypoint mark. Procedures 1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 2. WPT/Route Setting 9. Next 2) Left-click the set value of the select an operation mode. 4. WPT Number Display item, and Off On
: The Waypoint number is not displayed.
: The Waypoint number is displayed. 385 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3.7.6.6 Updating Waypoint data (Waypoint Switch Mode) Set how to update the Waypoint number when one Waypoint has been reached. Procedures 1) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 3. WPT/Route Operations 2) Left-click the set value of the 2. Waypoint Switch Mode item, and select an operation mode. Manual
: When next Waypoint has been reached, user updates the following Waypoint. AUTO
: When next Waypoint has been reached, the following Waypoint is automatically updated. 3.7.7 Clear Waypoint/Route Data (Clear WPT/Route Data) This function clears waypoint/route data from memory. Procedures 1) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 3. WPT/Route Operations 2) Left-click the 6. Clear WPT/Route Data button. Confirmation Window will appear. 3) Left-click the 1. Yes button. A route data will be cleared. NOTE:
If data is not copied on the flash memory card (option), the data is not be reloaded. 386 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3.7.8 Operate Route Data File Route data saved in the radar system can be saved onto a flash memory card, and data can be loaded from a flash memory card into the radar system. With regard to this item, only route data can be saved and loaded. To save or load own ship's track, target track data, and mark/line data, see Section 3.11 "USING CARD". Selecting a card slot
(Select Card Slot):
Specify the card slot to be used for operating a route data file. Saving route data (Save): Route data saved in the radar system is saved onto a flash memory card. 3 Loading route data (Load): Route data saved on a flash memory card is Erasing route data file
(Erase):
loaded into the radar system. A route data file saved in a flash memory card is erased. 3.7.8.1 Selecting a card slot (Select Card Slot) Specify the card slot to be used for accessing a route data file Flash memory card (option) is necessary. Procedures 1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot. 2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 4. File Operation 3) Left-click the set value of the 1. Select Card Slot item, and select a card slot. Slot1 and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched. 3.7.8.2 Saving route data (Save) Route data saved in the radar system is saved onto a flash memory card. Flash memory card (option) is necessary. 387 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION Procedures 1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot. 2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 4. File Operation 3) Left-click the 3. Save button. The file name input screen will appear. For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character". 4) After having entered a file name, left-click the ENT button. The entry of the file name will be finished. Confirmation Window will appear. 5) Left-click the 1. Yes button. The route data will be saved with the specified file name. 3.7.8.3 Loading route data (Load) Route data is loaded into the radar system from a flash memory card. Flash memory card (option) is necessary. NOTE:
Once route data has been loaded into the radar system from a flash memory card, the route data that has been saved in the radar system is overwritten and erased. Route data that has been erased cannot be resaved. Note that important route data should be saved in a flash memory card. 388 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION Procedures 1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot. 2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 4. File Operation 3 3) Left-click the 2. Load button. Contents of the specified memory card (file list) will be displayed. 4) Left-click the button for the desired file name. Confirmation Window will appear. 5) Left-click the 1. Yes button. The route data with the specified file name will be loaded. 3.7.8.4 Erasing route data (Erase) An unnecessary route data file saved on a flash memory card is erased. Flash memory card (option) is necessary. NOTE:
Once route data files that have been saved on a flash memory card is erased, the erased data cannot be resaved. Note that important files should not be erased. Procedures 1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot. 2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the menu operation below. Route 4. File Operation 389 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION 3) Left-click the 4. Erase button. Contents of the specified memory card (file list) will be displayed. 4) Left-click the button for the desired file name. Confirmation Window will appear. 5) Left-click the 1. Yes button. A route data file with the specified file name will be erased. 390 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8 3.8.1 APPLIED OPERATIONS Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting) This function enables the setting of detail information about radar signal processing. Procedures 1) Open the Process Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Main 3. RADAR Menu 1. Process Setting The Process Setting menu will appear. Detail information about radar signal processing can be set by changing the settings of the menu items. NOTE:
the settings for radar signal processing are After changed, small targets may not be displayed or unwanted waves may not be suppressed. Thus, do not make a significant change in the settings. 3 3.8.1.1 Video Latitude Select the dynamic range in which receiving signals are to be shown on the radar display. Normal clearly displays short-range videos when STC is used in manual in rainy weather. in standard, and Wide Select Narrow mode. Narrow Normal Wide
: Narrows the dynamic range at short range.
: Standard setting The dynamic range varies depending on the actual range:
Short distance: wide Long distance: narrow
: Use this mode when rainy weather intensifies unwanted waves.The dynamic range is about twice as wide as when Normal is selected. Super Wide
: Use this mode when rain cloud remain at Wide mode. 391 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.1.2 3.8.1.3 Off Video Noise Rejection This function rejects signals that assumed as noise and clutter in radar videos. Select Select Select to display radar videos like analog signals. to suppress noise and clutter. or or to superimpose-display the chart. Level2 Level2 Level1 Level1 Off Turns off the noise rejection function, and displays all signals. Targets are popped up from noise and displayed like analog signals. Level1 Level2 Rejects the signals of definitely unwanted waves (noise and clutter). When detection of targets or unwanted waves is not definite, the signals are displayed. Rejects the signals of definitely unwanted waves (noise and clutter). When detection of targets or unwanted waves is not definite, the signals are rejected. Only when detection of targets is definite, the signals are displayed. Auto Dynamic Range When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode and the automatic rain/snow clutter suppression mode are in use, the dynamic range is automatically controlled. When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is in use, this function improves gain by widening the dynamic range of only areas where sea clutter is strong and narrowing the dynamic range of areas where sea clutter is not detected. When the automatic rain/snow clutter suppression mode is in use, this function improves gain by widening the dynamic range of areas where sea clutter and rain/snow clutter are strong and narrowing the dynamic range of the other areas. Land videos become obscure when the automatic rain/snow clutter suppression mode is in use. Off Does not control the dynamic range automatically.
(Standard setting) The dynamic range is set in the same manner as when the manual sea clutter suppression mode or the manual rain/snow clutter suppression mode is in use. On Automatically controls the dynamic range. 392 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.1.4 3.8.1.5 Process Switch This function sets a specific area and switches the video process mode between the inside and outside of the area. In Section 3.8.1.5 "2nd Porcess Mode" 2nd Process Mode, set the second video process mode for the area outside the boundary. In [2] PROCESS of Main Menu , set the first video process mode for the area inside the boundary. Gain at a distance can be improved by suppressing near sea clutter through the correlative process. There are two methods for setting an area:
Off Disables setting) the Process Switching function. (Standard Range Fix Sets a boundary at a constant range from the center. Set the boundary range in Section 3.8.1.6 "Process Switch Range". The specific area turns out to be a circle with the own ships position as the center. AUTO Automatically sets a specific area. The area subject to many clutter returns is inside the boundary, and the area less subject to clutter returns is outside the boundary. 3 2nd Porcess Mode Set the second video process mode for the outside of a specific area. This function is enabled when Range Fix AUTO or is selected in Section 3.8.1.4 "Process Switch". Video process modes PROC Off
: Select this mode in general. 3Scan CORREL
: Select this mode when many rain/snow clutter returns are detected. 4Scan CORREL
: Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter returns. 5Scan CORREL
: Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns. Remain
: Select this mode when own ship yaws wildly. Peak Hold
: Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection probability is low. 3.8.1.6 Process Switch Range Set the boundary range of a specific area. This function is enabled when Range Fix
"Process Switch". is selected in Section 3.8.1.4 The specific area turns out to be a circle with the own ships position as the center. The boundary range can be set in units of 0.1 nm, ranging 0.1 to 25.5 nm. 393 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.1.7 Fast Target Detection This function displays fast moving targets that are suppressed in scan-
correlative process mode. This function is enabled when 3Scan CORREL
, 4Scan CORREL
, or 5Scan CORREL is selected as the video process mode. If unwanted waves remain on the radar display, suppress them by using the
[SEA], [RAIN], or [GAIN] dial, or adjusting the interference rejection mode. Off On
: Disables the Fast Target Detection function.
: Enables the Fast Target Detection function. 394 3 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.2 Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting) This function enables the setting of detail information about radar trails processing. Procedures 1) Open the RADAR Trails Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Main 3. RADAR Menu 2. RADAR Trails Setting The RADAR Trails Setting menu will appear. Detail data about radar trails processing can be set by changing the settings of each menu item. NOTE:
After the settings for radar trails processing are changed, targets trails may not be displayed or trails may be plotted with unwanted waves. Thus, do not make a significant change in the settings. 3.8.2.1 Trails Mode Set the radar trail display mode. For details on the trail mode, see Section 3.4.8 "Display Radar Trails (Trails)"
3.8.2.2 Trails REF Level Select a radar video level required for plotting radar trails. The radar video threshold level increases in order of Level1 Level2 Level3 Level4
. To plot radar trails with unwanted waves, change to a higher level. To thin radar trails, change to a higher level. If radar trails are plotted in snatches, change to a lower level. 395 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.2.3 Trails Reduction Make a setting for thinning radar trails. The effect of thinning increases in order of Level3
. Level1 Level2 Radar videos do not become obscure because of the thinning of radar trails. Off
: Disables the Trails Reduction function. Level1 Level2 Level3
: Enables the Trails Reduction function. (Effect: Low)
: Enables the Trails Reduction function. (Effect: Modest)
: Enables the Trails Reduction function. (Effect: High) 3.8.2.4 Trails Process Determine whether to use the video process with radar signals for plotting radar trails. When Trails Process is
, radar trails are never plotted with unwanted waves, but the radar trails of moving targets may not be plotted. When Trails Process is
, radar trails may be plotted with unwanted waves, but the radar trails of moving targets are always plotted. On Off Off On
: Disables the Trails Process function.
: Enables the Trails Process function. 3.8.2.5 MAX Interval Select the maximum time for displaying radar trails. Select Select when short radar trails are often used in bays and the likes. when long radar trails are necessary for ocean navigation. Short Long Short
: Sets 15 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display. Middle
: Sets 30 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display. Long
: Sets 60 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display. 396 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.3 Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting) This function enables the setting of detail information about an antenna. Procedures 1) Open the TXRX Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Main 3. RADAR Menu 3. TXRX Setting The TXRX Setting menu will appear. Detail information about antenna operation can be set by changing the settings of the menu items. 3 3.8.3.1 PRF Fine Tuning Fine-tune the transmitting repetition frequency of the transmitter in the range 90 to 100%. If radars interference patterns are concentrically displayed, increment or decrement the set value by 3 to 4 in order to heighten the effect of interference rejection. One of 32 levels 0-31 can be set. 3.8.3.2 Stagger Trigger The interference reduction function is activated by using the transmission repetition frequency control of the transmitter. This function is effective when radar interference does not go away. Off On
: Stagger Trigger is not used.
: Stagger Trigger is used. 3.8.3.3 PRF Select the operation mode the transmitting repetition frequency of the transmitter. Normal
:Standard mode Both appropriate gain and magnetron's life expectancy are maintained. Economy
:Power saving mode Gain slightly lowers, but the service life of magnetron is prolonged when short pulses are used. High Power
:High gain mode Gain improves when long pulses are used, but the service life of magnetron is slightly shortened. 397 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.3.4 Ice Class Standby Mode This mode is effective to prevent the antenna's rotating shaft from freezing. In this mode, the antenna is rotated when transmission is in the standby state. Off On
:The ice class standby mode is not used. When transmission is in the standby state, the antenna also stops rotating.
:The ice class standby mode is used. When transmission is in the standby state, the antenna rotates. 3.8.4 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting) This function enables the setting of detail information about cursor operation and display. Procedures below. 1) Open the Cursor Setting menu by performing the menu operation Main 7. Sub Menu 9. EBL/Cursor Setting 3. Cursor Setting The Cursor Setting menu will appear. Detail information about cursor operation and display can be set by changing the settings of the menu items. 3.8.4.1 EBL/VRM Control CURS The EBL/VRM Control Cursor is switched between Valid and Invalid. The trackball is provided as a standard device. If the trackball malfunctions, the cursor can be moved by using the [EBL] dial and [VRM] dial. The cursor moves horizontally when [EBL] is operated, and moves vertically when [VRM] is operated. To switch between EBL/VRM operation and cursor operation while ON is selected, hold down the [EBL] dial for 2 seconds. On Off
: Cursor is operated using a [EBL] [VRM] dial.
: Cursor is operated using a trackball. 398 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.4.2 Cursor Length Set the length of the cross cursor mark on the radar display. Short Long Cuts the cross cursor mark in length.
: Makes the cross cursor mark twice as long as when Short is selected. 3.8.4.3 Cursor Pattern The type of the cross cursor mark displayed of the display is selected.
: Type 1 is selected for the cross cursor mark 1 displayed in the radar display.
: Type 2 is selected for the cross cursor mark 2 displayed in the radar display.
: Type 3 is selected for the cross cursor mark 3 displayed in the radar display.
: Type 4 is selected for the cross cursor mark 4 displayed in the radar display. 3 3.8.5 Set Radar Display (Display Setting) This system can save combinations of display color and brilliance in accordance with ambient lighting conditions and the radar display can be easily switched. Follow the procedures below to set display color and brilliance to be saved before hand. 3.8.5.1 Setting display color (Display Color Setting) Procedures below. 1) Open the Color Setting menu by performing the menu operation Main 7. Sub Menu 1. Display Color Setting Display Color Setting menu will appear. 399 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.5.2 Day/Night Specify the mode to be changed. The following modes are available:
Day1 Day2 Day3 Dusk Night
: Day mode 1
: Used under bright lighting conditions.
: Day mode 2
: Used under bright lighting conditions.
: Day mode 3
: Used under bright lighting conditions.
: Dusk mode
: Used under dim lighting conditions.
: Night mode
: Used under dark lighting conditions. Setting color of each element Specify the color for the element. The color for the following elements can be specified. Outer PPI Inner PPI Character RADAR Video
: The color of the background outside radar video PPI is selected.
: The color of the background inside radar video PPI is selected.
: The color of the character and bearing scale is selected.
: The color of the radar video is selected. RADAR Trails(Time)
: The color of the time radar trails is selected. RADAR Trails(All)
: The color of the time radar trails is selected. Target Symbol
: The color of the target symbol is selected. Cursor Range Rings EBL/VRM/PI
: The color of the cursor is selected.
: The color of the range rings is selected.
: The color of the EBL / VRM / PI is selected. Own Symbol /HL/Vector
: The color of the own ship symbol, heading line, own ship vector is selected. Those selected color can be saved for each Day/Night mode. i 3.8.5.3 Setting display brilliance (Brilliance Setting) For each Day/Night mode, background color outside the bearing scale, background color inside the bearing scale, and color for characters, radar echo and radar trails can be selected. 3 100 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS Procedures 1) Open the Brilliance Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Main 7. Sub Menu 2. Brilliance Setting Display Brilliance Setting menu will appear. Setting brilliance of each element 3 Specify the brilliance for the element. Level4 indicates maximum brilliance and Level1 indicates minimum brilliance. The brilliance for the following elements can be specified. RADAR Video RADAR Trails
: The brilliance of the radar video is selected.
: The brilliance of the radar trails is selected. Target Symbol
: The brilliance of the target symbol is selected. Range Rings EBL/VRM/PI Character
: The brilliance of the range rings is selected.
: The brilliance of the EBL / VRM / PI is selected.
: The brilliance of the character and bearing scale is selected. Own Symbol /HL/Vector
: The brilliance of the own ship symbol, heading line, and own ship vector is selected. Keyboard
: The brilliance of the operation panel is selected. Those selected brilliance can be saved for each Day/Night mode. i 3.8.5.4 Setting radar video brilliance (VID) The brilliance of the video on the radar display is adjusted. Procedures VID 1) Left-click the button located at the lower right of the radar display, and adjust the brilliance of the radar video so as to get the best view of the video display. The brilliance of the radar video can be adjusted on four stages without opening the Brilliance Setting menu. Adjust the radar display to obtain the best-to-view video. 3 101 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.5.5 Setting target symbol brilliance (TT) The brilliance of the target symbol on the radar display is adjusted. Procedures TT 1) Left-click the button located at the lower right of the radar display, and adjust the brilliance of the target symbol so as to get the best view of the video display. The brilliance of the target symbol can be adjusted on four stages without opening the Brilliance Setting menu. Adjust the radar display to obtain the best-to-view video. 3.8.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume) When an alarm is activated, the operation panel issues an alarm audible to inform user of the change of the condition. The alarm sound can be adjusted by performing the following procedures. Procedures 1) Open the Buzzer Volume menu by performing the menu operation below. Main 7. Sub Menu 2. Brilliance Setting Display Buzzer Volume menu will appear. The volume of the alarm sound can be specified for each cause for alarm. Level4 indicates maximum volume and Level1 indicates minimum volume. Key ACK OPE Miss
: The operation key acknowledgement is set.
: The incorrect operation alarm is set. CPA/TCPA Alarm
: The dangerous ship alarm is set. New Target Alarm
: The automatic acquisition target alarm is set. Lost Alarm
: The target lost alarm is set. Navigation Alarm
: The navigation data abnormality alarm is set. System Alarm
: The system abnormality alarm is set. Inter Switch
: The inter switch switching alarm is set. 3 102 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.7 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2]
Users can freely make settings with [OPTION 1] key and [OPTION 2] key. By using the keys, users can open a frequently used menu by only single operation, or assign special functions, to the user key switches. 3.8.7.1 Initial Setting (Option Key Setting) Set functions that can be performed with the option key switches. 3 Procedures 1) Open the Option Key Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Main 7. Sub Menu 4. Option Key Setting The Option Key Setting menu will appear. This system provides two user keys: [OPTION 1] and [OPTION 2]. Different functions can be allocated to each key. Functions that can be allocated to each key are as follows:
Menu Zoom DEST
: A specific menu is directly displayed.
: The zoom display function is switched between on and off.
: Set/Cancel Waypoint menu key
: Start-point, Pass-point key in simple route operating
: End-point key in simple route operating Capture Screen
: Screen capture key (This function is enabled only when the card (optional) is connected.) 3 103 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.7.2 Using Option Keys (Directly displaying a specified Preset the
) that is to be displayed with the option key switch. Menu Menu Procedures 1) Perform the general menu open procedure to open the menu that is to be directly displayed with Option Key. 2) While the menu is open, hold down [OPTION 1] key or [OPTION 2]
key for 2 seconds. The menu currently being displayed is saved for the pressed option key. The menu set Subsequently, general menu operation can be performed. the pressed option key will open. for i 3.8.7.3 How to use the Optin key (
Preset whether to execute the Zoom Zoom Display) display by operating the user key. Procedures 1) Press either [OPTION 1] key or [OPTION 2] key for which Zoom has been set. The zoom mode is activated. 2) Put the cursor on a location that is to be zoomed, and left-click. Zoom is set. Cancel 1) Press either [OPTION 1] key or [OPTION 2] key for which Zoom has been set. The zoom mode is cancelled and a normal display will appear. 3 104 3 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.8 Set Navigation Data Display (Multi Window Setting) By performing the following operation, it is possible to display navigation data of the wind direction / velocity, water depth and the like, as a graph on the radar display. Procedures 1) Open the Multi Window Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Main 4. Multi Window Setting The Multi Window Setting menu will appear. Detailed settings of the display are possible by changing the settings of each item. 3.8.8.1 DIR/DIST EXP Display Determine whether to expand the value display of cursor, EBL, and VRM. The value display is expanded in digital information area 2. When the cursor mark moves on the PPI, the display of cursor information is expanded. When an EBL or VRM is operated, the value display of each marker is expanded. While the menu is open, any display is not expanded. Off On
: Does not expand any display.
: Expands the display in digital information area 2. The expanded display remains the operation of each marker, and then it will disappear. for 5 seconds after Always On
: Expands the display in digital information area 2. 3.8.8.2 Numeric NAV INFO Determine whether to display the numeric values of received navigation information. One of two digital information areas is used to display data. When navigation data is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT)/AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased. 3 105 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS Navigation information of the water depth, water temperature, tidal current, wind direction/velocity, and destination is displayed with numeric values. Left-click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display. The navigation data display function is switched between On and Off.
: Does not display the numeric values of navigation information.
: Displays the numeric values of navigation information in digital information area 1.
: Displays the numeric values of navigation information in digital information area 2. Off Area1 Area2 3.8.8.3 Depth Graph Setting The Depth Graph Setting menu will appear.
[1] Depth Graph Display Determine whether to display received water depth information with a graph. One of two digital information areas is used to display data. When the water-depth graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT)/
AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased. Left-click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display. The water-depth graph display function is switched between On and Off. Off Area1 Area2
: Does not display a water depth graph.
: Displays the water depth graph in digital information area 1.
: Displays the water depth graph in digital information area 2.
[2] Depth Range Select the depth range on the water depth graph. 50m 100m 250m AUTO
: Sets 50 m as the depth range.
: Sets 100 m as the depth range.
: Sets 250 m as the depth range.
: Uses the depth range in the DPT sentence included in received data.
[3] Time Range Select the time range on the water depth graph. 3 106 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 10min 15min 30min 60min
: Sets 10 minutes as the time range.
: Sets 15 minutes as the time range.
: Sets 30 minutes as the time range.
: Sets 60 minutes as the time range. 12hour
: Sets 12 hours as the time range.
[4] Depth Unit Set the unit of water depth for the water-depth graph. Feet
: The foot is used as the unit of water depth. Fathom
: The fathom is used as the unit of water depth. Meters
: The meter is used as the unit of water depth. 3.8.8.4 Wind Graph Setting The Wind Graph Setting menu will appear.
[1] Wind Graph Display Determine whether to display received wind direction/velocity information with a graph. One of two digital information areas is used to display data. When the wind direction / speed graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT) / AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased. 3 Left-click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display. The wind direction / speed graph display function is switched between On and Off. Off Area1 Area2
: Does not display the wind direction / speed graph.
: Displays the wind direction / speed graph in digital information area 1.
: Displays the wind direction / speed graph in digital information area 2.
[2] Wind Speed Unit Set the unit of wind velocity for the wind direction / speed graph. m/s km/h kn
: Meters per second are used as the unit of wind speed.
: Kirometers per hour are used as the unit of wind speed.
: Knots are used as the unit of wind speed. 3 107 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.8.5 TEMP Graph Setting The TEMP Graph Setting menu will appear.
[1] TEMP Graph Display Determine whether to display the graph of the water-temperature data that has been received on the radar display. One of two digital information areas is used to display data. When the water-temperature graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking
(TT)/AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased. Left-click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display. The water-temperature graph display function is switched between On and Off. Off Area1 Area2
: The water-temperature graph is not displayed.
: The water-temperature graph is displayed in digital information area 1.
: The water-temperature graph is displayed in digital information area 2.
[2] TEMP Graph Color Set the color for the water-temperature graph. There are eight selection items:
, Green White Gray Blue
, Yellow
, Pink
, Red
[3] TEMP Range When Color is selected for the display color for the water-temperature graph, set the temperature range of each color.
[4] Time Range Set the time range for the water-temperature graph. 10min 15min 30min 60min
: The time range is set at 10 minutes.
: The time range is set at 15 minutes.
: The time range is set at 30 minutes.
: The time range is set at 60 minutes. 12hour
: The time range is set at 12 hours. 3 108 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.8.6 Course Bar Setting The Course Bar Setting menu will appear.
[1] Course Bar Display Determine whether to display the bar graph for the course data that has been received on the radar display. One of two digital information areas is used to display data. When the course-bar graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT)/
AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased. Left-click the Target button located at the lower righit of the display. The course bar display function is switched between On and Off. 3 Off Area1 Area2
: The course bar graph is not displayed.
: The course bar graph is displayed in digital information area 1.
: The course bar graph is displayed in digital information area 2.
[2] Autopilot Course Determine which field of the APB sentence that has been received is used to display AP course. Course to Steer Heading to Steer to Destination From Origin Bearing Origin to Destination From CURR POSN Bearing, Present Postion to Destination
[3] ROT Scale Set the maximum scale for the TURN Rate graph. 30-0-30
: The scale is set at 30/min. 60-0-60 90-0-90
: The scale is set at 60/min.
: The scale is set at 90/min. 120-0-120
: The scale is set at 120/min. 150-0-150
: The scale is set at 150/min. 300-0-300
: The scale is set at 300/min. 3 109 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS 3.8.9 AUTO Backup Data can be automatically backed up when the power supply is turned on. Procedures 1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot. Flash memory card (option) is necessary. 2) Open the Plot Setting menu by performing the following menu operation. Main 8. Plot Setting 3) Left-click the item button of 5. AUTO Backup Backup button. The AUTO Backup menu will appear. 4) Select the number for the card slot to back up data. Off Slot1 Slot2
: The automatic backup function is turned off.
: Data is automatically backed up on the compact flash memory card inserted into slot 1.
: Data is automatically backed up on the compact flash memory card inserted into slot 2. Data that can be backed up includes own ship's track (Own Track), other ships' trails data
(Target Track), mark/line data (Mark/Line), destination data (WPT), and route data (Route). The file name to be saved is either 9998 or 9999. Every time the power supply is turned on, those numbers are alternately displayed. 3110 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
"Radar Function Setting" is provided for easily obtaining the best radar video by storing complex radar signal processing settings in the optimum status by use, and calling the setting in accordance with the conditions for using the function. Functions are factory-set for general use, and the settings can be fine adjusted by operating the menu. Four function modes are available, and they are factory-set as follows:
3 Function 1:
Coast Useful for observing short-range videos. Function 2:
Deep Sea Suitable for general ocean navigation. Function 3:
Function 4:
Storm Rain Useful for observing videos in stormy weather. Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but rain / snow clutter is strong. 3.9.1 Operation Procedures 3.9.1.1 Calling a Function Procedures 1) Press the [USER] key. Each time the [USER] key is pressed, the selection changes cyclically as follows:
Function OffFunction1Function2 Function3 Function4Function Off The name of the current function mode is displayed at the lower left of the display. Alternatively, left-clicking the function button located at the lower left of the radar display will enable the same operation. Function
(FUNC) mode 3.9.1.2 Changing Function Setting (temporary change) When radar signal processing setting is changed by using the menu or button on the radar display while function 1 to 4 is called, the change is temporarily reflected to the operating state. Since this method does not change the memory contents, the new setting is discarded as soon as another function is called. When the previous function is called again, operation is performed according to the memory contents. 3111 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
3.9.1.3 Changing Function Setting (memory contents change) To change the memory contents of functions 1 to 4, use the function setting menu. For how to operate the function setting menu, see Section 3.9.3 "Overview of Function Operations (User Function Setting)". 3.9.2 Function Setting Menu Items The function setting menu has the items below. page 1 1. Mode 2. IR 3. Process 4. Target Enhance 5. AUTO Sea/Rain 6. Save Present State page 2 1. Pulse Length 0.75NM 2. Pulse Length 1.5NM 3. Pulse Length 3/4NM 4. Pulse Length 6/8NM 5. Pulse Length 12NM 6. Pulse Length 16NM page 3 1. Video Latitude 2. Video Noise Rejection 3. AUTO Dynamic Range 4. Process Switch 5. 2nd Process Mode 6. Process Switch Range 7. Fast Target Detection page 4 1. Trails Interval 2. Trails Mode 3. Trails Reference Level 4. Trails Reduction 6. Trails Process 7. Max Interval page 5 1. Gain Offset 2. PRF 3. Small Buoy Detection 4. Fishnet Detection 5. Antenna Height 8. Set Mode Default 9. Initialize Option Name of the mode to be used Coast/Deepsea/.... Radar interference rejection Video process Target expansion Automatic clutter suppression Off / AUTO Sea / AUTO Sea/Rain Saving the present state Off/Low/Middle/High PROC Off/3Scan CORREL/.... Off/Level1/Level2/Level3 Option Standard pulse length for 0.75nm range SP1/MP1 Standard pulse length for 1.5nm range Standard pulse length for 3nm range Standard pulse length for 6nm range Standard pulse length for 12nm range Standard pulse length for 16nm range SP1/MP1/MP2/MP3 MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1 MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2 MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2 MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2 Dynamic range of radar video Radar video noise rejection Automatic dynamic range control Radar video process switching 2nd video process mode Video process switching range Option Narrow/ Normal /Wide/Super Wide Off/Level1/Level2 Off/On Off/Range FIX/AUTO PROC Off/3Scan CORREL/.... Off/On Radar trails length Radar trails plotting threshold Thinning of radar trails Superimpose-display of time radar trails and continuous radar trails. Maximum time for radar trails display Option Off/15sec/.... True/Relative Level1-4 Off/Level1-3 Off/On Short/Middle/Long Gain correction Transmitting repetition frequency Small target detection mode Fishnet detection mode Option Normal/Economy/High Power Off/On Off/On Default/-5m/5-10m/10-20m/20m 3112 3 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
3.9.3 Overview of Function Operations (User Function Setting) The following outlines the operation of each function selected from the function setting menu:
Procedures 1) Open the Process Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Main 3. RADAR Menu 1. Process Setting 8. User Function Setting The User Function Setting menu will appear. Specify the number for the function for which the settings are to be changed. The following are the operation overviews of each function setting item. page 1-[1] Mode Selects the function name to be indicated at the lower left of the radar display when the function is selected. When the setting is changed back to the factory setting, the initial value of the selected mode is called. The following 11 modes are provided:
Coast Deep Sea Fish Net Storm Calm Rain Bird Long Buoy User1 User2
: Use this mode to monitor a relatively short range, for example, bays and coasts where many boats and ships are running. (Importance is attached to resolution.)
: Use this mode to monitor a relatively long range, for example, the open sea. (Importance is attached to long-range gain.)
: Use this mode to detect small targets such as fishnets of round haul netters hidden by sea clutter returns. (Importance is attached to sea clutter suppression, and gain to moving targets lowers.)
: Use this mode when many rain / snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns are detected in stormy weather. (Importance is attached to rain /
snow clutter and sea clutter suppression, and gain slightly lowers.)
: Use this mode when only a few rain / snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns are detected.
: Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but rain / snow clutter is strong. (Importance is attached to rain / snow clutter suppression, and gain slightly lowers.)
: Use this mode to detect flocks of sea birds.
: Use this mode to monitor utmost distances in the broad ocean.
: Use this mode to detect small targets like radio buoys in areas outside the sea clutter area. (This mode displays targets of which detection probability is low.)
: General mode used when the nine modes above are not applicable.
: General mode used when the nine modes above are not applicable. 3113 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
page 1-[2] IR (Radar interference rejection) Same function as IR Setting described in Section 3.4.1 "Interference Rejection
(IR)". page 1-[3] Process (Video process) Same function as PROCESS Setting described in Section 3.4.4 "Use Video Processing (PROC)"
page 1-[4] Target Enhance Same function as TARGET ENHANCE Setting described in Section 3.4.3
"Target Enhance (ENH)". page 1-[5] Auto STC/FTC (Auto Sea/Rain) Detects unwanted waves such as rain/snow clutter and sea clutter and automatically suppresses them. When the sea state or weather changes, this function automatically performs suppression processing in accordance with the situation. Suppression processing is not full automatic, and requires the operator to adjust the afterimages of unwanted waves. To adjust the afterimage of sea clutter, use the [SEA] dial. To adjust the afterimage of rain/snow clutter, use the [RAIN] dial. In areas where the density of unwanted waves is low, unwanted waves may remain being judged as targets. Thus, use the automatic clutter suppression mode together with the video process mode. Characteristics of the automatic clutter suppression function:
Off AUTO Sea
: Disables the automatic clutter suppression function. Select off when rain / snow clutter and sea clutter are not strong or when the ship is in a bay.
: Automatically detects the strength of sea clutter, and performs the most suitable sea clutter suppression processing. AUTO Sea/Rain Even when the strength of sea clutter varies depending on the wind direction, AUTO Sea performs the most suitable suppression processing. Land like islands can be displayed naturally. Since rain clouds outside sea clutter areas are recognized as land, there is no effect of suppressing rain / snow clutter.
: Along with AUTO Sea, AUTO Rain automatically detects the strength of rain / snow clutter, and performs the most suitable rain /
snow clutter suppression processing. When rain clouds are scattered about, AUTO Rain performs rain /
snow clutter suppression processing for only the rain-cloud areas. Since land is recognized as rain clouds, land videos become obscure. 3114 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
page 2-[1]~[7] PL (Pulse Length) Sets the standard transmitter pulse length in each range. When the range is called, the pulse range is used. 3 page 3-[1]~[7] Video setting menu (Process Setting) Operation is the same as that of the Process Setting menu described in Section 3.8.1 "Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting)". page 4-[1]~[7] Radar trails settings (Trails Setting) Same functions as in the Trails Setting of the RADAR Menu described in Section 3.8.2 "Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting)". page 5-[1] Gain Offset Corrects gain while the function mode is called. Since the displayed noise level varies depending on the combination of the video process mode and the interference rejection level, gain needs fine adjustment for always obtaining the highest level. The gain correction function saves the correction value set by the gain adjust in each function mode, so it can obtain the highest gain without the gain adjust being operated when the function mode is changed. To set high gain, set a value on the + side. To set low gain, set a value on the - side. When the radar interference rejection level is increased, the noise level is lowered. Thus, set a gain correction value to the + side. When the video process mode 3Scan CORREL 4Scan CORREL
, or 5Scan CORREL is used, the noise level is lowered. Thus, set a gain correction value to the + side. When the video process mode Remain or Peak Hold is used, noise is hard to disappear. Thus, set a gain correction value to the - side. page 5-[2] PRF Same function as in the TXRX Setting described in Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)". 3115 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
page 5-[3] Small Buoy Detection Reduces the loss of signal processing during detection of small targets. Off On
:Activates the general signal processing mode.
:Activates the small buoy detection mode that reduces the loss of signal processing. page 5-[4] FishNet Detection Use this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns. This function becomes more effective when the AUTO RAIN clutter suppression function is used together. Off On
:Activates the general signal processing mode.
:Activates the fishnet detection mode. page 5-[5] Antenna Height Set the height of radar antenna above sea level. The STC/FTC curve is changed. Default
: Set default
~5m
: Set the antenna height under 5m. 5m~10m 10m~20m
: Set the antenna height 5m to 10m.
: Set the antenna height 10m to 20m. 20m~
: Set the antenna height over 20m. 3116 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
3.9.4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data The overview of saved function setting data is as follows:
Factory-set data:
: Saved data that general operation cannot change Default data:
: Standard data of each function mode that users can change Data that can be called:
: Saved data that can be called by pressing the [USER] key Procedures 1) Open the User Function Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. 3 Main 3. RADAR Menu 1. Process Setting 8. User Function Setting FUNCTION SETTING Factory-set data FUNCTION SETTING Default data FUNCTION SETTING Data that can be called Current data 5-[9 Coast Deepsea Fishnet Storm Calm Rain Bird Long Buoy User1 User2 Coast Deepsea Fishnet Storm Calm Rain Bird Long Buoy User1 User2 1-[1 FUNC1 FUNC2 FUNC3 FUNC4 USER Present 1-[6 5-[8 page 1-[1] Mode Calls the default value of the mode, and saves it for the function number. page 1-[6] Save Present State The currently operating state can be saved for the function number. Use this function to save the state of good setting that will be frequently used. page 5-[8] Set Mode Default Saves the setting of the current function number, as the default setting of the mode. page 5-[9] Initialize Changes the memory contents of the mode, which is used with the current function number, back to the factory setting. 3117 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.10 USE USER SETTING 3.10 USE USER SETTING The operation status of the radar is recorded. If the system is operated by more than one operator, the operators can register operation status as suitable for them and call the status. Operation status for up to five operations can be registered, and a name can be assigned to each status. (Up to 10 alphanumeric characters) Data saved by the user setting Display Color Setting Buzzer Volume Option Key Setting Date Display Style EBL/VRM Control CURS Cursor Length 3.10.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting) The system's current operating state can be saved in the system by performing the operation below. Procedures 1) Open the Save User Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Main 7. Sub Menu 3. User Setting 2. Save User Setting The Save User Setting menu will appear. 2) Left-click the button for the file to be saved. The file name input screen will appear. 3) Enter a file name to be saved. The Input File Name menu will appear. On the numeric value input screen, enter a file name. After the file name has been entered, the operating conditions will be saved. 3118 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.10 USE USER SETTING 3.10.2 Load Operating State (Load User Setting) The operating state saved in the system can be loaded by performing the operation below. When the operating state is loaded, the previous operating state data is discarded. Therefore, if you do not want to discard the operating state data, save the operating state by performing the operation described in Section 3.10.1 "Save Operating State (Save User Setting)". Procedures 1) Open the Load User Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Main 7. Sub Menu 3. User Setting The Load User Setting menu will appear. 1. Load User Setting 2) Left-click the button for the file to be loaded. Confirmation Window will appear. To load the file, left-click the 1. Yes button. 3.10.3 Delete Operating State (Delete User Setting) The operating state saved in the system can be deleted by performing the operation below. Use this function to delete unnecessary operating state data. 3 Procedures 1) Open the Delete User Setting menu by performing the menu operation below. Main 7. Sub Menu 3. User Setting The Delete User Setting menu will appear. 1. Load User Setting 2) Left-click the button for the file to be deleted. Confirmation Window will appear. To delete the file, left-click the 1. Yes button. 3119 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD 3.11 USING CARD This radar has two card slots. Inserting a flash memory card (option) into a card slot, you can save the following contents, saved in the processor, in the card or can load data from the card to the processor. Trails of own ship: 7000 points maximum Track of other ship: 20 target X 500 points Mark/Line: 20000 points maximum WPT: 512 points maximum Route: 1 route maximum These pieces of information can be saved in a flash memory card as a file. The internal capacity is as large as only a file. An internally created file can be saved until the flash memory card is full. 3.11.1 Operate File on the Card (File Manager) Procedures 1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot. Flash memory card (option) is necessary. 2) Set the radar in the standby state. While the radar is in the transmission state, the File Manager screen cannot be opened. 3) Open the File Manager window by performing the menu operation below. Main 2. File Manager 3 120 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD The File Manager window will appear. Device 1 selected Copy file from device 1 to device 2 Device 2 format Type of file displayed Device 1 device type Device 1 format Device 1 saved information Device 1 select and cancel all files Device 1 erase selected file Processor saved information Exit Device 1 file list scroll Copy file from device 2 to device 1 Message Device 2 selected Device 2 device type Device 2 file list scroll Device 1 saved information Device 2 erase selected file Device 2 select and cancel all files 3 Information saved in the processor is displayed in the Memory Content. Own Track
: Number of data points for own ship's track (7000 points maximum) Remain : Number of remaining data points of own ship's track that can be saved Target Track
: The number of other ships' trails (up to 20 targets) Remain : The remaining number of other ships' trails to be saved Mark/Line
: Number of mark and line points made with user map (up to 20000 items) Remain : Number of remaining data points of marks and lines that can be saved WPT
: Number of data points of created waypoints (512 points maximum) Remain : Remaining waypoints that can be saved Route
: Number of data points of created routes (1 route maximum) Remain : Remaining routes that can be saved Internal Total
: Total number of data points The file name and data saved in the selected device will be displayed. Pressing the arrows located at the upper right and lower right of the file name list will scroll the list. 3 121 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD 3.11.1.1 Copy Internal Information to Card (Copy Internal -> Card) Procedures 1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1 selection button. Selected items for Device1 will be displayed. 2) Left-click the 1. Internal button among the selection items. Internal is selected. 3) Left-click the device 2 selection button. Selected items for Device2 will be displayed. 4) Left-click button corresponding to the device to which data is to be copied. The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed. 5) Put the cursor on the data to be copied, and Left-click button. Left-click button one more time will cancel the selection. 6) Left-click the COPY button. The character input screen for the Input File Name menu will appear. 7) Enter the file name to be saved. Up to 10 characters can be entered.For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character". After the data has been entered, Confirmation Window will appear. 8) Left-click the 1. Yes button. The entered name is written into the selected device as a file name. Up to the maximum number of items, described on the previous page, can be saved in the device. With regard to the capacity for saving data, data can be saved on a flash memory card as a file, and those files can be saved until the flash memory card is full. 3 122 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD 3.11.1.2 Load Information from Card to Internal Portion (Copy Card ->
Internal) Procedures 1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1 selection button. Selected items for Device1 will be displayed. 2) Left-click the 1. Internal button among the selection items. Internal is selected. 3 3) Left-click the device 2 selection button. Selected items for Device2 will be displayed. 4) Left-click button corresponding to the device in which data to be loaded is saved. The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed. 5) Select the desired data. Left-click button one more time will cancel the selection. 6) Left-click the COPY button. Confirmation Window will appear. 7) Left-click the 1. Overwrite button to overwrite data, or Left-click the 2. Add button to add new data. When Overwrite is selected, internally saved data is deleted and new data is loaded. When Add is selected, new data is added to the saved data. 8) Left-click the 1. Yes button. The selected file is loaded into the system from the card. When adding data saved on the card to the data saved in the system, data can be copied from multiple files. However, when the maximum number of units of data is reached, additional data cannot be loaded. Even in the ADD mode, WPT data and Route data are overwritten. 3 123 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD 3.11.1.3 Copy Information (Copy) Procedures 1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1 selection button. Selected items for Device1 will be displayed. 2) Left-click the button corresponding to the device from which data is to be copied. The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed. 3) Left-click the device 2 selection button. Selected items for Device2 will be displayed. 4) Left-click button corresponding to the device to which data is to be copied. The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed. 5) Put the cursor on the data to be copied, and Left-click button. Left-click button one more time will cancel the selection. 6) Left-click the COPY button. The character input screen for the Input File Name menu will appear.If there is a file having the same name, the file selection window will appear. 7) When deleting saved data and copying new data, left-click 1. Overwrite to select Overwrite. When adding data to a destination file, left-click to select Add. Even in the Add mode, WPT data and Route data are overwritten. When selection has been made, Confirmation Window will appear. 2. Add 8) Enter the file name to be saved. Up to 10 characters can be entered. For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character"
After the data has been entered, Confirmation Window will appear. 9) Left-click the 1. Yes button. The entered name is written into the selected device as a file name. 3 124 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD 3.11.1.4 Erase File (Erase) Procedures 1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1 selection button. Selected items for Device1 will be displayed. 2) Left-click button corresponding to the device in which data to be erased is saved. The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed. 3 3) Select data to be erased. Left-click button one more time will cancel the selection. 4) Left-click Erase button. Confirmation Window will appear. 5) Left-click the 1. Yes button. The selected file will be erased. 3.11.1.5 Initializing a card (Format) Procedures 1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1 selection button or the device 2 selection button. Selection items for Device1 or Device2 will appear. 2) Left-click the button which corresponds to the system (device) where data to be displayed is saved. The File Manager window will appear. 3) Put the cursor on Left-click button. Format for the device to be initialized, and Confirmation Window will appear. 4) Left-click the 1. Yes button. Initialization will be executed. 3 125 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD 3.11.1.6 Showing data saved on the card (Show Card) Procedures 1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1 selection button. Selected items for Device1 or Device2 will be displayed. 2) Left-click button corresponding to the device in which data to be displayed is saved. The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed. Exit 1) Left-click the 1. Exit button. The File Manager menu will close. 3 126 SECTION 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING 4.1 4.2 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS ..............................................................4-1 Using Cursor (Cursor) ....................................................................4-2 Using Range Rings (Range Rings) ................................................4-2 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL1/EBL2) ................................4-3 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI Menu) .............................................4-8 Operating EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver Setting) ....4-14 Operating EBL, VRM, and PI with Cursor ...................................4-16 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING ....................................4-19 Measurement with Cursor Position (Cursor) ..............................4-19 Measurement with Electronic Bearing Line and Variable Range Marker [EBL] [VRM] .....................................................................4-20 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points .....................................4-21 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS The system is equipped with the navigation tools below. Cursor: Specifies an arbitrary point, and measures the range and bearing from the own ship. Range Rings: Displays concentric circles with own ship's position as the center at specified intervals, and the rings are used as rough guides for range measurement. Electronic Bearing Line
(EBL1/2):
Displays a straight line for specifying an arbitrary bearing, and measures the bearing from the own ship.The process unit is equipped with two electronic bearing lines. Variable Range Marker
(VRM1/2):
Displays a circle for specifying an arbitrary range, and measures the range from the own ship.The process unit is equipped with two variable range markers. Parallel Index Line (PI): Displays straight lines at even intervals, and the lines are used as rough guides for complex measurement or ship courses. 4 EBL Maneuver: Displays the course by steering the own ship, and it is used as a rough guide for ship maneuvering. Man Overboard: Stores the latitude and longitude where the own ship was at the point of storing the markers, and shows an anchor symbol on the radar display. When the own ship has moved, the system displays the range and bearing to the position. Use this tool when the ship is anchored or man overboard. EBL/VRM/PI Operation with Cursor (Cursor AUTO):
Operates EBL, VRM, or PI on the radar display by using the cursor. Cursor bearing numeric value indication true / relative Cursor range EBL1 numeric value indication true / relative EBL1 On / Off VRM1 On / Off EBL2 On / Off VRM2 On / Off EBL2 numeric value indication true / relative Cursor mode Cursor latitude Cursor bearing Cursor longitude EBL1 bearing EBL1 starting point mode VRM1 range EBL2 bearing EBL2 starting point mode VRM2 range Parallel index line starting point mode Parallel index line On / Off Consistent Common Reference Point (CCRP) 41 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4.1.1 Using Cursor (Cursor) Procedures 1) Move the cursor onto the PPI display by moving the trackball. When the cursor is moved onto the PPI display, the arrow cursor turns into a cross cursor. 4.1.2 Using Range Rings (Range Rings) Procedures 1) Left-click the Rings button on upper left area on the display. Range rings display On / Off Range rings interval The range ring display switches disappear and appear between display and non-display each time the button. button is clicked. The range ring interval is shown in the Rings Rings The range between the target and own ship can be determined by visually measuring the target's position that lies between two range rings. For change of the brilliance of range rings, refer to Section 3.8.5 "Set Radar Display (Display Setting)". 42 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4.1.3 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL1/EBL2) Electronic bearing lines (EBL) are indispensable to the measurement of bearings. Operators must be familiar with the operation of EBL beforehand. The system is equipped with two EBL. The bearing and starting point of an EBL can be operated separately from the other EBL. An intersection marker is displayed at the intersection point of the EBL and VRM of the same number. Intersection markers shown on EBL:
: EBL1, VRM1
: EBL2, VRM2 4 EBL2 VRM2 EBL1 VRM1 EBL Bearing Display The bearing value of the current upper right of the display. EBL1 or EBL2 on the PPI display is shown in the The currently operable EBL1 or EBL2 is highlighted in the upper right of the display. Starting Point of EBL The starting point of the currently operating EBL can be switched from the center of the radar display to any offset position . The offset position of the EBL starting point can be fixed on the radar display or at the latitude and longitude. (The setting of the navigator is necessary for fixing the offset position at the latitude and longitude.) 43 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4.1.3.1 Operating EBL (EBL) Procedures 1) Press the [EBL1] or [EBL2] key. The EBL button (located at the upper right of the display) will be highlighted, and the selected EBL becomes operable. Turn the [EBL] dial. To turn the [EBL] dial to the right, turn the EBL control clockwise; to turn the [EBL] dial to the left, turn the EBL control counterclockwise. Cancel 1) Press the [EBL1] or [EBL2] key again. The selected EBL display will disappear. 4.1.3.2 Moving the Starting Point of EBL The system provides three types of EBL starting points. Select one of them in accordance with purpose. _ C D
: The EBL starting point is defined as the own ship's position.
: The EBL starting point is moved and fixed on the radar display.
: The EBL starting point is moved and fixed at the latitude and longitude. (The navigator needs to be connected.)
[1] To move the starting point of EBL Procedures 1) Make EBL1 or EBL2 operable. 2) Press the [EBL] dial to set starting point mode switching located at the upper right of the display. for the EBL1 / EBL2 or D C The selected EBL starting point mode is switched as shown below each time the dial is pressed. _ C D _ 3) Put the cursor on the EBL starting point is to be moved, and left-
click. The selected EBL starting point will be determined. 44 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
[2] To return the EBL starting point to own ship's position Procedures 1) Make EBL1 or EBL2 operable. 2) Press the [EBL] dial to set mode switching located at the upper right of the display. for the EBL1 / EBL2 starting point _ The selected EBL starting point will be set as the own ship's position. 4.1.3.3 Setting EBL Operation Mode 4
[1] To set the numeric value display mode of EBL (EBL Bearing REF) Determine whether to display EBL in true bearing mode or relative bearing mode. Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the EBL1/2 numeric value indication true /
relative switching (located at the upper right of the display), and left-click. The selected mode is switched as shown below each time the left button is clicked. R T T T R
:EBL bearing is displayed in true bearing mode.
:EBL bearing is displayed in relative bearing mode.
[2] To set a mode for fixing EBL display (EBL Bearing Fix) When this function is set to Angle , an EBL is fixed to the preset bearing. For example, if a true bearing of 020 is preset, the EBL is fixed to the true bearing 020 even when the own ship turns. When the function is set to Screen , the EBL is fixed on the radar display. In this case, the EBL is always fixed to the same bearing on the display when the own ship turns. 45 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS Procedures 1) Open the EBL/Cursor Setting menu by performing the following menu operation. Main 7. Sub Menu 9. EBL/Cursor Setting 2) Left-click at the item button of 1. EBL1 Bearing FIX or 2. EBL2 Bearing FIX
. Angle
:EBL bearing is fixed to the preset value. Screen
:EBL bearing is fixed on the radar display. Course data is necessary for turning on this function. i Variable range markers (VRM) are indispensable to the measurement of ranges. Operators must be familiar with the operation of VRM beforehand. The system is equipped with two VRM. The VRM can be operated separately from each other. An intersection marker is displayed at the intersection point of the VRM and EBL of the same number. When the starting point of an EBL is offset, the center of the VRM is defined as the offset EBL starting point. Intersection markers shown on VRM:
: EBL1, VRM1
: EBL2, VRM2 46 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS EBL1 VRM1 VRM Operation EBL2 VRM2 4 The range value of the current VRM1/2 range located at the upper right of the display. The currently operable VRM1 or VRM2 is highlighted in the button located at the upper right of the display. on the PPI display is shown in the or VRM1 VRM2 VRM1 VRM2 4.1.3.4 To operate VRM (VRM) Procedures 1) Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key. The highlighted, and the selected VRM becomes operable. and VRM1 VRM2 buttons (located at the upper right of the display) will be 2) Turn the [VRM] dial. To turn the [VRM] dial to the right, the VRM control wide, to turn the [VRM] dial to the left, the VRM control narrow. Cancel 1) Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key again. The selected EBL display will disappear. 47 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4.1.4 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI Menu) Parallel index lines can be displayed. 4.1.4.1 Operating Parallel Index Lines (PI) Procedures 1) Press the [VRM] dial. Parallel index lines and the PI Menu will appear. To change the bearing of parallel index lines, turn the [EBL] dial, to change the line interval, turn the [VRM] dial. The bearing and interval of parallel index lines are displayed in the PI Menu. 2) Press the [VRM] dial again. The parallel index lines will be fixed. i Parallel index lines are operable only while the PI Menu is displayed. When the menu is closed, the parallel index line display remains, but the settings of the bearing and interval cannot be adjusted any more. To adjust the bearing and interval after closing the menu, press the [VRM] dial twice to open the PI Menu. Cancel 4.1.4.2 1) Press the [VRM] dial again. The parallel index line display will disappear. Operation of Parallel Index Lines Parallel index lines rotate in the same direction as you turn the [EBL] dial.(1, 2) The intervals of parallel index lines narrow when you turn the [VRM] dial counterclockwise (3), and widen when you turn the [VRM] dial clockwise
(4). When the [VRM] dial is pressed, the PI Menu closes and the parallel index lines are fixed. 48 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS HL EBL1 EBL2 VRM 1 VRM 2 4 During the operation of parallel index lines, pressing the [EBL1] or [EBL2] key disables operation for rotation directions. Pressing the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key disables operation for parallel index line intervals. 4.1.4.3 Settings in PI Menu (PI Menu) The operation of parallel index lines can be set in the PI Menu. Procedures 1) Left-click the PI button to open the PI menu.
[1] Display for All Lines Sets the parallel index line display to on or off. On Off
:Parallel index lines are displayed.
:Parallel index lines are not displayed. 49 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
[2] Operation Mode Sets an operation mode for parallel index lines. PI PI All PI Individual PI Track Equiangular All
:All the parallel lines are operated at the same time. Individual
:The bearing of each line is operated individually. Track
:Equally spaced lateral lines are displayed on both sides. Equiangular
:Two lines intersecting at the center of a circle are displayed. a. Operation if Individual is selected A line perpendicular to the own ship and the intersection marker "----" are displayed on an operable line. Turning the [EBL] dial changes the direction. Pressing the [VRM] dial changes the range, end point 1, or end point 2 to be operated. An operable point is displayed with " " and can be operated by turning the
[VRM] dial. If Sequential is selected for [3] Control, the parallel index lines of the next number can be displayed by pressing the [EBL] dial. To close the menu, left click 0.Exit software button. b. Operation if Equiangular is selected Select a group of lines to be operated according to the setting of [3] Control. Pressing the [EBL] dial switches between the direction change mode and elevation-angle change mode. Turning the [EBL] dial changes the direction or elevation angle. 410 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
[3] Control Determines whether to operate all the lines at the same time. The setting items are determined by the setting of Section [2] "Operation Mode". a. If All is selected The setting cannot be changed. All
:All the lines are operated at the same time. b. If Individual is selected Determine whether to set consecutive lines or individual lines. Sequential
:Lines are operated sequentially. Index Line1 to Line8
:A specified line is operated. 4 c. If Track or Equiangular is selected Select a group of lines to be operated. Group1 to Group4
:A specified group is operated.
[4] Floating Moves the center point of parallel index lines. Off
:The starting point of parallel index lines is defined as the own ship's position. Screen Fix
:The center of parallel index lines is moved and fixed on the radar display. L/L Fix
:The center of parallel index lines is moved and fixed at the latitude and longitude. (The navigator needs to be connected.)
[5] Heading Link Determines whether to operate parallel index lines following the heading bearing. On Off
:Parallel index lines are operated following the heading bearing.
:Parallel index lines are not operated following the heading bearing. 411 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
[6] Next Moves to the next page.
[7] Range Scale Link Determines the operation of parallel index line intervals when the range is changed. On Off
:The intervals are fixed with the actual range (nm). The appearance of parallel index line intervals changes when the range is changed.
:The intervals are fixed with the display range. The parallel index line intervals (nm) change when the range is changed.
[8] Reference Bearing Sets a reference bearing for the numeric data display of parallel index lines. The setting items are determined by the setting of Section [2] "Operation Mode"
a. If All is selected True
:Displayed with true bearing (with North as reference). HL
:Displayed with the heading line as reference. b. If Individual is selected True
:Displayed with true bearing (with North as reference). HL
:Displayed with the heading line as reference. Index Line1 to Line8
:Displayed with a specified line as reference. 412 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS c. If Track is selected True
: Displayed with true bearing (with North as reference). HL
: Displayed with the heading line as reference. Index Line1 to Line8
: Displayed with a specified line as reference. Line1, Line3, Line5 and Line7 to Group1, Group2, Group3 and Group4, respectively. correspond Line1 Line3 Line5 Line7 Group1 Group2 Group3 Group4 d. Equiangular If The setting cannot be changed. is selected 4
[9] Operation Area If All is selected for Section [2] "Operation Mode", this function sets an area for displaying parallel index lines. One Side
:Parallel index lines are displayed only on one side. Both Side
:Parallel index lines are displayed on both sides.
[10]Display for Individual Line Determines whether to turn on / off the parallel index line display of a selected number. On :The line of the selected number is displayed. Off
:The line of the selected number is not displayed. If line near the own ship is All Index Line1
. is selected for Section [2] "Operation Mode", the Track or Equiangular If is selected for Section [2] "Operation Mode", Line1, Line3, Line5 and Line7 correspond to Group1, Group2, Group3 and Group4, respectively. Line1 Line3 Line5 Line7 Group1 Group2 Group3 Group4 413 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4.1.5 Operating EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver Setting) 4.1.5.1 Initial Setting (EBL Maneuver Setting) Procedures 1) Open the EBL Maneuver Setting menu by performing the following menu operation. Main 1. EBL Maneuver Setting 2) Set the following parameters. Reach
:Set the range from when the rudder is steered to when the ship beings to turn. Turn Mode
:Select a turn mode. Radius Rate
:Turning radius (NM)
:Rate of turn (deg/min) Turn Set
:Select the setting for turning. If If Radius is selected :Turning radius (NM) Rate is selected :Rate of turn (deg/min) For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". A wrong initial setting affects the maneuver curve function explained below. i 414 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4.1.5.2 Creation of Maneuver Curve (EBL Maneuver) Procedures 1) Left-click the item button of 1. EBL Maneuver while the EBL Maneuver Setting menu is open. The EBL maneuver function will be set to on or off. A auxiliary line for maneuver curve creation, a maneuver curve, and a WOL will appear on the radar display. 2) Put the cursor on the starting point of the auxiliary line, and set the bearing of the auxiliary line by operating the [EBL] dial. The bearing of the auxiliary line is the final bearing in which the own ship is to move. The WOL position varies depending on the bearing of the auxiliary line. If the WOL is behind the CCRP, the line color of WOL will change. 4 3) Left-click. The setting will be determined. However, if the WOL is behind the CCRP position at this point, left-clicking is rejected, and the setting is not determined. Auxiliary line HL Scheduled route Reach Radius Own ships position Maneuver curve WOL WOL Reach Radius
: Steering point
: Range from when the rudder is steered to when the ship begins to turn
: Turning radius 415 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4.1.6 Operating EBL, VRM, and PI with Cursor When the cursor mode is set to
(located at the upper right of the display), EBL, VRM, and PI can be operated simply by using the trackball. AUTO 4.1.6.1 Operating Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) Procedures 1) Put the cursor on EBL1 or EBL2, and left-click. When the cursor is moved to it, EBL1 or EBL2 is shown at the upper right of the cursor. The EBL becomes operable when left-clicking. EBL2 EBL1 2) Move the cursor to the bearing to be set. The EBL will move as the cursor moves. 3) Left-click. The EBL will be fixed. 4.1.6.2 Operating Variable Range Marker (VRM) Procedures 1) Put the cursor on VRM1 or VRM2, and left-click. When the cursor is moved to it, VRM2 the cursor. The VRM becomes operable when left-clicking. VRM1 or is shown at the upper right of 2) Move the cursor to the range to be set. The VRM will move as the cursor moves. 3) Left-click. The VRM will be fixed. 416 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS 4.1.6.3 Operating EBL and VRM Concurrently (EBLVRM) Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the intersection marker ( or ), and left-
click. When the cursor is moved to it, shown at the upper right of the cursor. The EBL and VRM become operable when left-
clicking. VRM1 VRM2 or EBL1 EBL2 is 2) Move the cursor to the bearing / range to be set. The EBL and VRM will move as the cursor moves. 4 3) Left-click. The EBL and VRM will be fixed. 4.1.6.4 Operating Parallel Index Lines (PI)
[1] To change the direction of parallel index lines Procedures 1) Put the cursor on near the center of line, and left-click. When the cursor is moved there, it will turn into the upper right of the cursor. The parallel index lines become operable when left-clicking. will be displayed at and PI 2) Move the cursor to the direction to be set. The parallel index lines will change the direction as the cursor moves. 3) Left-click. The parallel index lines will be fixed. 417 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
[2] To change parallel index line intervals Procedures 1) Put the cursor on near the end of line, and left-click. When the cursor is moved there, it will turn into the upper right of the cursor. The parallel index lines become operable when left-clicking. will be displayed at and PI 2) Move the cursor to the interval to be set. The parallel index lines interval will change as the cursor moves. If Individual is selected for Operation Mode, the parallel index lines move. 3) Left-click. The parallel index lines will be fixed.
[3] To change the end points of parallel index lines If Individual is selected for Operation Mode, the length of parallel index lines can be changed. Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the end point of parallel index lines, and left-
click. When the cursor is moved there, it will turn into the upper right of the cursor. The parallel index lines become operable when left-clicking. will be displayed at and PI 2) Move the cursor to the position to be set. The position of the end point will change as the cursor moves. 3) Left-click. The parallel index lines will be fixed. 418 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING 4.2.1 Measurement with Cursor Position (Cursor) Procedures 1) Make sure of the target echoes on the radar display. 2) Move the cursor to the target. The bearing and range of the target will be shown in the Cursor bearing / range located at the upper right of the display. The range is a distance from the own ship's position. 4 0 45.0 270 Target 6.00NM Cursor 90 Own ships position 180 Bearing and range from the own ships position to target in this figure :
True bearing 45.0 Range 6.00 NM 4.2.1.1 To set a cursor bearing numeric value mode Determine whether to display a cursor bearing in true or relative bearing mode. Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the Cursor bearing numeric value indication true / relative switching (located at the upper right of the display), and left-click. The selected mode is switched as shown below each time left-clicking. R T T T R
:Cursor bearing is displayed in true bearing mode.
:Cursor bearing is displayed in relative bearing mode. 419 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING 4.2.2 Measurement with Electronic Bearing Line and Variable Range Marker [EBL] [VRM]
Procedures EBL1
(located at the upper Press the [EBL1] key. 1) The right of the display) will be highlighted, and EBL1 will be shown with a dotted line on the PPI display. EBL1 numeric value indication true / relative switching EBL1 adjustment 2) Move the EBL1 to the target by turning the [EBL]
dial. VRM1 adjustment The EBL1 bearing will be shown in the EBL1 bearing (located at the upper right of the display). The EBL1 bearing is the bearing of the target. EBL1 starting point mode switching 3) Press the [VRM1] key. VRM1 The will be shown with a dotted line on the PPI display.
(located at the upper right of the display) will be highlighted, and VRM1 4) Move the VRM1 to the target by turning the [VRM] dial. The range of VRM1 from the own ship's position will be shown in the VRM1 range located at the upper right of the display. EBL1 0 270 45.0 5.00NM Own ships position 180 Target 90 VRM1 Bearing and range from the own ships position to target in this figure:
True bearing 45.0 Range 5.00 NM 420 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING 4.2.3 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points Procedures 1) Press the [EBL2] key. The will be shown on the PPI display. EBL2
( located at the upper right of the display) will be highlighted, and EBL2 2) Press the [EBL] dial to select C for the EBL2 starting point mode switching located at the upper right of the display. 3) Put the cursor on the point A of the two points between which measurement is made, and left-click. Refer to the figure below. 4) Move the EBL2 to the other point B by turning the [EBL] dial. 4 5) Press the [VRM2] key. When VRM2 is selected, (intersection marker) will appear on the dotted line of EBL2. 6) Move the intersection marker on the dotted line to point B by turning the [VRM] dial. The range and bearing between the two points will be shown in the VRM2 range and EBL2 bearing (located at the upper right of display). 6.00NM 0 90.0 A B Cape 270 Own ships position Cape EBL2 90 Bearing and range between points A and B in this figure:
True bearing 90.0 Range 6.00 NM VRM2 180 Similarly, EBL1 can also be used for measuring the bearing and range between two points. In this case, perform the above procedure reading EBL2 as EBL1 and VRM2 as VRM1. 421 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING 422 SECTION 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS 5.1 5.2 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 5.1.7 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 PREPARATION ......................................................................................5-1 Collision Avoidance ........................................................................5-2 Definitions of Symbols ...................................................................5-5 Radar Display ..................................................................................5-8 Cursor Modes (Cursor) .................................................................5-10 Setting Collision Decision Criteria ..............................................5-12 Setting Vectors (Vector Time) ......................................................5-13 Setting the GPS antenna location ................................................5-13 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION .....................................................5-14 Acquiring Target [ACQ] ................................................................5-14 Canceling Unwanted Tracked Targets [ACQ CANCEL] .............5-16 Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA] ..................................5-17 Displaying Target ID No.(Target Number Display) .....................5-18 Adding Tracked Target ID Name (Name) .....................................5-19 Reference Target (Reference) ......................................................5-20 Operation Test (TT Test Menu) ...................................................5-21 AIS OPERATION ..................................................................................5-26 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 5.3.9 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 Restrictions ....................................................................................5-26 Setting AIS Display Function (AIS Function) ..............................5-26 Activate AIS Targets (Activate AIS) .............................................5-27 Deactivate AIS Targets (Deactivate AIS) .....................................5-27 Displaying AIS Information [TGT DATA] .....................................5-28 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display) ....................5-31 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting) ...........................................5-32 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost ..........................5-35 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm (AIS Alarm Setting) ...............5-36 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL (Association) ...................5-37 Setting of Function to Decide Targets as Identical (Association) .....5-37 Setting of Conditions for Deciding AIS and Tracked Targets as Identical (Association Setting) .....................................................5-37 Types of Decision Conditions to be Set ......................................5-38 ALARM DISPLAY .................................................................................5-39 CPA / TCPA Alarm .........................................................................5-40 Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone
(New Target) ...................................................................................5-41 Lost Target Alarm (Lost) ...............................................................5-41 Gyro Set Alarm ..............................................................................5-42 TRACK FUNCTION ..............................................................................5-43 Past Position (Past POSN) ...........................................................5-43 Target Ship's Tracks (Target Track) ............................................5-44 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) ..........................5-53 Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode ................................5-54 Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode ..........................5-55 Operation of Trial Maneuvering Function ...................................5-56 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION 5.1 PREPARATION Attention There are the following limitations on use of the target acquisition and target tracking functions.
[I] Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic target tracking Depending on the particular distance and echo size, resolution between adjacent targets during automatic target tracking usually ranges somewhere between 0.03 to 0.05 NM. If multiple targets approach each other, resolution will become about 0.05 NM and this may cause the system to regard them as one target and thus to swap them or lose part of them. Such swapping or less of targets may also occur if the picture of the target being tracked is affected by rain/snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns or moves very close to land.
[II] Intensity of echoes and the target tracking function The intensity of echoes and the tracking function have a correlationship, and thus the target will be lost if no echoes are detected during six scans in succession. If a lost target exists, therefore, radar gain must be increased to support detection of the target. If, however, radar gain is increased too significantly, sea clutter returns or other noise may be erroneously detected and tracked as a target, and resultingly, a false alarm may be issued.
[III]Adverse effects of error sources on automatic tracking To execute accurate tracking, it becomes necessary first to appropriately adjust the [GAIN], [SEA] and [RAIN] dials of the radar so that the target to be acquired and tracked id clearly displayed on the radar display. Inappropriate settings of these adjustments reduce the reliability/
accuracy of automatic tracking. This section explains the features of the target tracking and AIS functions, and the initial setting for using each function. 5 Target Tracking Function The target tracking function calculates the course and speed of a target by automatically tracking the target's move. The target tracking function enables the automatic acquisition of targets by using the automatic acquisition zone function. The target tracking function also enables the simulation of the ship maneuvering method to avoid collisions by using the trial maneuver function. 51 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION If the mode is ground stabilization, SOG/COG used for own ship's information in target tracking. If the mode is sea stabilization, SPD (speed through the water) /
HDG (heading) used for own ship's information in target tracking. AIS (Automatic Identification System) function The AIS function shows the targets information on the radar display, using other ship's information sent out from the AIS unit. 5.1.1 Collision Avoidance 5.1.1.1 Problems of Collision Avoidance in Navigation Marine collision avoidance is one of the problems that have been recognized from of old. Now, it will be described briefly who the collision avoidance is positioned among the navigational aid problems. The navigation pattern of all mobile craft constitutes a system with some closed loops regardless of the media through which the mobile craft travels, whether air, water, the boundary between air and water, or space. This pattern consists of two closed loops in principle, one of which is a collision with another mobile craft and the other is a loop of finding a right and safe way to reach a predeterminate destination. Fig. 5-1 shows the conceptual diagram of navigation pattern by MR. E.W. Anderson. The closed loop of collision avoidance is shown on the left side and the closed loop of finding a right course on the right side. Collision avoidance Destination Decision of cource Traffic rule Vessels Spacing loop Course Guide loop Dead reckoning Caluculati on Visual and radio watch Cource and speed Cllision avoidance loop Judgement Mancuver Insrument or judgement Control loop Fixing by radio wave , visual and celestial observation Compass and log Ship traveling in controlled condition Fig 5-1: Navigation Pattern 52 5.1.1.2 5.1.1.3 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION Marine Accidents and Collisions Among marine accidents, collision accidents have been highlighted as the tonnages and speeds of ships become higher along with the increase in traffic at sea. If a tanker carrying dangerous articles such as crude oil collides with any other vessel, then not only the vessels involved with the accident but other vessels in the vicinity, port facilities, inhabitants in the coastal area as well as marine resources may also suffer immeasurable damages and troubles. Collision accidents have a high percentage of the marine accidents that have occurred in recent years. To cope with these problems, any effective measures are needed and some equipment to achieve collision avoidance requirements have been developed at rapid strides. Basic Concept of Collision Avoidance There are two aspects in collision avoidance: collision prediction and avoidance. Collision prediction is to predict that two or more vessels will happen to occupy the same point at the same time, while collision avoidance is to maneuver vessels not to occupy the same point at the same time. In practical operation of vessels, a spot of collision has to be deemed to be a single point but a closed zone. This closed zone is conceptually defined as a CPA
(Closest Point of Approach). In collision prediction, the time to be taken until a ship reaches the CPA is defined as a TCPA (Time to CPA). Fig. 5-2 shows a diagram caked "Collision Triangle". CPA TCPATime to CPA 5 Collision triangle Target vessel Own ship Relative vector CPA ring Fig 5-2: Collision Triangle 53 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION 5.1.1.4 Relative Vector and True Vector From two points of view, collision prediction and avoidance, it is necessary to obtain the relative vector of other ship for prediction and the true vector of other ship for collision avoidance in order to grasp other ships aspect. The relationship between the relative vector and true vector is shown in Fig. 5-3. Both rough CPA and TCPA can be obtained easily from the relative speed vector of other ship. This method has an advantage that the risks of collision with all other ships within the radar range can be seen at a glance. On the other hand, the course and speed of other ship can easily be obtained from its true speed vector, enabling other ships aspect to be seen at a glance. Thus, the aspects of other ships (transverse, outsail, parallel run, reverse run, etc. ) as described in the act of prevention of collision at sea can be readily grasped. If there is a risk of collision with other ship, the operator can determine which rule to be applied and how to operate own ship. N VT T A R VO: Own ship's speed O: Own ship's course VT: Other ship's true speed T: Target ship's true course VR: Target ship's relative speed R: Target ship's relative course A: Aspect VR Relative vector Own ship true vector Target ship true vector N O Vo CPA Fig 5-3: Relative Vector and True vector 5.1.1.5 Radar and Collision Avoidance Radar is still playing an important roll for collision prevention and positioning. A plotter is used to further enhance the radar functionality. The plotter is capable of plotting other positions of other ships in 3 to 6 minute intervals to monitor their movement. The plots of other ships represent their tracks relative to own ship, and it is shown whether there is a risk of collision, namely CPA and TCPA can be obtained. This method using a plotter is fairly effective, but the number of target ship, which is manually plotted, is limited and it takes several minutes to measure those. 54 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION 5.1.2 Definitions of Symbols 5.1.2.1 Types and Definitions of Target Tracking Symbols Vector/
Symbol Definition Remarks Initial acquisition target This symbol is displayed until the vector is displayed after target acquisition. Target acquired in automatic acquisition zone Tracked target The alarm sounds. The alarm message (New Target) turns red and blinks.The symbol is red colored. Dangerous target The alarm sounds. The alarm message (CPA/TCPA) turns red and blinks.The symbol turns red and enlarges. Numeric displayed target When the numeric data is displayed, the target symbol is enclosed in a square. 5 Lost target The alarm sounds. The alarm message (Lost) turns red and blinks.The symbol turns red, and indicates with X mark. Past position The past positions of an AIS target are displayed as well as the target tracking symbol. Target track The track of another ship as an AIS target is displayed as well as the target tracking symbol. 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 55 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION 5.1.2.2 Types and Definitions of AIS Target Symbols Vector/
Symbol Definition Remarks Sleeping target Activated target Target acquired in automatic acquisition zone Outline display This symbol is displayed when received data is valid.The direction of the triangle's vertex indicates the target's bow or course. The heading direction is displayed with a solid line, and the course vector is displayed with a dotted line. The line perpendicular to the heading direction indicates the direction to which the course is to be changed. This line may not be displayed. The alarm sounds. The alarm message (New Target) turns red and blinks. The outlines of ships are displayed scaled down. Numeric displayed target When the numeric data is displayed, the target symbol is enclosed in a square. Dangerous target The alarm sounds. Lost target The alarm message (CPA/TCPA) turns red and blinks.The symbol turns red and enlarges. The alarm sounds. The symbol turns red, and indicates with X mark. AIS12 AIS12 AIS12 AIS12 AIS12 AIS12 Up to 300 targets can be displayed in total of activated and sleeping AIS targets. Up to 100 activated AIS targets can be included in the total. If there are more AIS targets than the allowable maximum, they are displayed in the following priority order:
1. Numeric displayed target 2. Target of which CPA / TCPA is lower than the set value(Target as a dangerous ship for which an alarm has occurred) 3. Target in automatic activation zone 4. Activated AIS target 5. Target inside AIS filter 6. Target outside AIS filter If the number of targets at the same priority level exceeds the allowable maximum, they are displayed in the following priority order:
1. Association target 56 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION 2. Activated AIS target 3. Sleeping AIS target The vector of an AIS target is to be displayed with a vector over ground or over water, depending on the speed sensor setting and current offset setting. The type of the currently displayed vector can be confirmed by viewing the setting of the stable mode. GND When is displayed for the stability mode (Upper left of the display on page 2-3):
Sea When is displayed for the stability mode (Upper left of the display on page 2-3):
Vector over ground Vector over water When the vector of an AIS target is displayed with a vector over water, the system has converted the AIS target's vector over ground to the vector over water according to the data received from the AIS and the own ship's information. NOTE:
When the AIS target's symbol is activated but the vector is not displayed, the following are probable causes of the trouble:
5 COG/SOG is not yet input from the GPS. The selected speed sensor is malfunctioning. 5.1.2.3 Types and Definitions of Association Target Symbols When a tracked target and an AIS target are decided as identical, it is displayed with either of the following symbols:
Vector/
Symbol Definition Remarks Priority for tracked target Association target Priority for AIS target Association target a. Setting of Tracked Target Symbol Display This function switches the tracking target symbol display between on and off.Even if the tracking target symbol display is turned off, the data is retained. Procedures 1) Left-click the button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display. The tracking target symbol display will be set to on or off. 57 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION b. Setting of AIS Target Symbol Display This function switches the AIS target symbol display between on and off. Procedures 1) Left-click the button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display. The AIS target symbol display will be set to on or off. 5.1.3 Radar Display 5.1.3.1 Vector Display A vector to represent a targets predicted position can be presented in the True vector or Relative vector mode. In each mode, a vector length can be freely changed for a time interval of 1 to 60 minutes. To switch between the true vector mode and relative vector mode, press the [T/R VECT] key. 5.1.3.2 Vector Mode Selection
[1] True Vector Mode In the true vector mode, the direction of a target vector indicates the true course of the target and its vector length is proportional to its speed. In this mode, own ship's vector is displayed as shown Fig 5-4. In this mode, the movements of other ships around own ship can be accurately and easily monitored. However, CPA Ring cannot appear in this mode. Own ships position HL True vector The relative vector is not displayed Fig 5-4: True Vector 58
1 | Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 3.25 MiB | February 09 2008 |
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
[2] Relative Vector Mode The relative vector does not represent the true motion of the target, but its relative relation with own ship. This means that a target with its relative vector directed to own ship (passing through the CPA Limit ring) will be a dangerous target. In the Relative Vector mode, it can be seen at a glance where the CPA Limit of the dangerous target is. Therefore, the True / Relative mode shall optionally be used for the purpose of observation: the True vector mode for grasping the true aspect of a target, and the Relative vector mode for grasping a targets closest point of approach (CPA). HL The true vector is not displayed CPA ring Relative vector Fig 5-5: Relative Vector 5 5.1.3.3 Vector Length (Vector Time) The vector length of a target is proportional to its speed, and the vector time can be switched in a range of 1 to 60 minutes. The diagram below illustrates a vector length of a target for 6 minutes, and the tip of the vector represents the target's position expected to reach 6 minutes later. HL Future predicted position
(6 min later in this example) Current position Fig 5-6: Vector Length Refer to Section 5.1.6 "Setting Vectors (Vector Time)". 59 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION 5.1.4 Cursor Modes (Cursor) 5.1.4.1 Types and Functions of Cursor Modes The types of cursor modes are listed in the table below. To use the function of a cursor mode, move the cursor onto the PPI object and left-click. Mode ACQ TT ACT AIS TGT Data CNCL TT DEACT AIS Data CNCL Mark Property AUTO Function Enables the target tracking function to acquire a target in manual mode. Activates AIS targets, and sets a point filter. Displays the numeric data of a tracking target or AIS target. Cancels a tracking target. Deactivates AIS target. Hides the displayed numeric data of a tracked target or AIS target. Puts a temporary mark. Displays the information of tracked targets, AIS targets, and marks. Changes operation in accordance with the object at the cursor position. 5.1.4.2 Change of Cursor Mode Procedures 1) Left-click the Cursor button located at the upper right of the display. Alternatively, on the PPI, right-click and select a desired cursor mode from the list. The selected cursor mode will be shown at the cursor mode (Upper right of the display on page 2-4). i If the function of a selected cursor mode is not used for one minute or more, the cursor mode is automatically changed to AUTO . 5.1.4.3 Operation of AUTO Mode 510 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION As shown below, the AUTO mode performs operation in accordance with the object at the cursor position when left-clicked. The AUTO mode permits to access that you want by intuitive operation. Object at Cursor Position None EBL VRM Intersection point of EBL and VRM Parallel index line Tracked target Tracked target with numeric data displayed Sleeping AIS target Activated AIS target AIS target with numeric data displayed Automatic acquisition /
activation zone AIS filter Operation Acquires a target. EBL operation. VRM operation. Performs EBL operation and VRM operation at the same time. Operates the parallel index line. Displays the numeric data of the tracked target. Hides the numeric data. Activates the AIS target. Displays the AIS target information. Hides the AIS target information. Operates the automatic acquisition / activation zone. Operates the AIS filter zone. 5 511 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION 5.1.5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria Attention Set the optimum values of collision decision conditions, depending upon vessel type, water area, weather and oceanographic conditions. (For the relations between those conditions and alarms, refer to Section 5.5 "ALARM DISPLAY". ) 5.1.5.1 Input of CPA Limit Procedures 1) Left-click the CPA limit setting button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display. The CPA Limit value input screen will appear. 2) Enter the value to be set as a CPA limit. For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". 5.1.5.2 Input of TCPA Limit Procedures 1) Left-click the TCPA limit setting button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display. The TCPA Limit value input screen will appear. 2) Enter the value to be set as a TCPA limit. For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". 5.1.5.3 Setting CPA Ring (CPA Ring) While the distance of the specified CPA Limit value is used as the radius, the CPA ring is displayed with a red circle. Procedures 1) Left-click the CPA Ring button located at the lower right of the display. The CPA ring will be displayed. NOTE:
The CPA ring is not displayed when the true vector mode is selected. 512 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION 5.1.6 Setting Vectors (Vector Time) Vector time can be set in minutes in the range 1 to 60 min. A true vector mode or relative vector mode can be selected. 5.1.6.1 Setting vector time on the display (Vector) Procedures 1) Left-click the target vector time setting button in the Target Information located at the lower right of the display. The Vector Time value input screen will appear. 2) Enter the value to be set as vector time. For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". 5.1.6.2 Setting vector mode [T/R VECT]
Procedures 1) Press the [T/R VECT] key. 5 The current vector mode
(relative vector) will be displayed in the target vector display true / relative switching in Target Information located at the upper right of the display.
(true vector) or R T 5.1.7 Setting the GPS antenna location Set the GPS antenna location. Set offset ranges in longitudinal direction and latitudinal direction from the own ship's reference position. For the setting procedure, refer to Section 7.1.9 "Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting)". Attention If offset ranges are not set correctly, AIS symbols and radar echoes may be displayed shifted. When offset ranges are set, latitude and longitude data received from the GPS is offset, and the offset data is displayed as the latitude and longitude of own ships position. 513 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION This section explains how to use the target tracking function. The target tracking function automatically tracks a target, and displays the target's course and speed as vectors. The target tracking function calculates CPA and TCPA, and issues an alarm as needed. The tracking data is erased from memory when the power is turned off or during transmission standby. 5.2.1 Acquiring Target [ACQ]
Target acquisition can be performed on two modes, Automatic and Manual, and both modes can be used at the same time. 5.2.1.1 Automatic acquisition NOTE:
If the number of targets being tracked has reached the allowable maximum and other targets (not being tracked) go into the acquisition/activation zone, automatically acquired targets are canceled in ascending order of danger. The position of the scanner shall be at the centre of the azimuth or range in the acquisition/activation zone.
[1] Turning On / Off the automatic acquisition and AIS activation (AZ Menu) Procedures 1) Open the AZ menu by following menu operations. AZ The AZ Menu will appear. 2) Left-click the item button of 1. AZ1 or 2. AZ2
. The acquisition / activation zone 1 (AZ1) or acquisition / activation zone 2 (AZ2) will be set to on or off. On Off 12
:The acquisition / activation zone is turned on. The mark and target ID number are put to an acquired target and move with the target. The vectors are displayed within 1 minute. AIS targets are activated.
:The acquisition/activation zone turned off. The acquisition/activation zone will disappear from the radar display, but the system continues to track the acquired target. The activated AIS targets remain activate. is 514 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
[2] Creating the automatic acquisition and AIS activation Zone (Make AZ) Procedures 1) Open the AZ menu by following menu operations. AZ
= (AZ Menu) 2) Left-click the item button of 3. Make AZ1 or 4. Make AZ2
. The range setting of the acquisition / activation zone 1 (AZ1) or acquisition / activation zone 2 (AZ2) will be started. 3) Set the starting azimuth and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
[VRM] dial, and left-click. 4) Set the ending azimuth and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
[VRM] dial, and left-click. The acquisition / activation zone will be determined. 5.2.1.2 Manual Acquisition [ACQ MANUAL]
NOTE:
If more targets are acquired manually in the condition that the maximum number of targets are under tracking, the targets cannot acquired. 5 Procedures 1) Move the cursor onto the target to be acquired, and press the
[ACQ MANUAL] key. The target will be acquired and the initial acquisition symbol will be displayed. The vector will be displayed within one minute. Target manually acquired . The initial acquisition symbol is displayed . Target that has passed for 1 min. The acquisition symbol and vector are displayed . To perform operation only in the manual acquisition mode without automatic acquisition/
activation, turn off the automatic acquisition/activation function. 515 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
[1] Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes Use the manual acquisition mode while the automatic acquisition mode is on. Manually acquire the target to which particular attention should be paid, and get the other targets automatically acquired. If a new target appears exceeding the maximum number of targets, the manually acquired target is displayed even in the background until it gets out of the display. However, automatically acquired targets are canceled starting far distance from own ship. 5.2.2 Canceling Unwanted Tracked Targets [ACQ CANCEL]
Unwanted tracked targets can be canceled one by one in the following cases:
Tracking is no longer necessary for targets with which vectors/symbols are displayed after being acquired and tracked. The number of vectors on the radar display needs to be reduced for easy observation. When targets are to be re-acquired from the beginning, all the current vectors can also be canceled. 5.2.2.1 Canceling targets one by one [ACQ CANCEL]
Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the tracked target to the desired for canceling target, and press the [ACQ CANCEL] key. The vectors and symbols of the tracked targets will disappear, and only the radar video remain. 5.2.2.2 Canceling all targets collectively [ACQ CANCEL]
Procedures 1) Press the [ACQ CANCEL] key for 5 seconds. The vectors and symbols of all the targets will disappear, and only the radar videos remain. NOTE:
When all the targets have been canceled, the system stops tracking them. Thus, you need to re-acquire targets in manual or automatic acquisition mode. Do not cancel all the targets unless otherwise required. 516 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5.2.3 Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA]
Attention When a target or own ship changes its course, or when a new target is acquired, its vector may not reach a given level of accuracy until 3 minutes or more has passed after such course change or target acquisition. Even if 3 minutes or more has passed, the vector may include an error depending upon the tracking conditions. 5.2.3.1 Type of Data Display (Target Information) Target Data Target identification (TT ID) True bearing(BRG) Range Cource Speed Closest point of approach
(CPA) Time to CPA (TCPA) Bow crossing range (BCR) Bow crossing time (BCT) ID number of the target 0.1 unit 0.01NM unti 0.1 unit 0.1knot unit 0.01NM unit 0.1min unit 0.01NM unit 0.1min unit The target for which its numeric data is displayed is marked with a symbol to distinguish from other targets. 12 If a target's data is displayed, but without the symbol outside the currently displayed radar display.
, such a target exists 12 5.2.3.2 Method of Displaying Numeric Data [TGT DATA]
5 Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the tracked target for which numeric data is to be displayed, and press the [TGT DATA] key. Then, the data of the designated target will appear, it will be marked with a symbol The target data will remain on the radar display until the target is lost and its vector disappears, or until another target is designated. 12 If a target with the mark its vector appears. is designated, only its true bearing and range will appear until 12 517 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5.2.3.3 Cancellation of Numeric Data Display (CNCL Data) Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the tracked target with which numeric data is displayed, and right-click. The cursor mode list will appear. 2) Left-click 6. CNCL Data button. The numeric value will disappear. 5.2.4 Displaying Target ID No.(Target Number Display) A target ID number is a value displayed beside the acquisition symbol when a target is acquired. A target ID number 1 to 100 is assigned to each target in acquisition order. Once a target ID number is assigned, it identifies the target until the target is lost or the target acquisition is canceled. Procedures 1) Open the TT Menu by following menu operation. TT 2) Left-click the item button of 4. Target Number Display Target Number Display will appear. 3) Press the [numeric] key corresponding to the display method to be set. On Off
: Displays target ID numbers.
: Hides target ID numbers. Target Track
: Displays target ID number with target track. If there are many tracking targets and their symbol display is confusing, set Target Number Display to off to view the radar display easily. An ID number is always displayed for only targets with which numeric data is displayed. i 518 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5.2.5 Adding Tracked Target ID Name (Name) The system can enter a name for each of tracking targets that have been acquired. Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the tracked target, and right-click. The cursor mode list will appear. 2) Left-click 8. Property The Property will appear. 3) Left-click the item button of 1. Name
. The setting items for ship name (Name) will be displayed. 4) Select the input method. 5 Data Base
:Selection of one of previously input ship names.When this method is selected, a list of ship names that have been input by selecting will be displayed. Input Input
:Input of a new ship name. When this method is selected, the ship name (Name) input window will open. 5.2.5.1 Entering a new ship name (Input) 5) Input a new ship name. Up to 8 characters can be input as a ship name.For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character". The input name by selecting Input is saved in Data Base . 5.2.5.2 Selecting one of previously input ship names (Data Base) 5) Press the [numeric] key corresponding to the ship name to be selected. The selected ship name will be entered. Data Base can contain 30 ship names. i 519 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5.2.6 Reference Target (Reference) The system can display the own ship's speed. To do so, it sets a reference target by tracking a target for which ground fixed. Attention The reference target function is to be used if the own ship's speed cannot be displayed normally due to trouble such as a speed sensor malfunction. Do not use the reference target function except in emergencies. If the speed or course of the own ship is changed or a new reference target is set, the displayed speed may take 3 minutes or more to reach the specified speed after the speed / course change or the setting. Even after 3 minutes or more has passed, the speed may differ from the specified speed depending on the tracking condition. If a large radar echo such as a land target is set as a reference target, the vectors of the speed and other tracking targets will not be displayed correctly and may cause an accident. If a sailing ship is set as a reference target, the vectors of the speed and other tracking targets will not be displayed correctly and may cause an accident. If the cannot be turned on. If the reference target is lost or the target tracking function is
. stopped, the speed sensor is placed in manual mode is selected for the speed sensor, the AIS function MAN REF. The loss of a reference target may have a major impact on the accuracy of the results for true speed and true course of the target and that own speed will be degraded. The reference targets are only used for the calculation of true speed. Procedures 1) Tracking a target for which ground fixed. 2) Put the cursor on the tracked target, and right-click. The cursor mode list will appear. 520 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 3) Left-click 8. Property The Property will appear. 4) Left-click the item button of 3. Reference The reference target function will be set to on or off. On Off
:A reference target is set.
:The reference target is canceled. 5) Left-click the speed sensor switching button in the Own Ship Information located at the upper right of the display, and select REF. The speed of own ship calculated from the reference target will be displayed. When a reference target is set, the symbol display is changed to
. R Only one target can be set as a reference target.When a new reference target is set, the previously set reference target is canceled. 5.2.7 Operation Test (TT Test Menu) This function is provided to test if the target tracking function is operating normally. Thus, do not use the function except when you test the target tracking function. In particular, if the operation test mode is used during navigation, pseudo targets appear on the radar display and they are confused with actual targets. Do not use the mode during navigation. Otherwise, an accident may result. The following functions are available for testing the target tracking function:
Test Video Makes an operation check on the target detection circuit. TT Simulator Generates pseudo targets on the radar display in order to test if the target tracking function is operating normally. Status Displays the status of the target tracking function. Gate Display Displays the gate size for acquiring / tracking a target. 521 5 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5.2.7.1 Test Video (Test Video) Test Video is used to check whether the video signals under target acquisition and tracking are inputted to and processed in the target detection circuit normally. However, it is sufficient to check that VDH in Test Video is displayed. NOTE:
Test Video may not be displayed for a target which is not yet acquired or tracked. Test Video may not be displayed either if the [GAIN] dial or [SEA] dial is not properly adjusted. Procedures 1) Open the TT test menu by following menu operation. TT 9. TT Test Menu 2) Left-click the item button of 1. Test Video
. The setting items for Test Video will be displayed. 3) Select the test video to be displayed. In general, VDH is sufficient for target display checks in test video mode. i If any target displayed clearly in the radar display is not displayed in the Test Video mode, the target detection circuit of the Target Tracking unit may have a trouble. Cancel 1) Left-click the item button of 1. Test Video displayed. The setting items for Test Video will be displayed. while the TT Test Menu is 2) Left-click Off button. The test video display will be turned off. 522 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5.2.7.2 Target Tracking Simulator (Target Tracking Simulator) Pseudo targets can be generated in certain known positions to check whether the target tracking units are operating normally. Since the pseudo targets move depending on known parameters, the values for these pseudo targets can be compared with the known value if the pseudo targets are acquired and tracked, and displayed. Thus, it can be checked if the system is operating normally. Procedures 1) Press the [TX/STBY] key to stop the transmitting. The equipment will enter the transmission standby state. 2) Open the TT Test Menu by performing the following menu operation. TT 9. TT Test Menu 3) Left-click the item button of 2. TT Simulator
. The setting items for TT Simulator will be displayed. 4) Select the scenario to be set. 5) Press the [TX/STBY] key to transmit. The simulator will be activated and generate pseudo targets. The characters "X" at the bottom of the radar display blinks indicating that the simulation mode is active. Target tracking simulator / scenario Scenario Target start point Target end point Distance Bearing Distance Bearing Pseudo-target speed 1 3.2NM 2 6NM 3 6NM 4 6NM 5 6NM 6 6NM 20 0 1NM 0NM 90 0 18 every 1NM 18 every 45 45 45 1NM 6NM 6NM 45 150 150 20kn 10kn 10kn 105kn 20kn 20kn i When the simulator is operating, set 0 as the heading bearing, and 0 kn as the speed of own ship.When the range between own ship and the pseudo target is 0, the target will disappear. 523 5 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION Exit 1) Press the [TX/STBY] key to stop the transmitting. The equipment will enter the transmission standby state. 2) Left-click the item button of 2. TT Simulator while the TT Test Menu is displayed. The setting items for TT Simulator will be displayed. 3) Left-click Off
. The TT Simulator display will be turned off. 5.2.7.3 Status display (Status) The current Target Tracking status will appear. Procedures operation. 1) Open the TT Test Menu by performing the following menu TT 9. TT Test Menu 2) Left-click the item button of 3. Status
. The setting items for Status will be displayed.
*Constant
: Vector response
*VID Level TD
: Threshold value used for automatic acquisition
*VID Level HIGH
: Threshold value used for tracking
*VID Level LOW
: Unused
*Gate Size
: Size of gate used for tracking
*Tracking
: Number of targets currently acquired 524 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION 5.2.7.4 Gate Display The gate displays an area monitoring a target using the Target Tracking function. This radar equipment allows the gate size to change automatically according to target range and size. User can check the gate size using the following function. Procedures 1) Open the TT Test Menu by performing the following menu operation. TT 9. TT Test Menu 2) Left-click the item button of 4. Gate Display
. The gate display mode is switched. On Off
: Gate is displayed
: Gate is not displayed 5 3) Display the numeric value of a target according to Section 5.2.3
"Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA]" . The numeric value of the target will be displayed, and the tracked target symbol will be enclosed in a green gate. i The Target Tracking can display the gate of two targets simultaneously. Tracked Target symbol Vector Echo Gate (displayed in green ) 525 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION 5.3 AIS OPERATION 5.3.1 Restrictions The following restrictions are placed on use of the AIS function. The AIS function is unavailable in the following cases:
MAN or Setting) is set while REF. is selected for the speed sensor.The current offset (Set/Drift LOG or 2AXW is selected for the speed sensor. LOG or 2AXW cannot be selected for the speed sensor in the following case:
The AIS function is turned on and the current offset (Set/Drift Setting) is selected. MAN cannot be selected for the speed sensor in the following case:
The AIS function is On. Current offset (Set/Drift Setting) cannot be turned On in the following case:
LOG or 2AXW is selected for the speed sensor while the AIS function is on. 5.3.2 Setting AIS Display Function (AIS Function) Attention When the AIS function is set to Off, the AIS display function is turned off and AIS symbols are no longer displayed. Once the AIS display function is set to Off, it is not automatically switched to On even if a dangerous target exists. Procedures 1) Press the [AIS/TT] key. Alternatively, left-click the button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display. The received AIS information will be shown on the radar display. AIS 526 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION 5.3.3 Activate AIS Targets (Activate AIS) Activate an AIS target, and display the targets vector and make a collision decision. 5.3.3.1 Manual activation (ACT AIS) Activate an AIS target in manual mode to display the vector and heading line. Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the AIS symbol to be activated, and right-click. The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed. 2) Left-click 2. ACT AIS
. The selected AIS target will be activated. 5.3.3.2 Automatic activation Activate an AIS target in automatic mode to display the vector and heading line. 5 When the automatic activation function is used, AIS targets are automatically activated when they go into the automatic activation zone. The automatic activation zone is identical to the automatic acquisition zone (AZ) used for target tracking. For the zone setting, refer to Section 5.2.1 "Acquiring Target [ACQ]"
The position of the scanner shall be at the centre of the azimuth or range in the acquisition/
activation zone. If there are more AIS targets than the allowable maximum, they are deactivated in the low-
priority (See the Section 5.1.2 "Definitions of Symbols"). i If an AIS target is activated but the vector is not displayed, refer to Section 5.3.6 "Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display)". 5.3.4 Deactivate AIS Targets (Deactivate AIS) Deactivate an AIS target and clear the display of the vector and heading line. Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the AIS target to be deactivated, and right-click. The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed. 2) Left-click 5. DEACT AIS The selected AIS target will be deactivated. This operation is available only for an activated AIS target. i 527 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION 5.3.5 Displaying AIS Information [TGT DATA]
5.3.5.1 Types of information displayed There are two modes (simple and detail) to display AIS target information. The display items are determined by the selected mode. Display Item NAME (ship name) Call Sign MMSI COG (course over ground) or CTW (course through water) SOG (speed over ground) or STW (speed through water) CPA (closest point of approach) TCPA (time to CPA) BRG (true bearing) Range HDG (heading bearing) ROT (rate of turn) POSN (latitude / longitude) Destination (waypoint) NAV Status Detail mode Simple mode Up to 20 characters Up to 7 characters Up to 9 characters 0.1 unit 0.1kn unit 0.01NM unit 0.1min unit Not displayed 0.1 unit 0.01NM unit 0.1 unit 0.01 /min 0.001' unit Up to 20 characters Status (number) The detail mode displays the numeric data of only a single ship, the simple mode can display the numeric data of up to two ships. For NAV Status, one of the following statuses is displayed in accordance with Navigation Status:
No. Status 0 Under Way Using Engine 1 at Anchor 2 Not Under Command 3 Restricted Manoeuvrability 4 Constrained by Her Draft 5 Moored 6 Aground 7 Engaged in Fishing 8 Under Way Sailing 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11-14 Reserved 15 Not Defined 528 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION 5.3.5.2 Displaying AIS Target Information [TGT DATA]
Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the AIS target of which information is to be displayed , and press the [TGT DATA] key. The information of the selected AIS target will be displayed. i When the numeric data of a target is displayed but the mark is not on the radar display, the target is outside the AIS12 display. 5.3.5.3 Canceling AIS Target Information Display (CNCL Data) Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the activated AIS target of which information display is to be cancelled, and right-click. The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed. 2) Left-click 6. CNCL Data
. The information display of the selected AIS target will be cleared. 5.3.5.4 Selecting Detail / Simple Mode for AIS Target Information Display Procedures 1) Left-click the or button in the Digital Information located at the center right of the display. The detail or simple mode display for AIS target information will be selected. 5.3.5.5 Message Received AIS messages can be displayed. Up to 10 messages of addressed message and up to 10 messages of broadcast message can be displayed. If the number of messages exceeds 10, the oldest received messages are sequentially deleted.
[1] Displaying Message Selected from List (Message) Procedures operation. 1) Open the Message menu by performing the following menu 529 5 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION AIS 9. TT Test Menu 2) Left-click Addressed Message or Broadcast Message
. Addressed messages list or broadcast messages list are displayed. Each list shows ship names and message-received time. For an unread message,
is displayed to the left of the item number. 3) Left-click the item button to display the message. The message will appear.
[2] Displaying Specified Target's Message Procedures 1) Display AIS target information. If there are messages from the target, a message mark will be displayed in the Digital Information located at the center right of the display. 2) Left-click the unread message display button in the Digital Information located at the center right of the display. The message will appear.
[3] Deleting Message (Delete) Procedures 1) Left-click 1. Delete while the message is displayed. The Confirmation Window will appear. 2) Left-click 1. Yes to delete the message. The message will be deleted, and the ship name and message-received time will disappear from the list. 530 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION 5.3.5.6 Displaying Data of Lost AIS Target (Display Lost TGT Data) The data of the last-lost AIS target can be displayed. The data of only one target that has been lost most recently can be displayed. Procedures 1) Open the Display Lost Target Data menu by performing the following menu operation. AIS 8. Display Lost Target Data The data of the last-lost AIS target will be displayed. 5.3.5.7 Displaying Own Ship's AIS Data (Own Ship's AIS Data) The AIS data of own ship can be displayed. 5 Procedures 1) Open the Own Ship's AIS Data menu by performing the following menu operation. AIS 9. Own Ships AIS Data The own ship's AIS data will be displayed. 5.3.6 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display) When an AIS target is activated, a target ID number is displayed next to the AIS target symbol. A target ID number 1 to 100 is assigned to each target in activation order. Once a target ID number is assigned, it identifies the target until the target is lost or deactivated. Procedures 1) Open the Target Number Display menu by performing the following menu operation. AIS 4. AIS Filter Setting 531 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION 2) Left-click the item button corresponding to the display method to be set. On Off
: Displays target ID numbers.
: Hides target ID numbers. Target Track Ships Name
: Displays target ID number with AIS track.
: Displays the ship's name. If there are many tracking targets and their symbol display is confusing, set Target Number Display to off to view the radar display easily. i An ID number or ship's name is always displayed for only targets with which numeric value is displayed. 5.3.7 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting) 5.3.7.1 About an AIS filter By setting an AIS filter, an AIS target in the area can be displayed by priority or only the targets in the area can be displayed. An AIS filter is initially set in a circle having a radius of 20 [nm] from the CCRP. If 301 or more AIS targets exist in the filter range, they are displayed in the priority order explained in Section 5.1.2
"Definitions of Symbols". 5.3.7.2 Types of AIS Filters (Filter Type) There are the following 3 types of AIS filters:
Range Sector Zone
: A filter is set in a circle with a set range as the radius.
: A filter is set in a sector formed by two bearings with the bow as reference.
: A filter is set in a zone formed by two bearings and two ranges with the bow as reference. Procedures 1) Left-click the AIS filter mode switching in Target Information located at the upper right of the display, and select the filter to be set. The AIS filter will be selected. 532 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION 5.3.7.3 Creation of AIS Filter (Make AIS Filter) Procedures 1) Open the AIS Filter Setting menu by performing the following menu operation. 5 AIS 4. AIS Filter Setting 2) Left-click 2. Make AIS Filter
. The mode to make an AIS filter will be activated.
[1] Setting Range Filter 3) Set a filter range by turning the [VRM] dial, and left-click.
[2] Setting Sector Filter 3) Set a starting bearing by turning the [EBL] dial, and left-click. 4) Set an ending bearing by turning the [EBL] dial, and left-click.
[3] Setting Zone Filter 3) Set a starting bearing and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
[VRM] dial, and left-click. 4) Set an ending bearing and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
[VRM] dial, and left-click. i When the automatic activation function is enabled, the filter range is automatically changed for covering the automatic activation zone. Thus, the automatic activation zone is always within the filter range. 533 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION 5.3.7.4 AIS Filter Display On/Off (Filter Display) Procedures 1) Open the AIS Filter Setting menu by performing the following menu operation. AIS 4. AIS Filter Setting 2) Left-click the item button of 3. Filter Display
. Filter Display will be set to on or off. 5.3.7.5 Display of Targets outside AIS Filter (Filter Mode) Procedures operation. 1) Open the Filter Mode menu by performing the following menu AIS 4. AIS Filter Setting 2) Left-click the item button of 6. Filter Mode
. Display
: Displays only AIS targets in the AIS filter. Priority
: Displays AIS targets in the AIS filter by priority, and also displays targets outside the AIS filter. i Activated AIS targets can be displayed even when they are outside the AIS filter. 534 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION 5.3.7.6 Point Filter AIS targets which are not displayed because they are outside the AIS filter or at low priority levels can be activated by giving a higher priority to them. Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the position where a point filter is to be set, and right-click to select the filter to be set. The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed. 2) Left-click 2. ACT AIS
. A point filter will be set at the cursor position. If an AIS target is in the point filter, it will be activated. When an AIS target is activated or an AIS target is not found within one minute, the point filter will be cleared. The point filter's range is 1 nm, and cannot be changed. i 5 5.3.8 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost About a lost target When the data of an AIS target cannot be received for a specified time, the target is decided to be lost and the target data is deleted. As shown in the table below, the time until target data is deleted varies depending on the class of receive data and the target status. Deciding AIS Target to be Lost Target status Time until data deletion SOLAS ship (Class A) SOLAS ship (Class B) 18 min 18 min Vessel below 3 knots (Class A) or 2 knots
(Class B) and it is now at anchor or on the berth Vessel of 3 knots or more and it is now at anchor or on the berth Vessel of 0 to 14 knots (Class B: 0 to 14 knots) 60 sec 36 sec Vessel of 14 to 23 knots 30 sec Vessel of 23 knots or more 60 sec 18 min 180 sec 180 sec 180 sec i When a dangerous target ship is lost, a lost alarm is issued and the symbol changes to a lost symbol. The system calculates the current position from the last-received data and continues displaying the symbol for eternity. If the [ALARM ACK] key is pressed, the symbol is cleared. 535 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION 5.3.9 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm (AIS Alarm Setting) Conditions for issuing a Lost alarm and CPA/TCPA alarm for AIS targets can be set. 5.3.9.1 Setting of Condition for Lost Alarm Procedures 1) Open the AIS Alarm Setting menu by performing the following menu operation. AIS 6. AIS Alarm Setting 2) Left-click the item button of 1. Lost Alarm
. The setting items for Lost Alarm will be displayed. 3) Left-click the item button corresponding to the condition to be set. Off
: A lost alarm is not issued. Danger
: A lost alarm is issued only for AIS targets for which a dangerous target alarm has been issued. ACT&Danger
: A lost alarm is issued only for activated AIS targets and AIS targets for which a dangerous target alarm has been issued. A lost alarm is not issued for sleeping AIS targets. i 5.3.9.2 Setting of Condition for CPA/TCPA Alarm Procedures 1) Open the AIS Alarm Setting menu by performing the following menu operation. AIS 6. AIS Alarm Setting 2) Left-click the item button of CPA/TCPA Alarm
. The setting items for CPA/TCPA Alarm is switched. ACT ACT&Sleep
: A CPA/TCPA alarm is issued only for activated AIS targets.
: A CPA/TCPA alarm is issued for all AIS targets on the radar display. 536 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL
(Association) 5.4 5.4.1 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL (Association) Setting of Function to Decide Targets as Identical
(Association) When an AIS target and a tracking target are decided to be identical, an association symbol is displayed for the targets regarded as identical. In this case, the AIS target symbol is automatically activated. Attention Turn off Association in order not to make a decision on if targets are identical, or in order to display symbols that have disappeared. 5 Procedures 1) Left-click the Association in Target Information located at the upper right of the display. Association will be set to on or off. 5.4.2 Setting of Conditions for Deciding AIS and Tracked Targets as Identical (Association Setting) Procedures 1) Open the Association Setting menu by performing the following menu operation. AIS 1. Association Setting The Association Setting menu will appear. 2) Select and enter the item to be set. Conditions for deciding targets as identical will be set. When the differences of all item between AIS and tracked target are under the set conditions.. 537 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL
(Association) Once regard as identical, when one of the differences exceed 125% of the set condition, they are regarded as dissidence. i The setting for this function is common to Association Setting in the AIS Menu. 5.4.3 Types of Decision Conditions to be Set Decision conditions 1. Association 2. Priority 3. Bearing 4. Range 5. Cource 6. Speed 7.Applicable AIS Target On / Off (Function to decide targets as identical) AIS / TT (Symbol to be displayed) 0.0 9.9 0 999m 0 99 0 99kn ACT or ACT&Sleep (activated AIS target or all AIS target) If a great value is set as a condition for deciding targets as identical, a tracking target near an AIS target is regarded as identical to the AIS target and it may not be displayed any more. For example, when a pilot boat (which is a small target not being tracked) equipped with an AIS function approaches a cargo ship as a tracking target not equipped with an AIS function, the tracking target symbol of the cargo ship may not be displayed any more. 538 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY Alarm messages for Target Tracking (TT) and AIS functions:
Error message CPA/TCPA New Target Lost REF Target 95% Capacity MAX Target AIS 95% Capacity AIS MAX Target Description There is a dangerous target. A new target is acquired in the automatic acquisition zone. There is a lost target. The accuracy of the reference target may be decreased. The number of targets being tracked by the Target Tracking function has reached 95% of the maximum. The number of targets being tracked by the Target Tracking function has reached the maximum. The number of displayed AIS target symbols has reached 95%
of the maximum. The number of received data items exceeds the maximum number of AIS target symbols that can be displayed. AIS ACT 95% Capacity The number of activated AIS targets by the AIS function has AIS ACT MAX AIS Alarm ***
AIS Alarm 001 AIS Alarm 002 AIS Alarm 003 AIS Alarm 004 AIS Alarm 005 AIS Alarm 006 AIS Alarm 008 AIS Alarm 025 AIS Alarm 026 AIS Alarm 029 AIS Alarm 030 AIS Alarm 032 AIS Alarm 035 reached 95% of the maximum. The number of activated AIS targets by the AIS function has reached the maximum. Alarm information issued with the ALR sentence by the AIS.
*** is a 3-digit number which is Local Alarm No in the ALR sentence. Tx malfunction Antenna VSWR exceeds limit Rx channel 1 malfunction Rx channel 2 malfunction Rx channel 70 malfunction general failure MKD connection lost external EPFS lost no sensor position in use no valid SOG information no valid COG information Heading lost/invalid no valid ROT information Error message and alarm are displayed in the lower right of the display. 539 5 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY 5.5.1 CPA / TCPA Alarm Since these alarms may include some errors depending on the target tracking conditions, the navigation officer himself should make the final decision for ship operations such as collision avoidance. Making the final navigation decision based only on the alarm may cause accidents such as collisions. In the system, targets are categorized into two types: tracked / activate AIS targets and dangerous targets. The grade of danger can easily be recognized on the display at a glance. So the officer can easily decide which target he should pay attention to. It is not possible to switch off the tracked target visual alarm, unless tracking is ceased, or the alarm condition no longer applies. The types of target and alarm are shown below. CPA / TCPA Alarm Status Symbol display on A l a r m characters A l a r m sound Conditions Tracked target
(Off)
(Off) CPA>CPA LIMIT Activated AIS target Dangerous target 12 AIS12 12 Red blinking AIS12 Red blinking 0>TCPA TCPA>TCPA LIMIT The symbol when one of conditions is met. is displayed the above CPACPA LIMIT 0 TCPATCPA LIMIT An alarm is issued when all the conditions are met. The AIS targets that issues alarm refer to 5.3.9 CPA/TCPA Beep sound
(pee-poh) Alarm acknowle dgeable CPA Limit and TCPA Limit: The Setting Values 540 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY 5.5.2 Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone (New Target) In setting an automatic acquisition zone, it is necessary to adjust the gain, sea clutter suppression and rain / snow clutter suppression to ensure that target echoes are displayed in the optimum conditions. No automatic acquisition zone alarms will be issued for targets undetected The automatic acquisition function sets a zone in a range and issues an alarm when a new target (which is not yet acquired) goes into this zone. For the setting of an automatic acquisition zone, refer to " Acquiring Target " in Section 5.2.1.1 "Automatic acquisition". 5 Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone Status Symbol display New target in automatic acquisition zone 12 Red Blinking on A l a r m characters New Target Alarm sound Conditions Beep sound
(pipi-pipi) Alarm acknowledge able The alarm is issued when a new target is acquired the automatic acquisition zone. in i When an already acquired into automatic acquisition zone, the alarm message is not displayed and the buzzer does not sound either. target goes 5.5.3 Lost Target Alarm (Lost) Attention If the gain, sea clutter suppression, rain/snow clutter suppression are not adjusted adequately, the lost target alarm may be easily generated. So such adjustments should be mad carefully. 541 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY When it is impossible to continue tracking any acquired and tracked target, or the data of AIS target cannot received for a specified time, the will be generated. The typical causes for alarm generation are shown below, but not limited to the following:
Lost Alarm The target echo is very weak. The target is shadowed by a shore or a large ship and its echo is not received. The target echo is blurred by sea clutter returns. If a target under tracking goes out of a range of 32 nm and can no longer be tracked, it is canceled without a lost target alarm. Lost Target Alarm Status Lost Target Symbol on display Alarm characters Alarm sound Conditions Lost Beep sound
(pee) Alarm acknowledge able The alarm will sound lost once when a target symbol is displayed. 12 Red Blinking AIS12 Red Blinking 5.5.4 Gyro Set Alarm The GYRO I/F in this system receives signals from a gyro. Even if the power is turned off, the system will follow up the gyro. However, the system stops the follow-up operation when the power of the master gyro is turned off or when any trouble occurs to the line. When the power of the master gyro is recovered, the Set Gyro alarm will be generated. If this alarm occurs, set the gyro. Gyro Set Alarm A l a r m characters Set Gyro Alarm sound Conditions Beep sound (pipi-pipi) The signals from the gyro are stopped, but the gyro is recovered. 542 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION 5.6.1 Past Position (Past POSN) Procedures 1) Left-click the past position display interval unit switching button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display, and set a desired unit. The past position display interval unit will be set to or min NM
. 2) Left-click the past position display interval switching button in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display, and set a desired track display interval. The past position will be set. 5 Off
: Tracks are not displayed. Numeric : Tracks are displayed at intervals of a specified value. Past position true / relative Past position display interval Past position display interval unit The past position function can display up to ten past positions of a target under tracking. The past position display interval can be set to specified time intervals of 0.5, 1, 2, or 4 minutes, or specified range intervals of 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, or 1 nm. The specified interval is displayed in the past position display interval switching in Target Information located at the upper right of the display. When is displayed, the track display function is turned off. Off The track mode operates in conjunction with the vector mode, and a true or relative track is displayed. In relative vector mode, the relative tracks of the target are displayed. In true vector mode, true tracks that are calculated from the relative bearing, range, own ship's course, and speed are displayed. The target is acquisition, past position of traced target is start plot. The AIS target is displayed, past position of AIS target is start plot. If the past position plotted time is short, the indicated past position duration may not have achieved the specified time or range. 543 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION 5.6.2 Target Ship's Tracks (Target Track) This function makes settings for the tracks of tracked targets and AIS targets. The system can display the tracks of up to 20 target ships. 5.6.2.1 Track Color Setting (Target Track Color) Procedures 1) Put the cursor on the tracked target or activated AIS target, and right-click. The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed. 2) Left-click Property
. The Property will appear. 3) Left-click the item button of 2. Track Color
. The setting items for Track Color will be displayed. 4) Left-click the button corresponding to the track color to be set. Colors set by performing the procedure in Section 5.6.2.3 "Setting of Target Ship's Track Colors (Target Track Color)" can be selected. Individual colors can be set for up to 10 ships. The same color is set for 11 to 20 ships. 5.6.2.2 Target Ship's Track Function On/Off (Target Track Function) Procedures operation. 1) Open the T.TRK menu by performing the following menu TT 2. Target Track Setting 2) Left-click the item button of 1. Target Track Function
. The Target Track Function will be set to on or off. On Off
: Target Track Function is turned on.
: Target Track Function is turned off. i Note that when this function is turned off, all the other ship's track functions are turned off. In this case, the track data of other ships is not saved, so they cannot be traced later. 544 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION 5.6.2.3 Setting of Target Ship's Track Colors (Target Track Color) You can set either one track color for all targets under tracking, or individual colors for the ships of track numbers 1 to 10. The tracks of ships 11 to 20 are displayed in the same color. If the other ship's track function (Target Track Function) is turned off, the track data of other ships is not saved. i Procedures 1) Open the Target Track Color menu by performing the following menu operation. TT 2. Target Track Setting 2. Target Track Color 1. All The setting items for All will be displayed. 5 2) Left-click the button corresponding to the track display to be set. Individual
: Track color is set individually for ships. color name : One color is set for all ships. Individual setting 3) Left-click the button corresponding to the track number to be set. The setting items for the selected track number will be displayed. 4) Left-click the button corresponding to the track color to be set. The track color of the selected track number will be set. Individual When the individual setting for is selected, the track numbers Target Track No.1 to No.10 and Other are valid. Select a color for each target. The color list is displayed by left-clicking the button corresponding to the item number to be set. Select a desired color. There are 8 color choices:
, Off White
, Gray
, Blue
, Yellow
, Pink
, and Red
. Target Track No.1
: Setting for 1 to 10 ships
: Setting for 11 to 20 ships Green No.10 Other i Note that the individual setting is not enabled unless Individual is selected. 545 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION 5.6.2.4 Setting of Target Ship's Track Display (Target Track Display) The target track display function can be turned on / off. Choices for track display are displaying / hiding the tracks of all ships and Individual (displaying the tracks of individual ships). Procedures 1) Open the Target Track Display menu by performing the following menu operation. TT 2. Target Track Setting 3. Target Track Display 1. All The setting items for All will be displayed. 2) Left-click the button corresponding to the track display to be set. Individual
: Track display is set for individual ships. Off On
: The tracks of all ships are hidden.
: The tracks of all ships are displayed. i Even when Target Track Display is turned off, the track data of other ships is saved if Track Memory Interval is set. Individual setting 3) Left-click the button corresponding to the track number to be set. The selected track number display will be set to on or off. On Off
:The track number display is turned on.
:The track number display is turned off. Individual When the individual setting for is selected, the track numbers No.10 are valid. Select on / off for each target. Target Track No.1 Other to and Target Track No.1 No.10 Other
: Setting for 1 to 10 ships
: Setting for 11 to 20 ships i Note that the individual setting is not enabled unless Individual is selected. 546 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION 5.6.2.5 Setting of Target Ship's Track Saving Interval (Track Memory Interval) An interval for saving target ship's track data can be set. i This function is not available when the Target Track Function is turned off. Procedures 1) Open the Track Memory Interval menu by performing the following menu operation. TT 2. Target Track Setting 4. Track Memory Interval 5 2) Left-click the button corresponding to the interval to be set. Select an interval from the following:
Off/
3sec/5sec/10sec/30sec/
1min/3min/5min/10min/30min/60min/
1NM/3NM/5NM/10NM 5.6.2.6 Clear of Target Ship's Track (Clear Track) The target ship's track can be cleared by setting a color or a track number. i If Card T.TRK Display is used, target ship's tracks displayed through the card cannot be cleared.
[1] Clear of Tracks by Setting Color (Clear Track Color) Procedures 1) Open the Clear Track Color menu by performing the following menu operation. TT 2. Target Track Setting 5. Clear Track Color The setting items for Clear Track Color will be displayed. 547 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION 2) Left-click the button corresponding to the color of the target tracks to be cleared. The Confirmation Window will appear. 3) Left-click 1. Yes to clear the track line. All the tracks of the selected color will be cleared.
[2] Clear of Tracks by Setting Track Number (Clear Track Number) Procedures operation. 1) Open the T.TRK menu by performing the following menu TT 2. Target Track Setting 6. Clear Track Number The setting items for Clear Track Number will be displayed. 2) Left-click the button corresponding to the number of the tracks to be cleared. The Confirmation Window will appear. 3) Left-click 1. Yes to clear the track line. The tracks of the selected number will be cleared. 5.6.2.7 Operation of Target Ship's Track Data Saved on Card (File Operations) Target ship's track data can be saved on a flash memory card and read from the card. i Data can be saved to a flash memory card until the card becomes full, but the number of files that can be read and displayed is limited to 64 in alphanumeric order. When the number of files has reached 64, delete unnecessary files.
[1] Loading File (Load) Procedures 1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot Flash memory card (option) is necessary. 548 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION 2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation. TT 2. Target Track Setting 7. File Operations 3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot to select a card slot. The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slot1 and Slot2. 4) Left-click the item button of 2. Load Mode to select Add or Overwrite. The setting item for Load Mode is switched between Add and is selected, new data is added to the current data on the is selected, new data is saved over the current data Overwrite
. Add Overwrite When card. When on the card. 5 5) Left-click 3. Load
. Currently saved target ship's track data will be listed. 6) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be loaded. The Confirmation Window will appear. 7) Left-click 1. Yes to load the file. The selected target track data will be loaded and shown on the radar display.
[2] Saving File (Save) Procedures 1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot. Flash memory card (option) is necessary. 549 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION 2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation. TT 2. Target Track Setting 7. File Operations 3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot to select a card slot. The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slot1 and Slot2. 4) Left-click 4. Save
. The Input File Name menu will appear. 5) Input the file name to be saved. Up to ten characters can be input as a file name. For inputs to the characters input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character". After the input, the Confirmation Window will appear. 6) Left-click 1. Yes to save the file. The currently displayed target track data will be saved. 550 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
[3] Erasing File (Erase) Procedures 1) Insert the flash memory card into the card slot. Flash memory card (option) is necessary. 2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation. TT 2. Target Track Setting 7. File Operations 3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot to select a card slot. The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slot1 and Slot2. 5 4) Left-click 5. Erase
. The Erase menu will appear. Currently saved target ship's track data on the card will be listed. 5) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be erased. The Confirmation Window will appear. 6) Left-click 1. Yes to erase the file. The selected target track data will be erased and the file name will disappear from the list. 551 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
[4] Displaying File (Card Target Track Display) Procedures 1) Insert the flash memory card into the card slot. Flash memory card (option) is necessary. 2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following menu operation. TT 2. Target Track Setting 7. File Operations 3) Left-click the item button of 1. Select Card Slot to select a card slot. The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slot1 and Slot2. 4) Left-click 6. Card T.TRK Display
. The Card T.TRK Display menu will appear. Currently saved target ship's track data on the card will be listed. 5) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be displayed. The Confirmation Window will appear. 6) Left-click 1. Yes to display the T.TRK line. The selected file will be highlighted, and the currently saved target track data will be displayed. Cancel 1) Open the Card T.TRK Display window. The displayed file is highlighted. 2) Left-click the button corresponding to the displayed file. The file will be deselected and returned to normal display. 552 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING
(Trial Maneuver) Attention Trial maneuvering is to simulate own ships course and speed in the conditions that the course and speed of a target ship are unchanged as they are. As the situation is different from any actual ship maneuvering, set values with large margins to CPA Limit and TCPA Limit. The trial maneuvering is the function of simulating own ships course and speed for collision avoidance when a dangerous target appears. When the own ship's course and speed are entered in manual mode, the trial maneuvering function checks if pre-acquired or pre-activated targets are dangerous. The ranges of course and speed to be entered manually:
Course: 360 (in 0.1 intervals) ............................................... [EBL] dial Speed: 0 to 100kn (in 0.1kn step........................................ [VRM] dial 5 553 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) 5.7.1 Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode In the True Vector mode, calculations are performed according to the values set by Trial Speed, Trial Course and other features, and the result is displayed as a bold-line that represents the change of own ship's vector as shown in the Fig 5-7 below (an example of the course changed to the right). In this Fig 5-7, the dangerous target forward left becomes safe as a result of simulation. The tracked target information indicates the current CPA and TCPA values regardless of the result of simulation. NORMAL TRIAL HL HL Own ships vector Dangerous target Route T Change of symbol as a result of trial maneuver Fig 5-7: True Vector Mode 554 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) 5.7.2 Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode The result of Trial maneuvering in the Relative Vector mode is shown by a change in target vector. In the Fig 5-8 below (in the same conditions as in the True Vector mode in the previous page), it is seen that the acquired target is a dangerous one because its vector is crossing the CPA RING. NORMAL HL HL Dangerous target CPA Ring Change of symbol as a result of trial maneuver CPA Ring TRIAL T 5 Fig 5-8: Relative Vector Mode The above Fig 5-8 shows that the relative vector of the target has changed as shown in the figure as a result of simulation (course and speed), so that the symbol color is changed into White, a safe target. Irrespective of the simulation results, the current CPA and TCPA values are shown in the tracked target information just like when the true vector mode is active. The course change of own ship is displayed as a dotted-line. Better information is provided by using relative motion and sea stabilization. 555 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) 5.7.3 Operation of Trial Maneuvering Function Procedures operation. 1) Open the Trial Maneuver menu by performing the following menu TT 3. Trial Maneuver 2) Left-click the item button of 1. Trial Function
. The Trial Function will be set to on or off. On Off
: The trial maneuvering function is turned on.
: The trial maneuvering function is turned off. When Trial Function is set to on, the character " T " indicating trial maneuvering blinks in the own ship display field of the radar display. 3) Set values for Course by turning the [EBL] dial, and for Speed by turning the [VRM] dial. 4) Set other characteristics. Vector Time
: Vector time (1 to 60 min) Time to Maneuver
: Time until trial maneuvering is started (0 to 30 min) Own Ship Dynamic Trait
: Dynamic trait of the own ship Reach
: Range from when steered to when the ship beings to turn (0 to 2000 m) Turn Radius Acceleration Decceleration
: Turning radius (0.10 to 2.00 nm)
: Acceleration (0.0 to 100 knots/min)
: Deceleration (0.0 to 100 knots/min) For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.2 "Directly entering a numeric value". Dangerous target symbols are displayed in red and safe target symbols in white. Vector Time is valid only when Trial Function is set to on. If it is off, the vector time before trial maneuvering is displayed. i Time until the start of trial maneuvering is counted down immediately after the input. The acceleration and deceleration are influenced depending on the relationship between the current speed and the input speed for trial maneuvering. If 0.0 kn/min is set for Acceleration when the speed for trial maneuvering is faster than the current speed, or for Deceleration when the speed for trial maneuvering is slower than the current speed, the system performs simulation on the assumption that the speed is changed immediately after the time set for Time to Maneuver . 556 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) Cancel 1) Open the Trial Maneuver menu by performing the following menu operation. TT 3. Trial Maneuver 2) Left-click the item button of 1. Trial Function
. The Trial Function will be set to on or off. Off The Trial Function will be set to off. 5 557 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) 558 SECTION 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON ...................................................6-1 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET ...........................6-3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER ..............................6-5 FALSE ECHOES ....................................................................................6-9 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART) ................................6-12 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON The radar operator has a role of interpreting the radar displays to provide his best aid in maneuvering the ship. For this purpose, the operator has to observe the radar displays after fully understanding the advantages and disadvantages that the radar has. For better interpretation of radar display, it is important to gain more experiences by operating the radar equipment in fair weathers and comparing the target ships watched with the naked eyes and their echoes on the radar display. The radar is mainly used to monitor the courses of own ship and other ships in open seas, to check buoys and other nautical marks when entering a port, to measure own ships position in the coastal waters relative to the bearings and ranges of the shore or islands using a chart, and to monitor the position and movement of a heavy rain if it appears on the radar display. Various types of radar display will be explained below. 6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON Radar beam radiation has the nature of propagating nearly along the curved surface of the earth. The propagation varies with the property of the air layer through which the radar beam propagates. In the normal propagation, the distance
(D) of the radar wave to the horizon is approximately 10% longer than the distance to the optical horizon. The distance (D) is given by the following formula:
6 D 2.23 h1
[NM]
) h2
: Height (m) of radar scanner above sea level
: Height (m) of a target above sea level h1 h2 Fig 6-2 is a diagram for determining the maximum detection range of a target that is limited by the curve of the earth surface in the normal propagation. D Earth h1 Radar h2 Targets Fig 6-1: RADAR wave with the horizon 61 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON D[NM]
Height of RADAR Scanner Detective Range Height of Target Fig 6-2: Maximum detection range of a target When the height of own ships scanner is 10 m for instance, A target that can be detected at the radar range of 64 nm on the radar display is required to have a height of 660 m or more. If the height of a target is 10 m, the radar range has to be approx. 15 nm. However, the maximum radar range at which a target can be detected on the radar display depends upon the size of the target and the weather conditions, that is, the radar range may increase or decrease depending upon those conditions. i. ii. 62 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET 6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET The signal intensity reflected from a target depends not only on the height and size of the target but also on its material and shape. The echo intensity from a higher and larger target is not always higher in general. In particular, the echo from a coast line is affected by the geographic conditions of the coast. If the coast has a very gentle slop, the echo from a mountain of the inland appears on the radar display.(Fig 6-3) Therefore, the distance to the coast line should be measured carefully. Mountain displayed on the radar display HL 6 Sea shore line not displayed Fig 6-3: Sea shore line which is not displayed Table 6-1 shows the graph indicating the relation between the target detection distance and the radar reflection cross-sectional area (RCS) with regard to the type and the height of the target in a situation in which the weather is good, the sea state is calm and the radio wave propagation is normal. As revealed by this table, even on the same sea shore line, detection distance greatly differs depending on the height of the target from the surface of the sea. Furthermore, because the target detection distance is greatly influenced by the shape and material of the target and environmental conditions, such as the sea state, weather, and radio wave propagation, caution should be taken when detecting distance of target. 63 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET Table 6-1 Relation between type and height of target and detection distance and RCS Type of target Sea shore line Sea shore line Sea shore line SOLAS target ship (>5000GT) SOLAS target ship (>500GT) Small boat with IMO standard compatible radar reflector Marine buoy with corner reflector Standard marine buoy 10-meter small boat without radar reflector Waterway location beacon Height from sea surface
(m) Detection distance
(NM) RCS m2[
X band S band X band S band 60 6 3 10 5 4 3,5 3,5 2 1 20 8 6 11 8 5.0 4.9 4.6 3.4 2.0 20 8 6 11 8 3.7 3.6 3.0 3.0 1.0 50,000 50,000 5000 2500 5000 2500 50,000 30,000 1800 7,5 1000 0,5 10 5 2,5 1 1 0,5 1,4 0,1 i Detection distance shown in the above table may greatly decrease depending on the shape of the target, sea state, weather and radio wave propagation conditions. 64 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER In addition to the echo required for observing ships and land, radar video image also includes unnecessary echo, such as reflection from waves on the sea surface and reflection from rain and snow. Reflection from the sea surface is called "sea clutter," and reflection from rain and snow is called "rain and snow clutter," and those spurious waves must be eliminated by the clutter rejection function. a. Sea clutter Sea clutter appears as an image radiating outwardly from the center of the radar display and changing depending on the size and the shape of waves. Generally, as waves become larger, image level of the sea clutter is intensified and the clutter far away is also displayed. When waves are large and the sea clutter level is high, it is difficult to distinguish sea clutter from a small boat whose reflection intensity is weak. Accordingly, it is necessary to properly adjust the sea clutter rejection function. Table 6-2 shows the relation between the sea state (SS) showing the size of waves generated by wind and the radar's detection probability. 6 Table 6-2 Sea state and probability of target detection S band radar (probability to detect a target at a distance of 0.4 NM) RCS SS1 2 0.1m2 Vi 0.5 m2 V 1 m2 V SS2 3 V-Mii V V SS3 4 M-NViii V-M V SS4 5 M-NV V-M X band radar (probability to detect a target at a distance of 0.7 NM) RCS SS1 2 1m2 V-M SS2 3 M-NV SS3 4 SS4 5 5 m2 V 10 m2 V V-M V M-NV V V-M i. V: Detection probability of 80 %
ii. M: Detection probability of 50 %
iii. NV: Detection probability of less than 50 %
65 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER As shown in Table 6-2, the number of SS increases as the wind speed becomes high and the waves become large. Table 6.2 reveals that detection probability decreases from V (80 %) to NV (less than 50 %) as the number of SS increases. Therefore, even if the sea state is calm and a target clearly appears on the radar display, when the sea state becomes rough, target detection probability decreases resulting in difficulty of target detection by the radar. Table 6-3 Relation between Douglas sea state and average wind speed and significant wave height Sea state Average speed (kn) wind 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
<4 5-7 7-11 12-16 17-19 20-25 26-33 Significant wave height (m)i
<0,2 0,6 0,9 1,2 2,0 3,0 4,0 i. Significant wave height: an average of top N/3 higher waves when the number of waves detected within a constant time duration is N For example, in the case of a standard marine buoy, RCS of X band radar is 5 m2 as shown in Table 6-1. When observing such a target in the sea state (SS3) in which significant wave height exceeds 1.2 meters, detection probability is M-NV, as shown in Table 6-2, which indicates 50 % or less. b. Rain and snow clutter Rain and snow clutter is a video image that appears in a location where rain or snow is falling. The image changes according to the amount of rain (or the amount of snowfall). As precipitation increases, the image of rain and snow clutter becomes intensified on the radar display, and in the case of localized heavy rain, an image similar to the image indicating land is displayed in some cases. Furthermore, because radio waves tend to attenuate due to rain and snow, the ability to detect a target in the rain and snow clutter or a target beyond the rain and snow clutter may decrease. The amount of attenuation depends on the transmission frequency, antenna beam width, and the pulse length. Fig 6-4 and Fig 6-5 show examples in which detection distance is reduced due to the influence of precipitation. Because of this, a target, which clearly appeared up to 10 NM by an X band radar (pulse width of 0.8s) when it was not raining, may become dimly visible up to 5 NM when the amount of rain becomes 4 millimeters per hour. Furthermore, when comparing the X band radar with the S band radar, target detection distance decreases less when an S band radar is used, which means it is influenced less by precipitation. 66 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER
i i l i M N
g n n a r s i t i e h w e c n a t s i d
(NM) n o i t c e t e D 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 16mm/hr 0.05us Precipitation of 16 mm/hr Pulse width 0.05us 4mm/hr 0.05us Precipitation of 4 mm /hr Pulse width 0.05us 16mm/hr 0.8us Precipitation of 16 mm/hr Pulse width 0.8us 4mm/hr 0.8us Precipitation of 4 mm /hr Pulse width 0.8us 0 2 6 4 Detection distance while it is not rainning[NM]
(NM) 10 12 8 14 16 6 Fig 6-4: Decreased target detection distance by S band radar due to precipitation
i i l i M N
g n n a r s i t i e h w e c n a t s i d
(NM) n o i t c e t e D 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 16mm/hr 0.05us Precipitation of 16 mm /hr Pulse width 0.05us 4mm/hr 0.05us Precipitation of 4 mm /hr Pulse width 0.05us 16mm/hr 0.8us Precipitation of 16 mm /hr Pulse width 0.8us 4mm/hr 0.8us Precipitation of 4 mm /hr Pulse width 0.8us 2 6 4 Detection distance while it is not rainning[NM]
(NM) 12 10 8 14 16 Fig 6-5: Decreased target detection distance by X band radar due to precipitation 67 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER c. Coping with sea clutter and rain and snow clutter When the weather is bad and the ocean is rough, the use of an S band radar is effective because the radar is not influenced by sea clutter so much and attenuation due to rain drops is small. When an X band radar is used, reducing the pulse width will reduce the influence by spurious waves, and also the spurious wave rejection function effectively works; therefore, the use of short pulse is effective when the weather is bad. By using image processing functions PROCl 1 to 3, it is expected that spurious waves are further suppressed. Since optimal settings for those items can be automatically made by using the function mode, it is recommended that STORM or RAIN be used by selecting the function mode when the weather is bad. For details of the function mode, see Section 3.9 "USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]". However, these functions may make some targets invisible, particularly targets with higher speeds. 68 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES 6.4 FALSE ECHOES The radar observer may be embarrassed with some echoes that do not exist actually. These false echoes appear by the following causes that are well known:
a. Shadow When the radar scanner is installed near a funnel or mast, the echo of a target that exists in the direction of the funnel or mast cannot appear on the radar display because the radar beam is reflected on the funnel or mast. Whether there are some false echoes due to shadows can be checked monitoring the sea clutter returns, in which there may be a part of weak or no returns. Such shadows appear always in the same directions, which the operator should have in mind in radar operation. b. Side Lobe Effect A broken-line circular arc may appear at the same range as the main lobe of the radar beam on the radar display. This type of false echo can easily be discriminated when a target echo appears isolated. (see Fig 6-6) 6 HL Fig 6-6: False echo 69 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES c. False Echo by Secondary Reflection When a target exists near own ship, two echoes from the single target may appear on the radar display. One of those echoes is the direct echo return from the target and the other is the secondary reflection return from a mast or funnel that stands in the same direction as shown in Fig 6-7. Direct microwave HL Actual target Radar scanner Funnel Secondary reflection of microwave False echo from funnel Fig 6-7: False echo by secondary reflection d. False Echo by Multiple Reflection When there is a large structure or ship with a high vertical surface near own ship as shown in Fig 6-8, multiple refection returns may appear on the radar display. These echoes appear in the same intervals, of which the nearest echo is the true echo of the target. HL Fig 6-8: False echo by mutiple reflection e. Second Time Echoes The maximum radar detection range depends upon the height of the scanner and the height of a target as described in the Section 6.1 "RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON". If a so-called duct occurs on the sea surface due to a certain weather condition, however, the radar beam may propagate to a abnormally long distance, at which a target may be detected by the radar. 610 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES For instance, assuming that the pulse length is MP3 (on the repetition frequency of 1400 Hz), the first pulse is reflected from a target at about 58 NM or more and received during the next pulse repetition time. In this case, a false echo (second time echo) appears at a position that is about 58 NM shorter than the actual distance. If the false echo appears at 5 NM on the radar display, the true distance of the target is 5+58=63 NM. On the pulse length is SP1 (on the repetition frequency of 2250 Hz), a false echo may appear at a position that is about 36 NM shorter than the actual distance. This type of false echo can be discriminated by changing over the range scale (the repetition frequency), because the distance of the target changes accordingly. If second time echo is appeared, the use of Economy mode in PRF menu is effective. Otherwise, Stagger Trigger menu set to on. (See Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)"). f. Radar Interference When another radar equipment using the same frequency band as that on own ship is near own ship, a radar interference pattern may appear on the radar display. This interference pattern consists of a number of spots which appear in various forms. In many cases, these spots do not always appear at the same places, so that they can be discriminated from the target echoes. (See Fig 6-9) HL HL 6 Fig 6-9: Radar interference If radar equipment causing an interference pattern and this radar are of the same model, their transmitting repetition frequency is nearly the same. As a result, interference patterns may be displayed concentrically. In this case, the interference patterns cannot be eliminated by using only the interference reflector function, so ine-tune the transmitting repetition frequency.(
See Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)") An interference suppressing effect can be heightened by applying a different transmitting repetition frequency to the interference pattern source radar and this radar. 611 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.5 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART) 6.5 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART) The SART (Search and rescue Radar Transponder) is a survival device authorized by the GMDSS (Global Maritime Distress and Safety System), which is used for locating survivors in case that a distress accident occurs at sea. The SART is designed to operate in the 9 GHz frequency band. When receiving the 9 GHz radar signal (interrogating signal) transmitted from the radar equipment on a rescue ship or search aircraft, the SART transmit a series of response signals to inform the distress position to the rescue and search party. i This radar provides a shortcut item to make settings for SART signal reception. Execution of this item automatically switches to the setting for SART reception.It also functions for detect the beacon or target enhancer. Procedures or 12 NM. 1) Press [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key to set the radar range to 6 NM 2) Set the SART display mode according to the procedures below. Main 3. RADAR Menu 1. Process Setting 9. SART On Off SART ON SART OFF With the SART display mode set to ON, settings as shown below are made automatically. Sea clutter control
: Minimum (Most counterclockwise) AUTO SEA function : OFF Rain and Snow Clutter Control (RAIN) : Minimum Auto Rain and Snow Clutter function
(AUTO RAIN) TUNE control
: OFF
: No tuning (to weaken clutter echoes) Interference rejection (IR) : OFF PROCESS : OFF 612 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.5 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART)
[Example of Display Land Other Ships SART code Position of SART 6 Attention When the SART function is set to ON, small targets around own ship will disappear from the radar display. So it is necessary to exercise full surveillance over the conditions around own ship by visual watch in order to avoid any collision or stranding. If two or more sets of radar equipment are installed on own ship, use one set of 9 GHz band radar for detection of the SART signal and operate others as normal radars for avoiding collision, monitoring targets around own ship, and checking on own ship s position and avoidance of stranding. After end of detecting the START signal, turn the START display off. Then the radar returns normally to the nautical mode. 613 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.5 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART) 614 SECTION 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION 7.1 7.2 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION .............................................................7-1 How to Open the Serviceman MenuService Man Menu .........7-1 GYRO I/F Setting .............................................................................7-2 Tuning (Tune Adjustment) .............................................................7-5 Bearing Adjustment ........................................................................7-7 Range Adjustment ...........................................................................7-7 Navigator Setting (Device) .............................................................7-8 Setting of True Bearing Value ........................................................7-9 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Height) .....................................7-9 Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting) ..................................................7-10 SETTINGS ............................................................................................7-12 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting) .......................7-12 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank) ............................................7-16 TNI Blank Setting (TNI Blank) ......................................................7-17 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scanner Unit (Output Pulse) ...7-18 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave) ..............................................7-19 Language Setting (Language) ......................................................7-20 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.1.6 7.1.7 7.1.8 7.1.9 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.6 7.3 7.4 7.2.7 7.2.8 7.2.9 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 7.4.5 Date Time Setting ..........................................................................7-20 Input Installation Information .......................................................7-21 Setting the Alarm System .............................................................7-22 ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................7-26 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level) ........................................7-26 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function (TT) ............................7-27 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment (MBS) .....................7-29 Adjustment of Performance Monitor ...........................................7-31 MAINTENANCE MENU ........................................................................7-33 Antenna Safety Switch (Safety Switch) .......................................7-33 Initialization of Memory Area(Area Initial) ...................................7-34 Save of Internal Memory Data (Card1/2) .....................................7-35 Restoration of Scanner Unit Operation Time (TXRX Time) ......7-36 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update) .............7-38 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be performed by service engineers during system installation. The bearing adjustment value is saved to non-volatile memory in the scanner. Other settings are saviedto non-volatile memory in the radar process unit. Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized service persons. If wrong setting is carried out, this may cause unstable operation. Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation. Otherwise, the radar performance may be affected, resulting in an accident or trouble. 7.1.1 How to Open the Serviceman MenuService Man Menu Procedures Main 1) Hold down the button at the lower right of the display together with the left key. The Code Input menu will appear. 7 2) Left-click the 0 button. 3) Left-click the ENT button. The Serviceman Menu will appear. Fig 7-1: Code Input 71 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 7.1.2 GYRO I/F Setting a. Gyro Settings (STEP or SYNC) The GYRO I/F circuit of the system is designed to be compatible with most types of gyro compasses by simply setting the switches. Step motor type: DC24V to DC100V Synchro-motor type: Primary excitation voltage 50 to 115 VAC Before power-on operation can be performed, the switches S1, S2, S5, S6, S7 and jumper TB105 on the gyro interface circuit (PC4201) must be set in accordance with the type of your gyro compass by performing the procedure below. The switches are factory-set for a gyration ratio of 180X and the step motor type. Make sure of the type of the gyro compass installed on the own ship before starting the procedure below. Procedures 1) Set S5 to "OFF". The gyro compass and GYRO I/F are breaked off. 2) Set S6 and S7 in accordance with the type of your gyro compass. There are two types of gyro compasses: one type outputs a step signal, and the other type outputs a synchro signal. Make sure of the type of the gyro compass installed on the own ship before setting the switches S6 and S7. Synchro signal: Set the switches to [SYNC]. Step signal: Set the switches to [STEP]. 3) Set the DIP switch S1 in accordance with the type of the compass. The items to be set are listed below. For the settings, refer to Table 7-1 Gyro and Log Select Switches (S1 DIP Switch). S1-1: Type of gyro signal (step/synchro) S1-2/3: Gyration ratio of gyro compass S1-4: Gyration direction of gyro compass S1-5: Type of log signal (pulse/synchro) S1-7/8: Ratio of log signal 72 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 4) Set the DIP switch S2. The items to be set are listed below. For the setting, refer to Table 7-2 Gyro and Log Select Switches (S2 DIP Switch). ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 5) Confirm the settings of the DIP switch S10. The DIP switch must be set as shown below. Do not change any of the settings. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 6) Set the jumper TB105. The TB105 is set for using a low-voltage step signal. 1-2 connected: Setting for normal use 2-3 connected: Setting for a step signal of 22 V or less 7) Connect the gyro signal and log signal cables to the terminal block. 8) Set S5 to "ON". The gyro compass and GYRO I/F are connected. 9) After power-on operation, make sure of the radar video and the operation with the true bearing value. See the Section 7.1.7 "Setting of True Bearing Value". 10) If the true bearing value of the radar equipment is reversed, change the setting of the switch S1-4. 73 7 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION Table 7-1 Gyro and Log Select Switches (S1 DIP Switch) 7 2 3 4 5 6 8 1 ON OFF STEP SYNC 360X 180X 90X 36X DIRECTION TYPE P U L S E /
NM I G S O R Y G I G S G O L OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON REV NOR ON OFF SYNC PULSE Don't care 100P 30X 200P 90X 400P 180X 800P 360X ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF Table 7-2 Gyro and Log Select Switches (S2 DIP Switch) S2 SETTING TABLE LOG ALARM 1 ON OFF 2 3 4 6 7 8 5 I G N T T E S R E H T O GYRO SIMULATOR LOG SIMULATOR ON OFF N.A. GYRO ALARM TIME Don't care ON OFF any 5s 0.2s ON OFF HEADING SENSOR SOURCE NMEA BAUDRATE SETTING NMEA(HDT/THS) GYRO SIGNAL ON OFF 4800 9600 19200 38400 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 74 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 7.1.3 Tuning (Tune Adjustment) Adjust the tuning control for the transmitter and receiver. The turning control should be adjusted when the system is installed or when the magnetron is replaced. Procedures 1) Set a range of 48 NM or more. 2) Open the Serviceman Menu. 3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Tune Adjustment menu. 1. Adjust Menu 1. Tune Adjustment 4) Adjust the tune adjustment value so that the tune indicator bar at the upper left of the display is maximized. For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a numeric value". 5) Move the cursor onto the ENT button, and left-click . 7 7.1.3.1 Tune Indicator Adjustment) Set the scale mark when the tune indicator bar reaches the maximum point. Procedures 1) Set a range of 48 NM or more. 2) Open the Serviceman Menu. 3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Tune Indicator Adjust menu. 1. Adjust Menu 4. TXRX Adjustment 3. Tune Indicator Adjust 75 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 4) Adjust the tune indicator adjustment value by operating the
button so that the tune indicator bar at the upper left of the display reaches a point of 80 to 90% of the maximum. For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a numeric value". 5) Move the cursor onto the ENT button, and left-click . i With the NKE-2103 SCANNER UNIT:
For this model, perform Tune Peak Adjustment explained below. After the above adjustment procedure, perform the adjustment procedures below. 7.1.3.2 Tune Peak Adjustment Adjust the tune indicator and echo peak. Procedures 1) Set a range of 48 NM or more. 2) Open the Serviceman Menu. 3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Tune Peak Adjustment menu. 1. Adjust Menu 4. TXRX Adjustment 2. Tune Peak Adjustment 4) Adjust the tune peak adjustment value by operating the
button so that the tune indicator bar at the upper left of the display is maximized. For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a numeric value". 5) Move the cursor onto the ENT button, and left-click. 76 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 7.1.4 Bearing Adjustment Make adjustment so that the bearing of the target measured with the ships compass matches the bearing of the target echo on the radar display. Procedures 1) Select H Up
(PROC) to for the bearing presentation. Set video processing PROC Off
. 2) Measure the bearing of an adequate target (e.g., a ship at anchor, a breakwater, or a buoy) relative to own ship's heading. 3) Open the Serviceman Menu. 4) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Bearing Adjustment menu. 1. Adjust Menu 2. Bearing Adjustment For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a numeric value". Make adjustment by the 0.1. 5) Adjust the bearing adjustment value by operating the
button so that the target measured in step 2) is adjusted to the correct bearing. 7 6) Left-click the ENT button to determine the value. 7.1.5 Range Adjustment Make adjustment so that the range of a target on the radar display is shown correctly. Procedures known. 1) Search the radar display for a target of which range is already 2) Open the Serviceman Menu. 77 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Range Adjustment menu. 1. Adjust Menu 3. Range Adjustment For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a numeric value". 4) Adjust the range adjustment value by operating the
button so that the target measured in step 1) falls in the correct range. 5) Left-click the ENT button to determine the value. 7.1.6 Navigator Setting (Device) Determine whether to connect navigators to the radar equipment. Only the navigators set to ON here can be used. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Device Installation menu. 1. Adjust Menu 9. Next 3. Device Installation 3) Select On for navigators connected to the radar equipment, and Off for navigators not connected. Gyro Gyro (via GYRO I/F) Compass Compass (Compliant with IEC61162) GPS Compass GPS Compass (JRC) LOG Log (via GYRO I/F) 2AXW 2-axis log (Speed over water: Compliant with IEC61162) 2AXG 2-axis log (Speed over ground: Compliant with IEC61162) GPS GPS (Compliant with IEC61162) 78 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 7.1.7 Setting of True Bearing Value If GYRO I/F is used to input a gyro signal, the true bearing value indicated by the master gyro does not match the value indicated by the radar equipment only in a rare case. In this case, perform the following procedure to adjust the true bearing value of the radar equipment to the value of the master gyro. Procedures 1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the true bearing value setting menu. Main 6. NAV Equipment Setting 1. Gyro Setting 2) Input the master gyro value to the value input screen. For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a numeric value". 7.1.8 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Height) Set the height of radar antenna above sea level. Do not change this setting carelessly. 7 Procedures 1) Measure the height of radar antenna above sea level in advance. 2) Open the Serviceman Menu. 3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Antenna Height setting menu. 1. Adjust Menu 4. TXRX Adjustment 1. Antenna Height The Antenna Height menu will open. 4) Select the setting that matches the antenna height measured in step 1). 79 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION 7.1.9 Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting) Set the own ship's CCRP location, radar antenna installation location, and GPS installation location. CCRP Up to four locations can be input. (One location selected when used) Radar antenna: Up to eight radar antennas can be input. (Automatically selected in response to ISW operation) GPS Up to four locations can be input. (One location selected when used) Procedures 1) Measure the CCRP location, radar antenna location, and GPS antenna location in advance. 2) Open the Serviceman Menu. 3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the CCRP Setting menu. 2. Installation Menu 4. CCRP Setting 4) Specify the ship length for Length at the upper right of the CCRP Setting Menu, and the ship width for Beam. 5) Move the cursor onto the input the CCRP1 location. CCRP1 X, Y value, and left-click to When X > 0, the CCRP is on the starboard side of the ship. When X < 0, it is on the port side. 6) To input the second CCRP, click the CCRP2 button to display the CCRP2 X,Y value, and input the value in the same manner for step 5). Similarly, input the third and subsequent CCRPs. 7) Repeat the above steps to input the GPS location(s) and radar antenna location(s). 8) If multiple CCRP locations and GPS locations are input, select the CCRP location and GPS location to be used by pressing the buttons at the upper left of the menu. 9) Click the 0.Exit to close the CCRP Setting menu. 710 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION Example:
5m 250 m 30m 15m RADAR Antenna2 X 5m, Y 250m GPS1 X -10m, Y 30m Length 300m CCRP1 X 0m, Y 25m 25m 10m Beam 30m RADAR Antenna1 X 0m, Y 15m 7 711 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 7.2 SETTINGS This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be performed by service engineers during system installation. Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized service persons. If wrong setting is carried out, this may cause unstable operation. Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation. Otherwise, the radar performance may be affected, resulting in an accident or trouble. 7.2.1 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting) External sensor signals are input to the radar equipment through a communication port. The radar equipment has ten communication ports. For signals to be input from sensors or to be output to the sensors, communication ports need to be set in accordance with the sensors. 7.2.1.1 Baud Rate Setting (Baud Rate) Set the baud rate of the signal to be input to the COM port. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Baud Rate setting menu. 2. Installation Menu 5. COM Port Setting 1. Baud Rate 712 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 3) Set the baud rate of the port to be set. 4800(NMEA)/9600(NSK)/38400(fast NMEA)b bps 1. COMPASSa 2. MAINTENANCE/LOG 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps 3. NAV1 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps 4. NAV2 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps 5. ALARM 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps 6. JARPAc 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps 7. AIS 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps 8. ARPAd 1200/4800/9600/38400/115200 bps 9. COM a. The compass port is a receive-only port that is dedicated to COMPASS signals. b. The bold values are factory-set. c. The JARPA port is a transmit-only port that is dedicated to JRC ARPA signals. d. The ARPA port is a transmit-only port. 7.2.1.2 Reception Port Setting(RX Port) Set the numbers of ports for receiving signals from sensors. There are two methods for receiving signals: specifying a port for each sensor, or using the automatic recognition function without specifying ports. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the RX Port 7 setting menu. 2. Installation Menu 5. COM Port Setting 2. RX Port 3) Set a port for each sensor. Settable sensor signals GPSDLOGAlarmDepthTemperatureWindCurrent ROTRSA Selectable ports When the automatic recognition function is used:
AUTO When ports are specified: L O G N AV 1 N AV 2 ALARMARPACOM 713 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 7.2.1.3 Reception Sentence Setting (RX Sentence) Set signal sentences to be received from sensors. The system is factory-set for using all sentences. To receive only specified sentences, select for sentences which are not necessary. No Use Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the RX Sentence setting menu. 2. Installation Menu 5. COM Port Setting 3. RX Sentence 3) Select the sentences to be used by the sensors to be set. Selection value:
Use or No Use can be set for each sentence. 1. GPS(LL/COG/SOG) GGA/RMC/RMA/GNS/GLL/VTG 2. GPS(WPT/Time) GGA/RMC/RMB/BWC/BWR/ZDA 3. Depth 4. Wind 5. Current DPT/DBK/DBT/DBS MWV/MWD Data Set Number 0-9. Set the number of the sentence to be used by Data Set Number. (Initial value 0) Layer A Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer A by Layer Number. (Initial value 3) Layer B Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer B by Layer Number. (Initial value 4) Layer C Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer C by Layer Number. (Initial value 5) 714 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 7.2.1.4 Transmission Port Setting (TX Port) For each sentence, set a communication port through which signals are transmitted to sensors. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the TX Port setting menu 2. Installation Menu 5. COM Port Setting 4. TX Port 3) Select the communication port through which the sentence to be set is output. Settable sentences TTM(TT)TLL(TT)TTD(TT)TLB(TT)OSDRSDALR ACKTTM(AIS)TLL(AIS)TTD(AIS)TLB(AIS) RemoteMaintenanceJRC-ARPAAPBBODGGAGLL RMCRMBVTGXTEBWCHDTTHS Selectable ports MAINTENANCENAV1NAV2ALARMJARPAARPA COM 4) Select the output format, talker, and transmission interval. Signals for which the above items can be set:
7 Item NMEA0183 Output Format NMEA0183 Talkerb NMEA0183 TX Interval Name APB, BOD, GGA, GLL, RMC, RMB, VTG, XTE,BWC, HDT APB, BOD,RMB, XTE, BWC, HDT, THS APB, BOD, GGA, GLL, RMC, RMB, VTG, XTE, BWC, HDT, THS Option V1.5 V2.0 V2.3a STANDARDThe talker is RA . GPThe talker is GP. Set an interval in the range 1 to 9 seconds. a. The bold values are factory-set. b. For TTM, TLL, OSD, RSD, and ALR, the talker is always RA . For GGA, GLL, RMC, and VTG, the talker is always GP. 715 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 7.2.2 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank) In order not to display radar echoes, set a sector range and stop transmission in the bearing range. Three types of sectors can be created. The sector blank function operates in the relative bearing with the bow as the benchmark. 7.2.2.1 Sector Blank Function On/Off (Sector1,2 and 3) Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Sector Blank setting menu. 2. Installation Menu 3. Sector Blank 3) Set the sector blank number Sector 1
, Sector 2
, or Sector 3 with which the sector blank function operates. The system allows the use of up to three sector blank areas. Set each sector blank area to on or off. On Off
: The sector blank function of the number is operated.
: The sector blank function of the number is stopped. 7.2.2.2 Sector Blank Area Creation (Make Sector 1,2,3) Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Sector Blank setting menu. 2. Installation Menu 3. Sector Blank 3) Select the sector blank number (
Make Sector 1 to Make Sector 3
) for sector creation, and click the Make Sector button in the menu. The selected sector blank will be made. 716 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 4) Set the starting azimuth of the sector blank by operating the
[EBL] dial, and left-click the ENT button. The start angle of the sector blank will be set. 5) Set the ending azimuth of the sector blank by operating the [EBL]
dial, and left-click the ENT button. The end angle of the sector blank will be set. 7.2.3 TNI Blank Setting (TNI Blank) Set a sector range and stop tuning operation in the bearing range. If a structure such as the mast is close to the radar antenna, automatic tuning operation may become unstable. In this case, set a TNI blank in the direction of the structure in order to stabilize the tuning operation. Only one type of a sector can be created. The TNI blank function operates in the relative bearing with the bow as the benchmark. 7.2.3.1 TNI Blank Function On/Off (Sector) Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the TNI Blank setting menu. 2. Installation Menu 9. Next 2. TNI Blank 3) Select the item blank function. 1. TNI Blank in the menu, and turn on or off the TNI On Off
: The TNI blank function is operated.
: The TNI blank function is stopped. 7.2.3.2 TNI Blank Area Creation (Make Sector) Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 717 7 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Sector Blank setting menu. 2. Installation Menu 9. Next 2. TNI Blank 3) Left-click the 2. Make Sector button in the menu. The selected sector blank will be made. 4) Set the starting azimuth of the TNI blank by operating the [EBL]
dial, and left-click the ENT button. The start angle of the TNI blank will be set. 5) Set the ending azimuth of the TNI blank by operating the [EBL]
dial, and left-click the ENT button. The end angle of the TNI blank will be set. 7.2.4 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scanner Unit (Output Pulse) Set the output value of bearing pulses from the scanner unit. The system can set 2048 pulses or 4096 pulses. This setting is enabled only when the scanner unit of 25 or 30 kW is used. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Output Pulse setting menu. 1. Adjust Menu 4. TXRX Adjustment 6. Output Pulse 3) Set the number of pulses to be output by the scanner unit. 2048 a 4096
:2048 pulses per antenna rotation (Recommended value)
:4096 pulses per antenna rotation a. If a 10 kW antenna is used, 2048 is always set. 718 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 7.2.5 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave) Place the system in the Slave mode when it is to be operated as the sub-display that displays radar echoes by using radar signals from other radar equipment. The input value of externally input bearing pulses can be set. The system can set 2048 pulses or 4096 pulses. 7.2.5.1 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave) Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the installation setting menu. 2. Installation Menu 3) Select Slave for the item 2. Master Slave in the menu. Master
:The system operates as radar equipment while the own antenna is connected. Slave
:The system operates as a sub-display while the signal cable of other radar equipment is connected. 7.2.5.2 Setting of Input Bearing Pulse (Input BP Pulse) Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the second page of the installation setting menu. 2. Installation Menu 9. Next 3) Set the number of pulses for the item 1. Input BP Count in the menu. 2048 4096 2048 pulses per antenna rotation 4096 pulses per antenna rotation 719 7 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 7.2.6 Language Setting (Language) The system is designed to switch between display languages, Japanese and English. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the language setting menu. 2. Installation Menu 8. Language 3) Select the language to be used. 1. English 2. Japanese 3. Other a a. Other is an option to display character strings created by our overseas agents. Ask the overseas agent or our sales department if your language is supported. To determine the selected language, turn the power off, and then turn it on. 7.2.7 Date Time Setting To display time, the local time, local date, and time-zone difference must be set. However, if the "ZDA" sentence of NMEA0183 is received, time can be automatically displayed. Procedures 1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the language setting menu. Main 7. Sub Menu 6. Date Time Setting The Date Time Setting menu will open. 2) Set information about date and time 2)-1. UTC/LMT (Time display system) UTC LMT
: Universal Time Coordinate
: Local Mean Time 720 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 2)-2. LMT Date Input the date in local time. 2)-3. LMT Time Input the date in local time. 2)-4. Time Zone Input the time-zone difference between the universal time and local time. 2)-5. Display Style Set one of the following date display formats. YYYY-MM-DD 2007-12-31 MMM DD, YYYY DEC 31, 2007 DD MMM, YYYY 31 DEC, 2007 2)-6. Synchronize with GPS A ZDA sentence sent by the GPS is used, thereby displaying time synchronized with the GPS time. On Off Time synchronized with the GPS time a Time not synchronized with the GPS time a. If On is selected for this item but a ZDA sentence is not input, the system internal clock function is used to display the date and time. 7.2.8 Input Installation Information The system can input installation information. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 7 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the language setting menu. Main 1. Installation Information 3) Input the installation information. For the input method on the numeric value and character input screens, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". Date Name Input the date of installed system. Input the name of installation personel. Company Input the name of radar installer. 721 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 7.2.9 Setting the Alarm System 7.2.9.1 Setting the reset interval (Reset Interval) This function enables the control of WMRST terminal (on the terminal board circuit).The reset signal is turned on when operation in a set period of time. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Reset Interval menu. 2. Installation Menu 6. Alarm System 1. Watch Alarm 1. Reset Interval 3) Input the value to be set. For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". 7.2.9.2 Setting the Trackball Threshold This function enables the control of WMRST terminal (on the terminal board circuit). The reset signal is turned off when trackball is moved, that caused by vibration.If trackball move distance go over the threshold (dot unit) when reset signal is turned on. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Trackball Threshold menu. 2. Installation Menu 6. Alarm System 1. Watch Alarm 2. Trackball Threshold 3) Input the value to be set. For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". 722 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 7.2.9.3 Setting the relay output (Relay Output) This function enables the control of ARPAALM terminal (on the terminal board circuit). Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Relay Output menu. 2. Installation Menu 6. Alarm System 2. Relay Output 3) Left-click the 1. Relay Output Mode button in the menu. The Relay Output mode is switched. Continuous
: The output is continuously controlled. Intermittent
: The output is intermittenly controlled. 4) Click the item button corresponding to the item to be changed. The item can be turned on / off. On Off
: The relay output is turned on when alarm have issued.
: The relay output is not turned on when alarm have issued. 7 2. TT CPA/TCPA
: There is a dangerous target. (tracked target) 3. AIS CPA/TCPA
: There is a dangerous target. (AIS target) 4. New Target 5. Lost
: A new target is acquired in the automatic acquisition zone.
: There is a lost target. (Target Tracking / AIS). 7.2.9.4 Setting the ALR output (ALR Output) This function enables the control of ALR port (See Section 7.2.1 "Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting)"). Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 723 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the ALR Output menu. 2. Installation Menu 6. Alarm System 2. Relay Output 3) Click the item button corresponding to the item to be changed. The item is turned on / off. On Off
: The ALR sentence is output when alarm have issued.
: The ALR sentence is not output when alarm have issued. 1. System Alarm
: The internal alarm. 2. TT/AIS Alarm
: Target Tracking Alarms and AIS Function Alarms. 7.2.9.5 Setting the External Acknowledgement (External ACK Setting) This function enables the control of system when ACK sentence have received. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the External ACK Setting menu. 2. Installation Menu 6. Alarm System 5. External ACK Setting 3) Click the item button corresponding to the menu to be changed. Critical Alarm CPA/TCPA alarm. Normal Alarm Exept Critical Alarm. 724 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS 4) Click the item button corresponding to the item to be changed. The item is switched. Audio
: Setting of alarm sound. On Off
: The alarm sound acknowridgement have received.
: The acknowridgement have received. sound alarm is is not stopped when stopped when Indication
: Setting of alarm indication. Lightning Brinking
: The alarm indication brinking is stopped when acknowridgement have received.
: The alarm indication brinking is not stopped when acknowridgement have received. Acknowledge State
: Setting of ALR sentence. A;ACK V;UNACK
: Add acknowridgement to ALR sentence.
: Add no acknowridgement (unrecognized) to ALR sentence. 7.2.9.6 Setting the Alarm Buzzer (Sound Output Mode) This function enables the control of alarm buzzer. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the External ACK Setting menu. 2. Installation Menu 6. Alarm System 4. Sound Output Mode 3) Select the function to be used. On
, Off1 and Off2 Setting and Ararm Function Alarm Setting Operation Operation Miss CPA/
TCPA New Target Lost NAV System ISW On Off1 Off2
: Followed by Buzzer Volume menu setting.
: Alarm Buzzer is turned off.
: If Relay Output menu is turned on when Alam Buzzer is turned off. If Relay Output menu is turned off when Alam Buzzer is turned on. For how to setting Buzzer Volume menu, see Section 3.8.6 "Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume)". 725 7 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT 7.3 ADJUSTMENT This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be performed by service engineers during system installation. Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized service persons. If wrong setting is carried out, this may cause unstable operation. Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation. Otherwise, the radar performance may be affected, resulting in an accident or trouble. 7.3.1 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level) 7.3.1.1 Noise Level Adjustment for Signal Processing Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the noise level adjustment menu. 9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup 1. Signal Processing 1. Echo Noise Level 3) Increase/decrease the noise level adjustment value. The noise level is factory-set. (Initial value: 140) After system installation, a great change in the noise level adjustment value should be avoided; it should be fine adjusted within 5. 726 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT 7.3.1.2 Noise Level Adjustment Mode (Setting Mode) A noise level is factory-adjusted while this mode is turned on. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the noise level adjustment menu. 9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup 1. Signal Processing 2. Setting Mode The noise level adjustment mode is switched between on and off. Factory-adjustment method The noise level adjustment value is once decreased to about 130. While the noise level adjustment value is gradually increased, the value with which radar echoes start turning yellow is determined as the set value. The noise level adjustment mode is turned off when the adjustment is finished. 7.3.2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function (TT) 7.3.2.1 Vector Constant Adjustment (Vector Constant) Adjust the vector follow-up performance of the target tracking function. 7 The vector constant is adjusted to an optimal value, so do not change it carelessly. Attention Do not change the set value carelessly. The vector constant shall be set to 5 normally. If the vector constant value is higher, a targets vector will be better followed up when the target and own ship change their course or speed, but the vector accuracy will be lower on the contrary. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Vector Constant adjustment menu. 727 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT 9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup 2. TT 1. Vector Constant The window for setting vector constants will appear. 3) Input the value to be set. 7.3.2.2 For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu". Quantization Level Adjustment (Video TD Level) Use the target tracking function (TT) to adjust the level of the signal to be recognized as a target. If a small value is set, even weak target signals will be input to the target detection circuit of the target tracking function. However, many unnecessary signals are also input, which may cause unstable target acquisition or tracking. It is important to set a value four or five greater than the value with which unnecessary signals are detected. The quantization level is adjusted to an optimal value, so do not change it carelessly. Do not change the set quantization level carelessly. If the level deviates from the proper value, the target acquisition and tracking functions will deteriorate. Otherwise, this may cause accidents. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the target tracking setting menu. 9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup 2. TT 3) To change the quantization level of the automatic acquisition area, specify the item the quantization level of tracking and manual acquisition, specify the item in the menu. To change 3. Video High Level 2. Video TD Level
. 4) Input the value to be set. 728 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT 7.3.3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment (MBS) Main Bang Suppression is adjusted to suppress main bang, a reflection signal from 3D circuit including wave guide tube, that generally appears as a circular image focusing on the center of the radar display. Optimum adjustment allows main bang image to remain lightly on the display. Do not change this adjusted level carelessly. Incorrect adjustment may erase targets in point-blank range and cause collision, resulting in death or serious injury. 7.3.3.1 Adjustment of Main Bang Suppression Level (MBS Level) Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the MBS level adjustment menu. 9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup 3. MBS 1. MBS Level 7 3) Set the radar as follows:
Set the radar range to 0.125 NM. Set the radar video enhance function (ENH) to OFF. Set the image processing (PROC) to OFF. Turn the [RAIN] control to the minimum position (fully to the left). Turn the [GAIN] control to the maximum position (fully to the right). Turn the [SEA] control to achieve the strength with which main bang can be judged. 4) Adjust the value so that the main bang can be erased. 729 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT 7.3.3.2 Adjustment of Main Bang Suppression Area (MBS Area) Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the MBS Area adjustment menu. 9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup 3. MBS 2. MBS Area 3) Set the radar as follows:
Set the radar range to 0.125 NM. Set the radar video enhance function (ENH) to OFF. Set the image processing (PROC) to OFF. Turn the [RAIN] control to the minimum position (fully to the left). Turn the [GAIN] control to the maximum position (fully to the right). Turn the [SEA] control to achieve the strength with which main bang can be judged. 4) Adjust the value so that the main bang can be erased. 730 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT 7.3.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor After replacement of either of the following units, adjust the performance monitor according to the procedures in this section:
Performance monitor Antenna unit 7.3.4.1 Transmission Monitor Adjustment (MON Adjustment) Adjust the circuit for monitoring the transmission performance of the radar equipment. Procedures 1) If the performance monitor is equipped with an inter-switch function, set it as the master display unit. 2) Open the Serviceman Menu. 3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Performance Monitor Adjustment menu. 1. Adjust Menu 4. TXRX Adjustment 4. MON Adjustment 4) Increase or decrease the adjustment value so that the farthest point of the performance monitor pattern touches the 18.0 nm line on the chart. 7 Performance Monitor pattern Increase or decrease the adjustment value so that the farthest point of the Performance Monitor pattern contacts the 18.0 nm line. 18.00NM Fig 7-2: MON Adjustment 731 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT 7.3.4.2 Reception Monitor Adjustment (MON Indicator Adjustment) Adjust the circuit for monitoring the reception performance of the radar equipment. Procedures 1) If the performance monitor is equipped with an inter-switch function, set it as the master display unit. 2) Open the Serviceman Menu. 3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the performance monitor Indicator Adjustment menu. 1. Adjust Menu 4. TXRX Adjustment 4. MON Adjustment 4) Increase or decrease the adjustment value so that the performance monitor level indicator will be adjusted to "8". MON 5) Attach the INFORMATION LABEL provided with the performance monitor to an appropriate position on the display unit. 6) Write the performance monitor bar value check date to the INFORMATION LABEL. During performance monitor adjustment, all acquisitions by the target tracking function are released. The released target acquisitions are not recovered. 732 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU This item is provided for equipment maintenance, including settings of antenna safety switch, master reset, etc. Only our service engineers are to make the adjustment. Neglecting this caution may cause accidents and failures. Do not make the adjustments during navigation. Otherwise, adjustments may affect the radar functions, causing accidents and failures. 7.4.1 Antenna Safety Switch (Safety Switch) Use this switch to measure the transmission/reception performance while the antenna is in stopped state. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 7 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Safety Switch setting menu. 3. Maintenance Menu 1. Safety Switch 3) Select the item to be set. Set operation when the antenna safety switch is turned off. 1. TX-OFF 2. Standy 3. TX-ON The transmitter stops transmission. The screen on the display unit remains in transmission state.
(Normal setting) The transmitter stops transmission. The screen on the display unit is placed in standby state. The transmitter continues transmission. The screen on the display unit remains in transmission state. In this case, however, an error such as a bearing signal failure occurs because the safety switch is turned off. 4) Change the setting back to 2. Standy when the work is finished. 733 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU 7.4.2 Initialization of Memory Area(Area Initial) If system operation is unstable, it may be stabilized by initializing the memory area. To initialize the memory area, follow the procedure in this section. The memory area is reset to the factory setting when initialized. 7.4.2.1 Partial Master Reset Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Partial Master Rest operation menu for the memory area. 3. Maintenance Menu 2. Area Initial 1. Partial Master Reset 3) Select the items to be initialized. 1. Serviceman Menu 2. Except Serviceman Menu 3. User Setting 4. TT Setting 5. AIS Setting 6. Day/Night The set values in the Serviceman menu are initialized. The set values not in the Serviceman menu are initialized. The user-set values are initialized. The set values for the target tracking function are initialized. The set values for the AIS display function are initialized. The color scheme and brilliance setting for the day/night mode are initialized. 4) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu. The memory areas of specified items are initialized, and the system is restarted. 7.4.2.2 All Master Reset Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the All Master Rest operation menu for the memory area. 3. Maintenance Menu 2. Area Initial 2. All Master Reset 3) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu. The whole memory area is initialized, and the system is restarted. 734 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU 7.4.3 Save of Internal Memory Data (Card1/2) The system can save internal memory data such as item settings in all menus onto a flash memory card. If the radar processing circuit in the system has been replaced, the set values before the circuit replacement can be restored by reading the set values you saved before the replacement. To save the internal memory data onto a flash memory card (option), the card must be inserted in card slot beforehand. 7.4.3.1 Copying of Internal Settings onto Card (Internal To Card1/2) Save the internal memory data, such as item settings in menus, onto a flash memory card. The internal memory data should be saved at completion of system setting, and the operation condition should be saved periodically. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Internal to Card2 menu. 3. Maintenance Menu 3) Select 1. Yes 3. Internal To Card2 in the Confirmation Menu. The internal memory data is saved on the flash memory card. 7.4.3.2 Reading of Internal Settings from Card (Card1/2 To Internal) Read the saved memory data from the flash memory card into the system memory. Perform the read operation in order to return the system to the previous operation condition after replacement of the radar processing circuit in the system. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Card2 to Internal menu. 3. Maintenance Menu 3) Select 1. Yes 4. Card2 To Internal in the Confirmation Menu. The memory data is read from the flash memory card into the system memory. After the internal memory area is updated, the system is restarted. 735 7 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU 7.4.4 Restoration of Scanner Unit Operation Time (TXRX Time) The system adds up the following operation time and contains it in the scanner unit:
Transmission time Motor run time Clear the above total time when the magnetron or scanner unit motor is replaced. 7.4.4.1 Clear of Motor Run Time (Clear TX Time) Clear the scanner's motor run time. Perform the following procedure to clear the motor run time when the scanner motor is replaced. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Clear Motor Time menu. 3. Maintenance Menu 5. TXRX Time 1. Clear TX Time 3) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu. The motor run time in the TXRX's internal control circuit is cleared to 0. 7.4.4.2 Save of Antenna Time (Clear Motor Time) Save the following scanner unit time data from the scanner unit into the display unit. Perform the following procedure to inherit the scanner unit time data when the TXRX's internal control circuit is replaced. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Clear Motor Time menu. 3. Maintenance Menu 5. TXRX Time 2. Clear Motor Time 3) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu. The motor run time in the TXRX's internal control circuit is cleared to 0. 736 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU 7.4.4.3 Save of Scanner Unit Time (TXRX To Display Unit) Save the following scanner unit time data from the scanner unit into the display unit. Perform the following procedure of 7.4.4.4 to inherit the scanner unit time data when the TXRX's internal control circuit is replaced. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the TXRX to Display Unit menu. 3. Maintenance Menu 5. TXRX Time 3. TXRX To Display Unit 3) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu. The scanner unit time data in the TXRX's internal control circuit is saved transferred to the display unit. 7.4.4.4 Restoration of Antenna Time (Display Unit To TXRX) Restore the antenna time data from the display unit into the antenna's internal control circuit. Perform the above procedure of 7.4.4.3 to inherit the antenna time data when the antenna's internal control circuit is replaced. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 7 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Display Unit to TXRX menu. 3. Maintenance Menu 5. TXRX Time 4. Display Unit To TXRX 3) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu. The scanner unit time data in the display unit is restored transferred to the antenna's internal control circuit. 737 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU 7.4.5 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update) The system is designed to transfer and display external character strings as the second language display. The second language is factory-set to "Japanese."
Ask our agent or sales department for the supply of character strings to be updated. To update character strings, the flash memory card (option) containing the character string file must be inserted in card slot 2. Procedures 1) Open the Serviceman Menu. 2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the String Data Update menu. 3. Maintenance Menu 6. String Data Update 3) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu. The character string file on the flash memory card is read into the system, and the second language area is updated. To display the read character strings in the second language, select Other in the menu shown in Section 7.2.6 "Language Setting (Language)". 738 SECTION 8 COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.3.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ....................................................................8-1 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT ...........................................................8-2 8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1125/1129/1130/1139/2103/2254 ....................8-2 8.2.2 Wave Guide Tube (JMA-9123-7XA/9XA) ........................................8-4 Coaxial Cable (JMA-9133-SA) ........................................................8-4 8.2.3 Transmitter Receiver Unit (NTG-3225/3230) ................................8-5 8.2.4 8.2.5 Display Unit (NCD-4990) ................................................................8-5 PERFORMANCE CHECK ......................................................................8-6 Check Performance on Test Menu ...............................................8-6 8.3.1.1 Self-diagnosis function (Self Test) ............................................8-7 8.3.1.2 Monitor Test ................................................................................8-9 8.3.1.3 Operation Unit Test (Keyboard Test) .......................................8-9 8.3.1.4 Check of the Performance Monitor (MON Display) ...............8-10 8.3.1.5 System Alarm Log display .......................................................8-10 8.3.1.6 System Information ..................................................................8-11 8.3.1.7 Magnetron Current ....................................................................8-11 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS ..................................................8-12 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement ..................................8-13 Replacement of magnetron ..........................................................8-13 8.4.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1130 ............................................................8-14 8.4.2.2 Scanner UnitNKE-2254, NKE-1125 .......................................8-16 8.4.2.3 Scanner UnitNKE-2103 .........................................................8-19 8.4.2.4 Transmitter Receiver UnitNTG-3230 ....................................8-21 8.4.2.5 Transmitter Receiver UnitNTG-3225 ....................................8-24 Replacement of Motor ...................................................................8-28 8.4.3.1 Scanner UnitNKE-1139/1130 ................................................8-28 8.4.3.2 Scanner UnitNKE-1125/2254 ................................................8-30 8.4.3.3 Scanner UnitNKE-2103 .........................................................8-31 Replacement of LCD Monitor .......................................................8-33 8.4.4.1 Display Unit NCD-4990 .............................................................8-33 Replacement of Backup Battery ..................................................8-36 8.4.5.1 About the Battery Alarm ...........................................................8-36 8.4.5.2 How to Replacement of Backup Battery .................................8-36 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 8.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Never carry out internal inspection or repair work of the equipment by users. Inspection or repair work by unauthorized personnel may result in fire hazard or electric shock. Ask the nearest branch, business office or a dealer for inspection and repair. Turn off the main power before maintenance work. Otherwise, an electric shock may result. Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment. Especially, make sure to turn off the indicator if a rectifier is used. Otherwise, equipment failure, or death or serious injury due to electric shock may result, because voltage is outputted from the rectifier even when the radar is not operating. For operating the radar equipment in the good conditions, it is necessary to make the maintenance work as described below. If maintenance is made properly, troubles will reduce. It is recommended to make regular maintenance work. Common points of maintenance for each unit are as follow:
8 Clean the equipment. Remove the dust, dirt, and sea water rest on the equipment cabinet with a piece of dry cloth. Especially, clean the air vents with a brush for good ventilation. 81 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT 8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1125/1129/1130/1139/2103/2254 Turn off the main power source before starting maintenance. Otherwise, an electric shock or injury may be caused. Do not touch the radiator. Even if the power is turned off, the radiator may be rotated by the wind. Turn "OFFi" the safety switch to stop the scanner unit.
(Refer to Section 1.4 "EXTERIOR DRAWINGS".) Otherwise, you may be injured if touching the rotating scanner unit by accident. Do not touch the radiator. Even if the power is turned off, the radiator may be rotated by the wind. i. After the work, turn "ON" the scanner unit safety switch. a. Precautions in Mounting the Cover When the cover is removed for regular checkup and replacement of parts and refitted after such work, the procedures of fastening bolts shall be taken with the following precautions:
1) The proper fastening torque of the fitting bolts (M8) is 1176 to 1470 N/
cm (120 to 150kgf/cm) (which makes the inside water-tight and protects the packings against permanent compressive strain).The packings start producing from the cover at a torque of approximately 1470N/cm
(150kgf/cm). Do not fasten the bolts with a torque exceeding the specified value. Otherwise, the screws may be broken. 2) Use an offset wrench of 11 mm X 13 mm or a double-ended wrench of 13 mm X 17 mm (not longer than 200 mm). 3) Screw all the bolts by hand first to prevent them playing, then fasten them evenly in order not to cause one-sided fastening. (Fasten the bolts with 25% of the required torque at the first step.)
*Fasten the bolts in the diagonal order. 82 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT 4-M8 (stainless steel) bolt Tightening torque : 120 to 150 kgf/cm 8-M8 (stainless steel) bolt Tightening torque : 120 to 150 kgf/cm Bolt Tightening Procedure of NKE-1130 /1139 Cover 4-M8 (stainless steel) bolt Tightening torque : 120 to 150 kgf/cm Bolt Tightening Procedure of NKE-1125/1129/2254 Cover Bolt Tightening Procedure of NKE-2103 Cover b. Radiator Attention If the radiator front face (radiation plane) is soiled with smoke, salt, dust, paint or birds droppings, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth wetted with alcohol or water and try to keep it clean at all times. Otherwise, radar beam radiation may attenuate or reflect on it, resulting in deterioration of radar performance. Never use solvents of gasoline, benzine, trichloroethylene and ketone for cleaning. Otherwise, the radiation plane may deteriorate. Check up and clean the radiator. 83 8 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT c. Rotating section c-1 Supply Oil Seal When there is not a grease nipple, the replenishment of grease oil is unnecessary. Remove the cap on the grease nipple located on the side of the X band radar or on the front of S band radar at which the radiator is supported, and grease with a grease gun.Make the oiling every six months. The oil quantity shall be approximately 100 g, which is as much as the grease comes out of the oil seal. Use the grease of Mobilux 2 of Mobil Oil. c-2 Oiling gears Apply grease evenly to the tooth surfaces of the main shaft drive gear and the encoder drive gear with a spreader or brush. Oiling in short intervals is more effective to prevent the gears from wear and tear and extend their service life, but oil at least every six months. Use Mobilux2 of Mobile Oil. c-3 Mounting legs Check the mounting legs and mounting bolts of the antenna unit case for corrosion at intervals and maintain them to prevent danger. Apply paint to them once a half year because painting is the best measure against corrosion. 8.2.2 Wave Guide Tube (JMA-9123-7XA/9XA) Attention Install wave guide tubes without any clearance. Leaving a clearance may cause water leakage or corrosion later. 8.2.3 Coaxial Cable (JMA-9133-SA) The coaxial tube gland of a coaxial cable terminal is fully waterproofed when installed. To prevent a water leakage accident, periodically inspect the coaxial tube gland. In particular, the coaxial tube gland should be repainted every six months. 84 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT Do not apply strong shock to the coaxial cable by striking it with a tool or hammering it. Otherwise, an open circuit failure may result. Do not place anything heavy on the coaxial cable.Otherwise, an open circuit failure may result. Do not twist or pull the coaxial cable. For details, refer to the coaxial cable installation procedure for S-band radars. 8.2.4 Transmitter Receiver Unit (NTG-3225/3230) Wipe dust off the transmitter and receiver with a dry cloth or feather duster. 8.2.5 Display Unit (NCD-4990) 8 When cleaning the screen, do not wipe it too strongly with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or thinner to clean the screen. Otherwise the screen surface may be damaged Dust accumulated on the screen will reduce clarity and darken the video. For cleaning it, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth (flannel or cotton). Do not wipe it strongly with a piece of dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner. 85 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK Make operational check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem is found, investigate it immediately. Pay special attention to the high voltage sections in checking and take full care that no trouble is caused by any error or carelessness in measurement. Take note of the results of checking, which can be used effectively in the next check work. Operational check shall be made in accordance with Table 8-1 Function Check List in the order as specified in it. Equipment Transmitter Receiver Unit Display Unit Table8-1 Performance Check List Item to be checked Criteria Remarks Tuning LED of Receiver The LED is lighting during operation 48NM range Video and echoes on the screen Sensitivity LCD brilliance can be controlled correctly Various markers Various numerical indications Lighting Memory Communications Lines Can be correctly controlled See the Section [1] "Memory Test"
the Section See Communication Lines (Line Test)"
[3]
"Check of Power Supply, Backup Battery See the Section [4] "Supply Voltage"
Monitor Operation Unit System Alarm Log Display System Information Display Magnetron current Target Tracking See the Section 8.3.1.2 "Monitor Test"
See the Section 8.3.1.3 "Operation Unit Test (Keyboard Test)"
See the Section 8.3.1.5 "System Alarm Log display"
the Section 8.3.1.6 See Information"
"System the Section 8.3.1.7 "Magnetron See Current"
See the Section 5.2.7 "Operation Test
(TT Test Menu)"
Scanner Unit Signals from the Scanner Unit See the Section [2] "TXRX Test"
Performance Monitor See the Section 8.3.1.4 "Check of the Performance Monitor (MON Display)"
8.3.1 Check Performance on Test Menu The radar operating state can be checked by opening the Test Menu. 86 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK Procedures Menu. 1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Test Main 9. Test Menu 2) Select the items to be checked. 1. Self Test 8.3.1.1Self-diagnosis function (Self Test) 2. Monitor Test 8.3.1.2Monitor Test 3. Keyboard Test 8.3.1.3Operation Unit Test (Keyboard Test) 4. MON Display 8.3.1.4Check of the Performance Monitor (MON Display) 5. System Alarm Log 8.3.1.5System Alarm Log display 6. System Information 8.3.1.6System Information Magnetron Current 8.3.1.7Magnetron Current The list of check items will appear. 8.3.1.1 Self-diagnosis function (Self Test) Check of memory, scanner unit, and communications Lines 1. Memory Test
[1]Memory Test 2. TXRX Test
[2]TXRX Test 3. Line Test
[3]Check of Communication Lines (Line Test) 4. Supply Voltage
[4]Supply Voltage
[1] Memory Test Checks for the performance of built-in memory. 1. SDRAM 2. SRAM SDRAM Check SRAM Check 3. FLASH ROM FLASH ROM Check 4. GRAPHIC GRAPHIC Check When no abnormality is found, OK is displayed. When an abnormality is found, NG is displayed. 8 87 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
[2] TXRX Test Checks for signals from the scanner. Safety Switch Scanner's safety switch check AZI Pulse HL Pulse MH Current Trigger Video Scanner rotation signal check Heading line signal check Check on the load current of high voltage in the modulator Radar trigger signal check Radar video check When no abnormality is found, OK is displayed. When an abnormality is found, NG is displayed. In standby, ** will appear.
[3] Check of Communication Lines (Line Test) Check the status of communications with options. TXRX Check on connection with the transmitter-receiver SIG. PROC Check on connection with the signal processing circuit TT Check on connection with the target tracking unit GYRO I/F Check on connection with the GYRO I/F unit ISW Check on connection with the interswitch When no abnormality is found, OK is displayed. When an abnormality is found, NG is displayed. The status display field of equipment not connected is left blank.
[4] Supply Voltage Check the voltage of internal power supply. Item Normal value 12V 11.4 to 12.6V 5V 4.75 to 5.25V 3.3V 3.14 to 3.46V Battery 2.5V or more 88 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK 8.3.1.2 Monitor Test Checks for the display. The test pattern will be shown on the display. 1. Pattern1 2. Pattern2 3. Pattern3 4. Pattern4 All colors are filled with white. A white box is displayed on the black background of 1280 1024dot. Displays rectangle X 2, circle X 2, and cross-shape X13
(white lines on the black background). Displays H of 9 dots X 9 dots on the entire screen (white character on the black background). 5. Pattern5 6. Pattern6 7. Pattern7 8. Pattern8 Gray scale display (16 levels) Displays a color bar. Displays the VDR test pattern. Displays the specified color. To return to the normal display, press any key. If errors occur in the monitor, no test pattern will appear. 8.3.1.3 Operation Unit Test (Keyboard Test) Checks for the controls and switches of the operation panel. 1. Key Test
[1]Key Test 2. Buzzer Test
[2]Buzzer Test 3. Light Test
[3]Light Test
[1] Key Test Checks for the controls and switches of the operation panel. Each key on the operation panel on the display is shown in reverse video at the same time the key is pressed, and the name of the pressed key is displayed.
[2] Buzzer Test Checks for the operation panel buzzer. The buzzer will sound. The buzzer automatically stops after it sounds for a specified length of time.
[3] Light Test Checks for the control panel light. The brightness of the operation panel is gradually intensified at four levels. 89 8 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK 8.3.1.4 Check of the Performance Monitor (MON Display) Displays the performance monitor status.
*Transmitter System Transmitter system attenuation value check. Attenuation Value
*Receiver System Receiver system attenuation value check. MON Pattern Range Attenuation Value Procedures 1) Turn the [VRM] dial to make adjustments so that the farthest point of the performance monitor pattern. The Attenuation Value
*Receiver System of is displayed. 8.3.1.5 System Alarm Log display Displays previously occurred system errors with the dates and times when they occurred. The current error is displayed at the lower right of the radar display. For details, refer to Section 9.1.1 "List of Alarms and other Indications". The Error log display button (page2-31 Alarm) is clicked, in the same way as that one. To erase the alarm logs, press the All Clear button in the log display window. 810 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK 8.3.1.6 System Information Displays the current system information. Indicator TXRX Processor software version information Scanner software version information System No. System number TX Time Total magnetron transmitting time (Total time during which radar was transmitted) X-Band S-Band Motor Time Total operating time (Total power-on time) TXRX Total Time Total operating time of the scanner unit (Total power-on time of the scanner unit) Total Time Total operating time of the display unit (Total power-on time of the display unit) 8.3.1.7 Magnetron Current Displays the Magnetron Current bar indicating the magnetron current to check. When a 48 NM range is set, the magnetron current is normal if the Magnetron Current bar reads the value below. 10kW : 4 to 6 scale marks 25/30kW : 6 to 9 scale marks 8 811 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS The system includes parts that need periodic replacement. The parts should be replaced as scheduled. Use of parts over their service life can cause a system failure. Turn off the main power source before replacing parts. Otherwise, an electric shock or trouble may be caused. Before replacing the magnetron, turn off the main power source and wait for 5 minutes or more until the high voltage circuits are discharged. Otherwise, an electric shock may be caused. Take off your wrist watch when bringing your hands close to the magnetron. Otherwise, your watch may be damaged because the magnetron is a strong magnet. Two or more persons shall replace the liquid crystal monitor. If only one person does this work, he may drop the LCD, resulting in injury. Even after the main power source is turned off, some high voltages remain for a while. Do not contact the inverter circuit in the LCD with bare hands. Otherwise, an electric shock may be caused. 812 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement Here are parts required for periodic replacement Part name 1. Magnetron Interval 4,000 hours Radar model JMA-9110-6XA/6XAH JMA-9122-6XA/9XA/6XAH JMA-9123-7XA/9XA JMA-9132-SA JMA-9133-SA 2. Motor 10,000 hours JMA-9110-6XA/6XAH JMA-9122-6XA/9XA JMA-9123-7XA/9XA JMA-9122-6XAH JMA-9132-SA JMA-9133-SA Part type 5VMAA00102 5VMAA00106 Part code 5VMAA00102 5VMAA00106 5VMAA00104 5VMAA00104 7BDRD0048 MDBW10822 7BDRD0048 MDBW10822 7BDRD0045A MDBW10823 7BDRD0045A MDBW10823 3. Fan (Scanner Unit) 20,000 hours JMA-9110-6XA/6XAH 7BFRD0002 7BFRD0002 JMA-9122-6XA/9XA/6XAH JMA-9132-SA 4. LCD PANEL 5. Fan 50,000 hours 7WSRD0002A 7WSRD0002A
(Radar Process Circuit) 20,000 hours
(Power Supply) 20,000 hours 7. Backup battery 5 years 109R0612S4D13 5BFAB00588 7BFRD0006 H-7BFRD0006 5ZBCJ00012 5ZBCJ00012 8.4.2 Replacement of magnetron 8 Replacement of magnetron must be made by specialized service personnel. For details, refer to Service Manual. When mounting a new magnetron, do not touch the magnet with a screwdriver or put it on an iron plate. After replacement, connect the lead wire correctly. Handling of Magnetron under Long-Time Storage The magnetron that has been kept in storage for a long time may cause sparks and operate unstably when its operation is started. Perform the aging in the following procedures:
1) Warm up the cathode for a longer time than usually. (20 to 30 minutes in the STBY state.) 2) Start the operation from the short pulse range and shift it gradually to the longer pulse ranges. If the operation becomes unstable during this process, return it to the standby mode immediately. Keep the state for 5 to 10 minutes until the operation is restarted. 813 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 8.4.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1130
[Required tools]
A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screw A Phillips screwdriver for 6 mm screw A wrench (width across flats 13 mm, for M8 screws)
[Replacement procedure]
1) Before starting part replacement work, turn off the safety switch of the scanner unit. Bow side The safety switch is located on the rear
(stern) side. Remove the cover and turn off
(to the lower side) the safety switch. Turn off the safety switch. 2) Remove the pedestal cover. Make sure that there is no foreign matter or dust adhered to the gasket when you put the cover on. Remove the eight hexagonal screws. Removing the port side cover 814 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 3) Remove the cover on the left
(port) side and check that there is no remaining electric charge in the modulation high-voltage circuit board. Magnetron Remove the two screws (M4) Remove the green cable. holding the magnetron cables
(both yellow and green). Remove the yellow cable. 4) Remove the eight screws (M6) to remove the fixture holding the magnetron. The screws cannot be removed from the fixture, so loosen the all eight screws and remove the magnetron together with the fixture. The magnetron is held by a hook, but be careful not to let it fall. Use a non-magnetic screwdriver. If the magnetron comes into contact with any metal (tool), its performance may deteriorate. Remove the two screws. Remove the magnetron. Remove the metal fixture. Loosen the eight screws. 8 5) Install the new magnetron together with the fixture and tighten the screws to hold the cables. Follow the removal procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the screws and connect the cables.
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to check the operation. 815 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 1) Turn on the power supply for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be preheated (about 20 to 30 minutes / bring the radar unit to STBY mode). 2) Start emitting radio waves from the short pulse range and gradually change the emissions to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. If operation becomes unstable, bring the radar unit back to STBY mode and restart emission after allowing for an interval of 5 to 10 minutes. 3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode for about 15 minutes and reopen the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. Adjust the setting in the service engineer menu until the tuning indication bar on the display unit reaches the 8th calibration marking. Check in the service engineer menu that the magnetron current is between the 6th and 9th calibration markings. 4) Finally, initialize the transmission time in the service engineer menu. 8.4.2.2 Scanner UnitNKE-2254, NKE-1125
[Required tools]
A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screw A Phillips screwdriver for 6 mm screw A wrench (width across flats 13 mm, for M8 screws)
[Replacement procedure]
1) Before starting part replacement work, turn off the safety switch of the scanner unit. Bow direction Turn off the safety switch. 816 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 2) Loosen the hexagonal bolts (4) and remove the pedestal cover. Make sure that there is no foreign matter or dust adhered to the gasket when you put the cover on. Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. 4 3) Loosen the screws (four M4 screws) to remove the magnetron cover. Magnetron cover When the starboard side cover is removed 4) Make sure there is no charge remaining in the modulation high-voltage circuit board, and then remove the screws
(two M4 screws) holding the magnetron cables (yellow and green) in place. Loosen the four screws. Magnetron Remove the four screws. 8 5) Remove the screws (four M4 screws) holding the magnetron in place, then replace the magnetron after cutting the leads (yellow and green) for the replacement magnetron to an appropriate length. Remove the green cable. Remove the two screws. Remove the yellow cable. 817 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS Use a non-magnetic screwdriver. If the magnetron comes into contact with any metal
(tool), its performance may deteriorate. 6) After having replaced the magnetron, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables. Extreme care should be taken to connect the leads (yellow and green) to the magnetron for prevention of contact with other parts or the casing. Contact may cause them to discharge.
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to check the operation. 1) Turn on the power supply for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be preheated (about 20 to 30 minutes / bring the radar unit to STBY mode). 2) Start emitting radio waves from the short pulse range and gradually change the emissions to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. If operation becomes unstable, bring the radar unit back to STBY mode and restart emission after allowing for an interval of 5 to 10 minutes. 3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode for about 15 minutes and reopen the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. Adjust the setting in the service engineer menu until the tuning indication bar on the display unit reaches the 8th calibration marking. Check in the service engineer menu that the magnetron current is between the 6th and 9th calibration markings. 4) Finally, initialize the transmission time in the service engineer menu. 818 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 8.4.2.3 Scanner UnitNKE-2103
[Required tools]
A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screw A Phillips screwdriver for 6 mm screw A wrench (width across flats 13 mm, for M8 screws) 1) Before starting part replacement work, turn off the safety switch on the bottom of the scanner unit. Bow direction 2) Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts) and open the upper cover until the stopper of the stay operates. When closing the upper cover, release the stay stopper and then tighten the cover. Turn off the safety switch. Stay 8 Loosen the four hexagonal bolts. 819 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 1) Loosen the screws (four M4 screws), remove the transmitter-receiver unit cover, and remove the cables connected to the transmitter-receiver unit (ten cables). Slide the cover of the transmitter-receiver unit to remove it. Slide the cover. 2) Loosen the bolts (five M5 bolts) and remove the transmitter-receiver unit. Slide the transmitter-receiver unit upward to remove it. Slide the unit. Loosen the four screws. 3) Remove the screws (six M4 screws) holding the magnetron in place and replace the magnetron. Use a non-magnetic screwdriver. If the magnetron comes into contact with any metal
(tool), its performance may deteriorate. 4) Cut the leads (yellow and green) for the replacement magnetron to an appropriate length, then tighten the screws and fix the cables in place. Tighten the five bolts. Nut plate Remove the six screws. Magnetron Green cable Yellow cable After having replaced the magnetron, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. 820 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables. Extreme care should be taken to connect the leads (yellow and green) to the magnetron for prevention of contact with other parts or the casing.
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to check the operation. 1) Turn on the power supply for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be preheated (about 20 to 30 minutes / bring the radar unit to STBY mode). 2) Start emitting radio waves from the short pulse range and gradually change the emissions to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. If operation becomes unstable, bring the radar unit back to STBY mode and restart emission after allowing for an interval of 5 to 10 minutes. 3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode for about 15 minutes and reopen the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. Adjust the setting in the service engineer menu until the tuning indication bar on the display unit reaches the 8th calibration marking. Check in the service engineer menu that the magnetron current is between the 4th and 6th calibration markings. 4) Finally, initialize the transmission time in the service engineer menu. 8 8.4.2.4 Transmitter Receiver UnitNTG-3230
[Required tools]
A flatblade screwdriver for 6 mm screws A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screw A Phillips screwdriver for 6 mm screw 821 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
[Replacement procedure]
1) Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws.Use a flatblade screwdriver. 2) Remove the screws (six M4 screws) and slide the modulator cover to the right to remove it. Modulator cover Remove the four screws. Loosen the six screws. 822 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS Modulator 3) Remove the screws holding the cables (two M4 screws) and the bolts holding the magnetron (eight M6 screws) and remove the metal fitting and the magnetron. Use a non-magnetic screwdriver. If the magnetron comes into contact with any metal
(tool), its performance may deteriorate. Yellow cable Remove the two screws. Green cable 4) Be careful to attach the colored cables
(yellow and green) to the correct connections on the replacement magnetron. After having replaced the magnetron, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables. Remove the eight bolts. Magnetron Yellow cable Green cable
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to check the operation. 8 1) Turn on the power supply for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be preheated (about 20 to 30 minutes / bring the radar unit to STBY mode). 2) Start emitting radio waves from the short pulse range and gradually change the emissions to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. If operation becomes unstable, bring the radar unit back to STBY mode and restart emission after allowing for an interval of 5 to 10 minutes. 3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode for about 15 minutes and reopen the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. 823 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS Adjust the setting in the service engineer menu until the tuning indication bar on the display unit reaches the 8th calibration marking. Check in the service engineer menu that the magnetron current is between the 6th and 9th calibration markings. 4) Finally, initialize the transmission time in the service engineer menu. 8.4.2.5 Transmitter Receiver UnitNTG-3225
[Required tools]
A flatblade screwdriver for 6 mm screws A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screw
[Replacement procedure]
1) Loosen the four screws and remove the cover. The screws are slotted captive screws.Use a flatblade screwdriver. Loosen the four screws. 824 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 2) Loosen the upset head bolt (one M4 bolt), and slide the tightening metal fitting, located between the modulator and the circulator, to remove it. The magnetron is installed within the modulator. Modulator Tightening metal fitting Circulator 3) Loosen the inside screws of the modulator
(four M4 screws). Removing the outside screws makes it possible to slide the modulator. Remove the screw. Tightening metal fitting Modulator 8 Loosen the four screws. 825 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 4) Remove the cables connected to the modulator and the screws on the outside of the modulator (four M4 screws) and slide the modulator to the right to remove it. Modulator Remove the four outside screws. 5) Remove the screws (six M4 screws) and take off the modulator cover. Remove the six screws. 6) Remove the screws holding the cables
(two M4 screws) and the screws holding the magnetron (four M4 screws) and remove the metal fitting and the magnetron. Magnetron Remove the two screws. Use a non-magnetic screwdriver. If the magnetron comes into contact with any metal (tool), its performance may deteriorate. Green cable Yellow cable Remove the four screws. 826 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 7) Be careful to attach the colored cables
(yellow and green) to the correct connections on the replacement magnetron. After having replaced the magnetron, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables. Pulse transformer Green cable Yellow cable Magnetron
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to check the operation. 1) Turn on the power supply for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be preheated (about 20 to 30 minutes / bring the radar unit to STBY mode). 2) Start emitting radio waves from the short pulse range and gradually change the emissions to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. If operation becomes unstable, bring the radar unit back to STBY mode and restart emission after allowing for an interval of 5 to 10 minutes. 3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode for about 15 minutes and reopen the service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment. Adjust the setting in the service engineer menu until the tuning indication bar on the display unit reaches the 8th calibration marking. Check in the service engineer menu that the magnetron current is between the 6th and 9th calibration markings. 4) Finally, initialize the transmission time in the service engineer menu. 8 827 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 8.4.3 Replacement of Motor Replacement of motor must be made by specialized service personnel. For details, refer to Service Manual. 8.4.3.1 Scanner UnitNKE-1139/1130
[Required tools]
A wrench (width across flats 17 mm, for M10 screws) A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screw Tools for removing the cover from the scanner unit.(Refer to the 8.4.2.1)
[Replacement procedure]
1) Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side (see 8.4.2.1) and loosen the four screws
(M4) to remove the driver unit, which has the motor driver circuit board on its back side. Driver unit (driver circuit board at the back side) Remove the four screws. Disconnect the cables connecting the motor to the motor driver circuit board. Driver circuit board Disconnect the cables. 828 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 2) Remove the cover on the left (port) side and remove the five screws (M5) to remove the fixture. Remove the metal fixture. Remove the five screws. 3) Remove the four hexagonal screws (M10x40, SW10, and W10) that hold the motor from both the right and left sides to remove the motor. Remove the four hexagonal screws (two screws on each side) 4) Apply grease to the gear wheel of the new motor. 5) Install the new motor in the scanner unit and secure it using the hexagonal screws. Tighten the screws with the specified torque (380 kgf-
cm). 6) After replacing the motor, assemble the unit in the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. Remove the motor. Apply grease. 8 Motor gear wheel Do not forget to tighten the screws and connect the cables. 829 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to check the operation. 1) Turn on the radar power supply. After the countdown is completed, start emission and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that you do not hear any unusual sound when the motor starts, rotates, and stops. 2) Open the service engineer menu to initialize the motor rotation time. 8.4.3.2 Scanner UnitNKE-1125/2254
[Required tools]
Single-ended wrench (width across flats 17 mm for M8 bolts) Tools for removing the cover from the scanner unit.(Refer to the 8.4.2.2)
[Replacement procedure]
1) Remove the cover on the left (port) side
(see Section 8.4.2.2) and remove the cables connected to the motor driver circuit board. 2) Remove the hexagonal bolts (four M8 bolts) and remove the motor. Remove the four bolts. Remove the two cables. Motor Motor driver circuit 3) Remove the hexagonal bolts (four M8 bolts) and remove the installation plate from the motor. Motor driver circuit board Remove the four bolts. Motor 830 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS 4) Attach the installation plate to the replacement motor. Do not forget to tighten the hexagonal bolts to an appropriate torque (210 kgf-cm) so they are free of looseness. Tighten the four bolts. Arm protrusions 5) Install the motor into the scanner unit. Press the motor against the protrusions of the arm fixed to the motor on which the arm extends through the wall of the casing, adjust it to minimize backlash, and fix it in place. Press Do not forget to tighten the hexagonal bolts, to an appropriate torque (140 kgf-cm) so they are free of looseness. 6) After having installed the motor, grease the gear wheel. Grease here. 7) After having replaced the motor, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables. 8) 8.4.3.3 Scanner UnitNKE-2103
[Required tools]
A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screw A Phillips screwdriver for 5 mm screw Single-ended wrench (width across flats 10 mm for M6 bolts) Tools for removing the cover from the scanner unit.(Refer to the 8.4.2.3) 831 8 JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
[Replacement procedure]
1) Open the upper cover (see Section 8.4.2.3) to remove the transmitter-receiver unit. 2) Remove the hexagonal bolts (four M6 bolts) and remove the motor. Grease the gear wheel of the replacement motor and place it in the casing. Do not forget to tighten the hexagonal bolts to an appropriate torque (72 kgf-cm) so they are free of looseness. Remove the four bolts. 3) After having replaced the motor, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly procedure in the reverse order. Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables. Clamp the cables so they do not interfere with the rotation of the motor's rotors.
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to check the operation. 1) Turn on the radar and emit radar waves once the countdown is finished, and check that the radar image is correctly displayed. Check that the motor does not make any abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops. 832
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2008-09-02 | 9380 ~ 9440 | MRD - Marine Radar | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2008-09-02
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Japan Radio Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0028126522
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
226 Airport Parkway
|
||||
1 |
San Jose, California 95110
|
|||||
1 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
B3: Maritime & Aviation Radio Services equipment in 47 CFR parts 80 & 87
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
CKE
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
NKE1125
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
Y**** K****
|
||||
1 | Title |
General Manager
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
1-408********
|
||||
1 |
k******@jrc.co.jp
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 10/17/2008 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | MRD - Marine Radar | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Marine Radar | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Grant Comments | The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures. RF exposure compliance is addressed at the time of licensing, as required by the responsible FCC Bureau(s) including antenna co-location requirements of Section 1.1307(b)(3) | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Japan Radio Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 | Name |
M****** O********
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
81-42********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
81-42********
|
||||
1 |
o******@jrc.co.jp
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 80 | 9380.00000000 | 9440.00000000 | 25000.0000000 | P0N |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC